Professional Documents
Culture Documents
ANSYS, Inc. Southpointe 275 Technology Drive Canonsburg, PA 15317 ansysinfo@ansys.com http://www.ansys.com (T) 724-746-3304 (F) 724-514-9494
Table of Contents
1. Overview of Structural Analyses ......................................................................................................... 11 1.1. Definition of Structural Analysis .................................................................................................... 11 1.2. Types of Structural Analysis ........................................................................................................... 11 1.3. Elements Used in Structural Analyses ............................................................................................ 12 1.4. Material Model Interface ............................................................................................................... 12 1.5. Types of Solution Methods ............................................................................................................ 12 2. Structural Static Analysis .................................................................................................................... 21 2.1. Definition of Static Analysis ........................................................................................................... 21 2.2. Linear vs. Nonlinear Static Analyses ............................................................................................... 21 2.3. Performing a Static Analysis .......................................................................................................... 21 2.3.1. Build the Model ................................................................................................................... 21 2.3.1.1. Points to Remember .................................................................................................... 21 2.3.2. Set Solution Controls ............................................................................................................ 22 2.3.2.1. Access the Solution Controls Dialog Box ...................................................................... 22 2.3.2.2. Using the Basic Tab ..................................................................................................... 22 2.3.2.3. The Transient Tab ........................................................................................................ 23 2.3.2.4. Using the Sol'n Options Tab ......................................................................................... 24 2.3.2.5. Using the Nonlinear Tab .............................................................................................. 24 2.3.2.6. Using the Advanced NL Tab ......................................................................................... 25 2.3.3. Set Additional Solution Options ........................................................................................... 25 2.3.3.1. Stress Stiffening Effects ................................................................................................ 25 2.3.3.2. Newton-Raphson Option ............................................................................................. 26 2.3.3.3. Prestress Effects Calculation ......................................................................................... 26 2.3.3.4. Mass Matrix Formulation ............................................................................................. 26 2.3.3.5. Reference Temperature ............................................................................................... 27 2.3.3.6. Mode Number ............................................................................................................. 27 2.3.3.7. Creep Criteria .............................................................................................................. 27 2.3.3.8. Printed Output ............................................................................................................ 27 2.3.3.9. Extrapolation of Results ............................................................................................... 27 2.3.4. Apply the Loads ................................................................................................................... 27 2.3.4.1. Load Types .................................................................................................................. 27 2.3.4.1.1. Displacements (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ) ................................................... 27 2.3.4.1.2. Forces (FX, FY, FZ) and Moments (MX, MY, MZ) .................................................... 27 2.3.4.1.3. Pressures (PRES) .................................................................................................. 28 2.3.4.1.4. Temperatures (TEMP) .......................................................................................... 28 2.3.4.1.5. Fluences (FLUE) .................................................................................................. 28 2.3.4.1.6. Gravity, Spinning, Etc. ......................................................................................... 28 2.3.4.2. Apply Loads to the Model ............................................................................................ 28 2.3.4.2.1. Applying Loads Using TABLE Type Array Parameters ........................................... 28 2.3.4.3. Calculating Inertia Relief .............................................................................................. 29 2.3.4.3.1. Inertia Relief Output ............................................................................................ 29 2.3.4.3.2. Partial Inertia Relief Calculations .......................................................................... 29 2.3.4.3.3. Using a Macro to Perform Inertia Relief Calculations ........................................... 210 2.3.5. Solve the Analysis .............................................................................................................. 210 2.3.6. Review the Results ............................................................................................................. 210 2.3.6.1. Postprocessors .......................................................................................................... 211 2.3.6.2. Points to Remember .................................................................................................. 211 2.3.6.3. Reviewing Results Data .............................................................................................. 211 2.3.6.4. Typical Postprocessing Operations ............................................................................. 211 2.4. A Sample Static Analysis (GUI Method) ........................................................................................ 213
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 2.4.1. Problem Description .......................................................................................................... 213 2.4.2. Problem Specifications ....................................................................................................... 213 2.4.3. Problem Sketch .................................................................................................................. 214 2.4.3.1. Set the Analysis Title .................................................................................................. 214 2.4.3.2. Set the System of Units .............................................................................................. 214 2.4.3.3. Define Parameters ..................................................................................................... 214 2.4.3.4. Define the Element Types .......................................................................................... 215 2.4.3.5. Define Material Properties ......................................................................................... 215 2.4.3.6. Create Hexagonal Area as Cross-Section ..................................................................... 215 2.4.3.7. Create Keypoints Along a Path ................................................................................... 216 2.4.3.8. Create Lines Along a Path .......................................................................................... 216 2.4.3.9. Create Line from Shank to Handle .............................................................................. 217 2.4.3.10. Cut Hex Section ....................................................................................................... 217 2.4.3.11. Set Meshing Density ................................................................................................ 217 2.4.3.12. Set Element Type for Area Mesh ............................................................................... 217 2.4.3.13. Generate Area Mesh ................................................................................................ 218 2.4.3.14. Drag the 2-D Mesh to Produce 3-D Elements ............................................................ 218 2.4.3.15. Select BOTAREA Component and Delete 2-D Elements ............................................. 218 2.4.3.16. Apply Displacement Boundary Condition at End of Wrench ...................................... 219 2.4.3.17. Display Boundary Conditions ................................................................................... 219 2.4.3.18. Apply Pressure on Handle ........................................................................................ 219 2.4.3.19. Write the First Load Step .......................................................................................... 221 2.4.3.20. Define Downward Pressure ...................................................................................... 221 2.4.3.21. Write Second Load Step ........................................................................................... 222 2.4.3.22. Solve from Load Step Files ....................................................................................... 222 2.4.3.23. Read First Load Step and Review Results .................................................................. 222 2.4.3.24. Read the Next Load Step and Review Results ............................................................ 223 2.4.3.25. Zoom in on Cross-Section ........................................................................................ 223 2.4.3.26. Exit ANSYS ............................................................................................................... 223 2.5. A Sample Static Analysis (Command or Batch Method) ................................................................ 224 2.6. Where to Find Other Examples .................................................................................................... 226 3. Modal Analysis .................................................................................................................................... 31 3.1. Definition of Modal Analysis .......................................................................................................... 31 3.2. Uses for Modal Analysis ................................................................................................................. 31 3.3. Overview of Steps in a Modal Analysis ........................................................................................... 31 3.4. Build the Model ............................................................................................................................ 31 3.5. Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution ............................................................................................ 32 3.5.1. Enter the Solution Processor ................................................................................................. 32 3.5.2. Define Analysis Type and Options ......................................................................................... 32 3.5.2.1. Option: New Analysis [ANTYPE] .................................................................................... 32 3.5.2.2. Option: Analysis Type: Modal [ANTYPE] ........................................................................ 33 3.5.2.3. Option: Mode-Extraction Method [MODOPT] ............................................................... 33 3.5.2.4. Option: Number of Modes to Extract [MODOPT] ........................................................... 34 3.5.2.5. Option: Number of Modes to Expand [MXPAND] .......................................................... 34 3.5.2.6. Option: Mass Matrix Formulation [LUMPM] .................................................................. 34 3.5.2.7. Option: Prestress Effects Calculation [PSTRES] .............................................................. 34 3.5.2.8. Additional Modal Analysis Options .............................................................................. 34 3.5.3. Define Master Degrees of Freedom ....................................................................................... 35 3.5.4. Apply Loads ......................................................................................................................... 35 3.5.4.1. Applying Loads Using Commands ............................................................................... 35 3.5.4.2. Applying Loads Using the GUI ..................................................................................... 36 3.5.4.3. Listing Loads ............................................................................................................... 36
vi
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 3.5.5. Specify Load Step Options .................................................................................................... 36 3.5.6. Participation Factor Table Output ......................................................................................... 37 3.5.7. Solve ................................................................................................................................... 37 3.5.7.1. Output ........................................................................................................................ 37 3.5.7.1.1. Output From Subspace Mode-Extraction Method ................................................ 37 3.5.8. Exit the Solution Processor ................................................................................................... 38 3.6. Expand the Modes ........................................................................................................................ 38 3.6.1. Points to Remember ............................................................................................................ 38 3.6.2. Expanding the Modes .......................................................................................................... 38 3.7. Review the Results ...................................................................................................................... 310 3.7.1. Points to Remember ........................................................................................................... 310 3.7.2. Reviewing Results Data ...................................................................................................... 310 3.7.3. Option: Listing All Frequencies ........................................................................................... 310 3.7.4. Option: Display Deformed Shape ........................................................................................ 311 3.7.5. Option: List Master DOF ...................................................................................................... 311 3.7.6. Option: Line Element Results .............................................................................................. 311 3.7.7. Option: Contour Displays ................................................................................................... 311 3.7.8. Option: Tabular Listings ...................................................................................................... 312 3.7.9. Other Capabilities .............................................................................................................. 312 3.8. A Sample Modal Analysis (GUI Method) ....................................................................................... 312 3.8.1. Problem Description .......................................................................................................... 312 3.8.2. Problem Specifications ....................................................................................................... 312 3.8.3. Problem Sketch .................................................................................................................. 313 3.9. A Sample Modal Analysis (Command or Batch Method) ............................................................... 313 3.10. Where to Find Other Examples .................................................................................................. 314 3.11. Prestressed Modal Analysis ....................................................................................................... 315 3.12. Prestressed Modal Analysis of a Large-Deflection Solution ......................................................... 315 3.13. Comparing Mode-Extraction Methods ....................................................................................... 316 3.13.1. Block Lanczos Method ...................................................................................................... 317 3.13.2. Subspace Method ............................................................................................................ 318 3.13.3. PowerDynamics Method .................................................................................................. 318 3.13.4. Reduced Method .............................................................................................................. 318 3.13.5. Unsymmetric Method ....................................................................................................... 318 3.13.6. Damped Method .............................................................................................................. 318 3.13.6.1. Damped Method-Real and Imaginary Parts of the Eigenvalue ................................... 319 3.13.6.2. Damped Method-Real and Imaginary Parts of the Eigenvector .................................. 319 3.13.7. QR Damped Method ........................................................................................................ 319 3.14. Matrix Reduction ...................................................................................................................... 319 3.14.1. Theoretical Basis of Matrix Reduction ................................................................................ 320 3.14.1.1. Guidelines for Selecting Master DOF ........................................................................ 320 3.14.1.2. A Note About Program-Selected Masters .................................................................. 322 4. Harmonic Response Analysis .............................................................................................................. 41 4.1. Definition of Harmonic Response Analysis ..................................................................................... 41 4.2. Uses for Harmonic Response Analysis ............................................................................................ 41 4.3. Commands Used in a Harmonic Response Analysis ........................................................................ 42 4.4. The Three Solution Methods ......................................................................................................... 42 4.4.1. The Full Method ................................................................................................................... 42 4.4.2. The Reduced Method ........................................................................................................... 42 4.4.3. The Mode Superposition Method ......................................................................................... 43 4.4.4. Restrictions Common to All Three Methods .......................................................................... 43 4.5. How to Do Harmonic Response Analysis ........................................................................................ 43 4.5.1. Full Harmonic Response Analysis .......................................................................................... 43
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
vii
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 4.5.2. Build the Model ................................................................................................................... 44 4.5.2.1. Points to Remember .................................................................................................... 44 4.5.3. Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution ................................................................................... 44 4.5.3.1. Enter the ANSYS Solution Processor ............................................................................. 44 4.5.3.2. Define the Analysis Type and Options .......................................................................... 44 4.5.3.3. Apply Loads on the Model ........................................................................................... 45 4.5.3.3.1. Applying Loads Using Commands ....................................................................... 48 4.5.3.3.2. Applying Loads and Listing Loads Using the GUI ................................................. 48 4.5.3.4. Specify Load Step Options ........................................................................................... 49 4.5.3.4.1. General Options .................................................................................................. 49 4.5.3.4.2. Dynamics Options ............................................................................................. 410 4.5.3.4.3. Output Controls ................................................................................................ 410 4.5.3.5. Save a Backup Copy of the Database to a Named File ................................................. 410 4.5.3.6. Start Solution Calculations ......................................................................................... 410 4.5.3.7. Repeat for Additional Load Steps ............................................................................... 411 4.5.3.8. Leave SOLUTION ....................................................................................................... 411 4.5.4. Review the Results ............................................................................................................. 411 4.5.4.1. Postprocessors .......................................................................................................... 411 4.5.4.2. Points to Remember .................................................................................................. 411 4.5.4.3. Using POST26 ............................................................................................................ 411 4.5.4.4. Using POST1 .............................................................................................................. 412 4.6. Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (GUI Method) ..................................................................... 413 4.6.1. Problem Description .......................................................................................................... 413 4.6.2. Problem Specifications ....................................................................................................... 413 4.6.3. Problem Diagram ............................................................................................................... 414 4.6.3.1. Set the Analysis Title .................................................................................................. 414 4.6.3.2. Define the Element Types .......................................................................................... 414 4.6.3.3. Define the Real Constants .......................................................................................... 415 4.6.3.4. Create the Nodes ....................................................................................................... 415 4.6.3.5. Create the Spring Elements ........................................................................................ 415 4.6.3.6. Create the Mass Elements .......................................................................................... 416 4.6.3.7. Specify the Analysis Type, MDOF, and Load Step Specifications .................................. 416 4.6.3.8. Define Loads and Boundary Conditions ...................................................................... 416 4.6.3.9. Solve the Model ........................................................................................................ 417 4.6.3.10. Review the Results ................................................................................................... 417 4.6.3.11. Exit ANSYS ............................................................................................................... 418 4.7. Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (Command or Batch Method) ............................................. 418 4.8. Where to Find Other Examples .................................................................................................... 419 4.9. Reduced Harmonic Response Analysis ......................................................................................... 419 4.9.1. Apply Loads and Obtain the Reduced Solution ................................................................... 420 4.9.2. Review the Results of the Reduced Solution ........................................................................ 421 4.9.3. Expand the Solution (Expansion Pass) ................................................................................. 421 4.9.3.1. Points to Remember .................................................................................................. 421 4.9.3.2. Expanding the Modes ................................................................................................ 421 4.9.4. Review the Results of the Expanded Solution ...................................................................... 423 4.9.5. Sample Input ..................................................................................................................... 423 4.10. Mode Superposition Harmonic Response Analysis ..................................................................... 424 4.10.1. Obtain the Modal Solution ................................................................................................ 425 4.10.2. Obtain the Mode Superposition Harmonic Solution .......................................................... 425 4.10.3. Expand the Mode Superposition Solution ......................................................................... 427 4.10.4. Review the Results ........................................................................................................... 427 4.10.5. Sample Input ................................................................................................................... 427
viii
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 4.11. Other Analysis Details ............................................................................................................... 428 4.11.1. Prestressed Harmonic Response Analysis .......................................................................... 428 4.11.1.1. Prestressed Full Harmonic Response Analysis ........................................................... 428 4.11.1.2. Prestressed Reduced Harmonic Response Analysis ................................................... 428 4.11.1.3. Prestressed Mode Superposition Harmonic Response Analysis ................................. 429 5. Transient Dynamic Analysis ................................................................................................................ 51 5.1. Definition of Transient Dynamic Analysis ....................................................................................... 51 5.2. Preparing for a Transient Dynamic Analysis ................................................................................... 51 5.3. Three Solution Methods ................................................................................................................ 52 5.3.1. Full Method ......................................................................................................................... 52 5.3.2. Mode Superposition Method ................................................................................................ 52 5.3.3. Reduced Method ................................................................................................................. 53 5.4. Performing a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis ................................................................................ 53 5.4.1. Build the Model ................................................................................................................... 54 5.4.1.1. Points to Remember .................................................................................................... 54 5.4.2. Establish Initial Conditions ................................................................................................... 54 5.4.3. Set Solution Controls ............................................................................................................ 56 5.4.3.1. Access the Solution Controls Dialog Box ...................................................................... 56 5.4.3.2. Using the Basic Tab ..................................................................................................... 57 5.4.3.3. Using the Transient Tab ............................................................................................... 57 5.4.3.4. Using the Remaining Solution Controls Tabs ................................................................ 58 5.4.4. Set Additional Solution Options ........................................................................................... 58 5.4.4.1. Prestress Effects ........................................................................................................... 59 5.4.4.2. Damping Option ......................................................................................................... 59 5.4.4.3. Mass Matrix Formulation ............................................................................................. 59 5.4.5. Apply the Loads ................................................................................................................... 59 5.4.6. Save the Load Configuration for the Current Load Step ....................................................... 510 5.4.7. Repeat Steps 3-6 for Each Load Step ................................................................................... 510 5.4.8. Save a Backup Copy of the Database .................................................................................. 510 5.4.9. Start the Transient Solution ................................................................................................ 510 5.4.10. Exit the Solution Processor ............................................................................................... 511 5.4.11. Review the Results ........................................................................................................... 511 5.4.11.1. Postprocessors ........................................................................................................ 511 5.4.11.2. Points to Remember ................................................................................................ 511 5.4.11.3. Using POST26 .......................................................................................................... 511 5.4.11.4. Other Capabilities .................................................................................................... 512 5.4.11.5. Using POST1 ............................................................................................................ 512 5.4.12. Sample Input for a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis ........................................................... 512 5.5. Performing a Mode Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis .................................................... 513 5.5.1. Build the Model .................................................................................................................. 513 5.5.2. Obtain the Modal Solution ................................................................................................. 513 5.5.3. Obtain the Mode Superposition Transient Solution ............................................................. 514 5.5.3.1. Points to Remember .................................................................................................. 514 5.5.3.2. Obtaining the Solution .............................................................................................. 514 5.5.4. Expand the Mode Superposition Solution ........................................................................... 518 5.5.5. Review the Results ............................................................................................................. 518 5.5.6. Sample Input for a Mode Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis ................................... 518 5.6. Performing a Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis ...................................................................... 519 5.6.1. Obtain the Reduced Solution .............................................................................................. 519 5.6.1.1. Define the Analysis Type and Options ........................................................................ 520 5.6.1.2. Define Master Degrees of Freedom ............................................................................ 520 5.6.1.3. Define Gap Conditions ............................................................................................... 520
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ix
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 5.6.1.3.1. Gap Conditions ................................................................................................. 520 5.6.1.4. Apply Initial Conditions to the Model ......................................................................... 521 5.6.1.4.1. Dynamics Options ............................................................................................. 522 5.6.1.4.2. General Options ................................................................................................ 522 5.6.1.4.3. Output Control Options .................................................................................... 523 5.6.1.5. Write the First Load Step to a Load Step File ............................................................... 523 5.6.1.6. Specify Loads and Load Step Options ......................................................................... 523 5.6.1.7. Obtaining the Solution .............................................................................................. 523 5.6.2. Review the Results of the Reduced Solution ........................................................................ 523 5.6.3. Expand the Solution (Expansion Pass) ................................................................................. 524 5.6.3.1. Points to Remember .................................................................................................. 524 5.6.3.2. Expanding the Solution ............................................................................................. 524 5.6.4. Review the Results of the Expanded Solution ...................................................................... 525 5.7. Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (GUI Method) ......................................................... 526 5.7.1. Problem Description .......................................................................................................... 526 5.7.2. Problem Specifications ....................................................................................................... 526 5.7.3. Problem Sketch .................................................................................................................. 527 5.7.3.1. Specify the Title ......................................................................................................... 527 5.7.3.2. Define Element Types ................................................................................................ 527 5.7.3.3. Define Real Constants ................................................................................................ 527 5.7.3.4. Define Material Properties ......................................................................................... 528 5.7.3.5. Define Nodes ............................................................................................................ 528 5.7.3.6. Define Elements ........................................................................................................ 528 5.7.3.7. Define Analysis Type and Analysis Options ................................................................. 529 5.7.3.8. Define Master Degrees of Freedom ............................................................................ 529 5.7.3.9. Set Load Step Options ............................................................................................... 529 5.7.3.10. Apply Loads for the First Load Step .......................................................................... 529 5.7.3.11. Specify Output ........................................................................................................ 529 5.7.3.12. Solve the First Load Step .......................................................................................... 530 5.7.3.13. Apply Loads for the Next Load Step .......................................................................... 530 5.7.4. Solve the Next Load Step .................................................................................................... 530 5.7.4.1. Set the Next Time Step and Solve ............................................................................... 530 5.7.4.2. Run the Expansion Pass and Solve .............................................................................. 530 5.7.4.3. Review the Results in POST26 .................................................................................... 531 5.7.4.4. Review the Results in POST1 ...................................................................................... 531 5.7.4.5. Exit ANSYS ................................................................................................................. 531 5.8. Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (Command or Batch Method) ................................. 531 5.9. Performing a Prestressed Transient Dynamic Analysis .................................................................. 532 5.9.1. Prestressed Full Transient Dynamic Analysis ........................................................................ 532 5.9.2. Prestressed Mode Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis .............................................. 533 5.9.3. Prestressed Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis ................................................................ 533 5.10. Other Analysis Details ............................................................................................................... 533 5.10.1. Guidelines for Integration Time Step ................................................................................. 533 5.10.2. Automatic Time Stepping ................................................................................................. 535 5.10.3. Damping .......................................................................................................................... 536 5.11. Where to Find Other Examples .................................................................................................. 540 6. Spectrum Analysis ............................................................................................................................... 61 6.1. Definition of Spectrum Analysis .................................................................................................... 61 6.2. What is a Spectrum? ..................................................................................................................... 61 6.2.1. Response Spectrum ............................................................................................................. 61 6.2.1.1. Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS) ....................................................................... 61 6.2.1.2. Multi-Point Response Spectrum (MPRS) ....................................................................... 61
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 6.2.2. Dynamic Design Analysis Method (DDAM) ............................................................................ 62 6.2.3. Power Spectral Density ........................................................................................................ 62 6.2.4. Deterministic vs. Probabilistic Analyses ................................................................................. 62 6.3. Steps in a Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS) Analysis ............................................................ 62 6.3.1. Build the Model ................................................................................................................... 63 6.3.1.1. Points to Remember .................................................................................................... 63 6.3.2. Obtain the Modal Solution ................................................................................................... 63 6.3.3. Obtain the Spectrum Solution .............................................................................................. 63 6.3.4. Expand the Modes ............................................................................................................... 66 6.3.5. Combine the Modes ............................................................................................................. 66 6.3.6. Review the Results ............................................................................................................... 68 6.4. Sample Spectrum Analysis (GUI Method) ..................................................................................... 610 6.4.1. Problem Description .......................................................................................................... 610 6.4.2. Problem Specifications ....................................................................................................... 610 6.4.3. Problem Sketch .................................................................................................................. 611 6.4.4. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 611 6.4.4.1. Set the Analysis Title .................................................................................................. 611 6.4.4.2. Define the Element Type ............................................................................................ 611 6.4.4.3. Define the Real Constants .......................................................................................... 611 6.4.4.4. Define Material Properties ......................................................................................... 612 6.4.4.5. Define Keypoints and Line ......................................................................................... 612 6.4.4.6. Set Global Element Density and Mesh Line ................................................................. 612 6.4.4.7. Set Boundary Conditions ........................................................................................... 613 6.4.4.8. Specify Analysis Type and Options ............................................................................. 613 6.4.4.9. Solve the Modal Analysis ........................................................................................... 613 6.4.4.10. Set Up the Spectrum Analysis .................................................................................. 613 6.4.4.11. Define Spectrum Value vs. Frequency Table ............................................................. 614 6.4.4.12. Solve Spectrum Analysis .......................................................................................... 614 6.4.4.13. Set up the Expansion Pass ........................................................................................ 614 6.4.4.14. Expand the Modes ................................................................................................... 614 6.4.4.15. Start Expansion Pass Calculation .............................................................................. 615 6.4.4.16. Set Up Mode Combination for Spectrum Analysis ..................................................... 615 6.4.4.17. Select Mode Combination Method ........................................................................... 615 6.4.4.18. Combine the Modes ................................................................................................ 615 6.4.4.19. Postprocessing: Print Out Nodal, Element, and Reaction Solutions ............................ 615 6.4.4.20. Exit ANSYS ............................................................................................................... 616 6.5. Sample Spectrum Analysis (Command or Batch Method) ............................................................. 616 6.6. Where to Find Other Examples .................................................................................................... 617 6.7. How to Do a Random Vibration (PSD) Analysis ............................................................................. 618 6.7.1. Expand the Modes ............................................................................................................. 618 6.7.2. Obtain the Spectrum Solution ............................................................................................ 618 6.7.3. Combine the Modes ........................................................................................................... 621 6.7.4. Review the Results ............................................................................................................. 622 6.7.4.1. Reviewing the Results in POST1 ................................................................................. 622 6.7.4.1.1. Read the Desired Set of Results into the Database .............................................. 622 6.7.4.1.2. Display the Results ............................................................................................ 623 6.7.4.2. Calculating Response PSDs in POST26 ........................................................................ 623 6.7.4.3. Calculating Covariance in POST26 .............................................................................. 623 6.7.5. Sample Input ..................................................................................................................... 624 6.8. How to Do DDAM Spectrum Analysis .......................................................................................... 625 6.9. How to Do Multi-Point Response Spectrum (MPRS) Analysis ........................................................ 625 7. Buckling Analysis ................................................................................................................................ 71
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
xi
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 7.1. Definition of Buckling Analysis ...................................................................................................... 71 7.2. Types of Buckling Analyses ........................................................................................................... 71 7.2.1. Nonlinear Buckling Analysis .................................................................................................. 71 7.2.2. Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis ................................................................................................ 71 7.3. Commands Used in a Buckling Analysis ......................................................................................... 72 7.4. Procedure for Nonlinear Buckling Analysis ..................................................................................... 72 7.4.1. Applying Load Increments ................................................................................................... 72 7.4.2. Automatic Time Stepping ..................................................................................................... 72 7.4.3. Important ............................................................................................................................ 72 7.4.4. Points to Remember ............................................................................................................ 73 7.5. Procedure for Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis ................................................................................... 73 7.5.1. Build the Model ................................................................................................................... 73 7.5.1.1. Points to Remember .................................................................................................... 74 7.5.2. Obtain the Static Solution .................................................................................................... 74 7.5.3. Obtain the Eigenvalue Buckling Solution .............................................................................. 75 7.5.4. Expand the Solution ............................................................................................................. 76 7.5.4.1. Points to Remember .................................................................................................... 76 7.5.4.2. Expanding the Solution ............................................................................................... 76 7.5.5. Review the Results ............................................................................................................... 77 7.6. Sample Buckling Analysis (GUI Method) ........................................................................................ 78 7.6.1. Problem Description ............................................................................................................ 78 7.6.2. Problem Specifications ......................................................................................................... 78 7.6.3. Problem Sketch .................................................................................................................... 79 7.6.3.1. Set the Analysis Title .................................................................................................... 79 7.6.3.2. Define the Element Type ............................................................................................. 79 7.6.3.3. Define the Real Constants and Material Properties ...................................................... 710 7.6.3.4. Define Nodes and Elements ....................................................................................... 710 7.6.3.5. Define the Boundary Conditions ................................................................................ 711 7.6.3.6. Solve the Static Analysis ............................................................................................. 711 7.6.3.7. Solve the Buckling Analysis ........................................................................................ 711 7.6.3.8. Review the Results ..................................................................................................... 712 7.6.3.9. Exit ANSYS ................................................................................................................. 712 7.7. Sample Buckling Analysis (Command or Batch Method) ............................................................... 712 7.8. Where to Find Other Examples .................................................................................................... 712 8. Nonlinear Structural Analysis ............................................................................................................. 81 8.1. What is Structural Nonlinearity? .................................................................................................... 81 8.1.1. Causes of Nonlinear Behavior ............................................................................................... 81 8.1.1.1. Changing Status (Including Contact) ............................................................................ 82 8.1.1.2. Geometric Nonlinearities ............................................................................................. 82 8.1.1.3. Material Nonlinearities ................................................................................................. 82 8.1.2. Basic Information About Nonlinear Analyses ......................................................................... 82 8.1.2.1. Conservative versus Nonconservative Behavior; Path Dependency ............................... 85 8.1.2.2. Substeps ..................................................................................................................... 85 8.1.2.3. Load Direction in a Large-Deflection Analysis ............................................................... 86 8.1.2.4. Nonlinear Transient Analyses ....................................................................................... 86 8.2. Using Geometric Nonlinearities ..................................................................................................... 86 8.2.1. Stress-Strain ......................................................................................................................... 87 8.2.1.1. Large Deflections with Small Strain .............................................................................. 87 8.2.2. Stress Stiffening ................................................................................................................... 87 8.2.3. Spin Softening ..................................................................................................................... 88 8.3. Modeling Material Nonlinearities .................................................................................................. 88 8.3.1. Nonlinear Materials .............................................................................................................. 88
xii
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 8.3.1.1. Plasticity ..................................................................................................................... 89 8.3.1.1.1. Plastic Material Options ..................................................................................... 810 8.3.1.2. Multilinear Elasticity ................................................................................................... 816 8.3.1.3. User Defined Material ................................................................................................ 816 8.3.1.4. Hyperelasticity .......................................................................................................... 817 8.3.1.4.1. Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER) .................................................. 818 8.3.1.4.2. Ogden Hyperelastic Option ............................................................................... 818 8.3.1.4.3. Neo-Hookean Hyperelastic Option .................................................................... 819 8.3.1.4.4. Polynomial Form Hyperelastic Option ............................................................... 819 8.3.1.4.5. Arruda-Boyce Hyperelastic Option ..................................................................... 819 8.3.1.4.6. Gent Hyperelastic Option .................................................................................. 820 8.3.1.4.7. Yeoh Hyperelastic Option ................................................................................. 820 8.3.1.4.8. Blatz-Ko Foam Hyperelastic Option ................................................................... 820 8.3.1.4.9. Ogden Compressible Foam Hyperelastic Option ................................................ 820 8.3.1.4.10. User-Defined Hyperelastic Option ................................................................... 821 8.3.1.4.11. Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Option (TB,MOONEY) ............................................ 821 8.3.1.5. Creep ........................................................................................................................ 829 8.3.1.5.1. Implicit Creep Procedure ................................................................................... 830 8.3.1.5.2. Explicit Creep Procedure ................................................................................... 831 8.3.1.6. Shape Memory Alloy .................................................................................................. 831 8.3.1.7. Viscoplasticity ........................................................................................................... 833 8.3.1.8. Viscoelasticity ............................................................................................................ 833 8.3.1.9. Swelling .................................................................................................................... 834 8.3.2. Material Model Combinations ............................................................................................. 835 8.3.2.1. BISO and CHAB Example ............................................................................................ 835 8.3.2.2. MISO and CHAB Example ........................................................................................... 835 8.3.2.3. NLISO and CHAB Example .......................................................................................... 835 8.3.2.4. BISO and RATE Example ............................................................................................. 836 8.3.2.5. MISO and RATE Example ............................................................................................ 836 8.3.2.6. NLISO and RATE Example ........................................................................................... 837 8.3.2.7. BISO and CREEP Example ........................................................................................... 837 8.3.2.8. MISO and CREEP Example .......................................................................................... 837 8.3.2.9. NLISO and CREEP Example ......................................................................................... 838 8.3.2.10. BKIN and CREEP Example ......................................................................................... 838 8.3.2.11. HILL and BISO Example ............................................................................................ 838 8.3.2.12. HILL and MISO Example ........................................................................................... 839 8.3.2.13. HILL and NLISO Example .......................................................................................... 839 8.3.2.14. HILL and BKIN Example ............................................................................................ 839 8.3.2.15. HILL and MKIN Example ........................................................................................... 840 8.3.2.16. HILL and KINH Example ............................................................................................ 840 8.3.2.17. HILL and CHAB Example .......................................................................................... 841 8.3.2.18. HILL and BISO and CHAB Example ............................................................................ 841 8.3.2.19. HILL and MISO and CHAB Example ........................................................................... 841 8.3.2.20. HILL and NLISO and CHAB Example .......................................................................... 842 8.3.2.21. HILL and RATE and BISO Example ............................................................................. 843 8.3.2.22. HILL and RATE and MISO Example ............................................................................ 844 8.3.2.23. HILL and RATE and NLISO Example ........................................................................... 844 8.3.2.24. HILL and CREEP Example .......................................................................................... 845 8.3.2.25. HILL and CREEP and BISO Example ........................................................................... 846 8.3.2.26. HILL and CREEP and MISO Example .......................................................................... 847 8.3.2.27. HILL and CREEP and NLISO Example ......................................................................... 847 8.3.2.28. HILL and CREEP and BKIN Example ........................................................................... 847
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
xiii
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 8.3.2.29. Hyperelasticity and Viscoelasticity (Implicit) Example ................................................ 848 8.4. Running a Nonlinear Analysis in ANSYS ....................................................................................... 848 8.5. Performing a Nonlinear Static Analysis ........................................................................................ 849 8.5.1. Build the Model .................................................................................................................. 849 8.5.2. Set Solution Controls .......................................................................................................... 849 8.5.2.1. Using the Basic Tab: Special Considerations ............................................................... 850 8.5.2.2. Advanced Analysis Options You Can Set on the Solution Controls Dialog Box ............. 850 8.5.2.2.1. Equation Solver ................................................................................................ 850 8.5.2.3. Advanced Load Step Options You Can Set on the Solution Controls Dialog Box .......... 851 8.5.2.3.1. Automatic Time Stepping ................................................................................. 851 8.5.2.3.2. Convergence Criteria ........................................................................................ 851 8.5.2.3.3. Maximum Number of Equilibrium Iterations ...................................................... 853 8.5.2.3.4. Predictor-Corrector Option ............................................................................... 853 8.5.2.3.5. Line Search Option ........................................................................................... 853 8.5.2.3.6. Cutback Criteria ................................................................................................ 853 8.5.3. Set Additional Solution Options .......................................................................................... 853 8.5.3.1. Advanced Analysis Options You Cannot Set on the Solution Controls Dialog Box ........ 854 8.5.3.1.1. Stress Stiffness .................................................................................................. 854 8.5.3.1.2. Newton-Raphson Option .................................................................................. 854 8.5.3.2. Advanced Load Step Options You Cannot Set on the Solution Controls Dialog Box ..... 855 8.5.3.2.1. Creep Criteria .................................................................................................... 855 8.5.3.2.2. Time Step Open Control .................................................................................... 855 8.5.3.2.3. Solution Monitoring .......................................................................................... 856 8.5.3.2.4. Birth and Death ................................................................................................ 856 8.5.3.2.5. Output Control ................................................................................................. 856 8.5.4. Apply the Loads ................................................................................................................. 857 8.5.5. Solve the Analysis .............................................................................................................. 857 8.5.6. Review the Results ............................................................................................................. 857 8.5.6.1. Points to Remember .................................................................................................. 857 8.5.6.2. Reviewing Results in POST1 ....................................................................................... 857 8.5.6.3. Reviewing Results in POST26 ..................................................................................... 859 8.5.7. Terminating a Running Job; Restarting ............................................................................... 860 8.6. Performing a Nonlinear Transient Analysis ................................................................................... 860 8.6.1. Build the Model .................................................................................................................. 860 8.6.2. Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution .................................................................................. 860 8.6.3. Review the Results ............................................................................................................. 862 8.7. Sample Input for a Nonlinear Transient Analysis .......................................................................... 862 8.8. Restarts ...................................................................................................................................... 863 8.9. Using Nonlinear (Changing-Status) Elements ............................................................................... 863 8.9.1. Element Birth and Death .................................................................................................... 863 8.10. Tips and Guidelines for Nonlinear Analysis ................................................................................. 864 8.10.1. Starting Out with Nonlinear Analysis ................................................................................. 864 8.10.1.1. Be Aware of How the Program and Your Structure Behave ........................................ 864 8.10.1.2. Keep It Simple ......................................................................................................... 864 8.10.1.3. Use an Adequate Mesh Density ................................................................................ 864 8.10.1.4. Apply the Load Gradually ......................................................................................... 865 8.10.2. Overcoming Convergence Problems ................................................................................. 865 8.10.2.1. Performing Nonlinear Diagnostics ............................................................................ 865 8.10.2.2. Tracking Convergence Graphically ........................................................................... 867 8.10.2.3. Using Automatic Time Stepping ............................................................................... 867 8.10.2.4. Using Line Search .................................................................................................... 868 8.10.2.5. Using the Arc-Length Method .................................................................................. 868
xiv
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 8.10.2.6. Artificially Inhibit Divergence in Your Model's Response ........................................... 870 8.10.2.7. Turn Off Extra Element Shapes ................................................................................. 870 8.10.2.8. Using Birth and Death Wisely ................................................................................... 870 8.10.2.9. Read Your Output .................................................................................................... 870 8.10.2.10. Graph the Load and Response History .................................................................... 872 8.11. Sample Nonlinear Analysis (GUI Method) ................................................................................... 872 8.11.1. Problem Description ........................................................................................................ 872 8.11.2. Problem Specifications ..................................................................................................... 873 8.11.3. Problem Sketch ................................................................................................................ 873 8.11.3.1. Set the Analysis Title and Jobname .......................................................................... 873 8.11.3.2. Define the Element Types ........................................................................................ 874 8.11.3.3. Define Material Properties ........................................................................................ 874 8.11.3.4. Specify the Kinematic Hardening material model (KINH) ........................................... 874 8.11.3.5. Label Graph Axes and Plot Data Tables ..................................................................... 874 8.11.3.6. Create Rectangle ..................................................................................................... 875 8.11.3.7. Set Element Size ...................................................................................................... 875 8.11.3.8. Mesh the Rectangle ................................................................................................. 875 8.11.3.9. Assign Analysis and Load Step Options .................................................................... 875 8.11.3.10. Monitor the Displacement ..................................................................................... 876 8.11.3.11. Apply Constraints .................................................................................................. 876 8.11.3.12. Solve the First Load Step ........................................................................................ 877 8.11.3.13. Solve the Next Six Load Steps ................................................................................. 877 8.11.3.14. Review the Monitor File ......................................................................................... 878 8.11.3.15. Use the General Postprocessor to Plot Results. ........................................................ 878 8.11.3.16. Define Variables for Time-History Postprocessing ................................................... 878 8.11.3.17. Plot Time-History Results ....................................................................................... 879 8.11.3.18. Exit ANSYS ............................................................................................................. 879 8.12. Sample Nonlinear Analysis (Command or Batch Method) ........................................................... 879 8.13. Where to Find Other Examples .................................................................................................. 882 9. Material Curve Fitting ......................................................................................................................... 91 9.1. Applicable Material Behavior Types ............................................................................................... 91 9.2. Hyperelastic Material Curve Fitting ................................................................................................ 91 9.2.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine Your Hyperelastic Material Behavior ................................. 91 9.2.1.1. Prepare Experimental Data .......................................................................................... 92 9.2.1.2. Input the Data into ANSYS ........................................................................................... 93 9.2.1.2.1. Batch .................................................................................................................. 93 9.2.1.2.2. GUI ..................................................................................................................... 93 9.2.1.3. Select a Material Model Option .................................................................................... 93 9.2.1.3.1. Batch .................................................................................................................. 94 9.2.1.3.2. GUI ..................................................................................................................... 94 9.2.1.4. Initialize the Coefficients .............................................................................................. 94 9.2.1.4.1. Batch .................................................................................................................. 95 9.2.1.4.2. GUI ..................................................................................................................... 95 9.2.1.5. Specify Control Parameters and Solve .......................................................................... 96 9.2.1.5.1. Batch .................................................................................................................. 96 9.2.1.5.2. GUI ..................................................................................................................... 96 9.2.1.6. Plot Your Experimental Data and Analyze ..................................................................... 96 9.2.1.6.1. Batch .................................................................................................................. 96 9.2.1.6.2. GUI ..................................................................................................................... 97 9.2.1.6.3. Review/Verify ..................................................................................................... 97 9.2.1.7. Write Data to TB Command ......................................................................................... 97 9.2.1.7.1. Batch .................................................................................................................. 97
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
xv
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 9.2.1.7.2. GUI ..................................................................................................................... 98 9.3. Creep Material Curve Fitting ......................................................................................................... 98 9.3.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine Your Creep Material Behavior ........................................... 98 9.3.1.1. Prepare Experimental Data .......................................................................................... 98 9.3.1.2. Input the Data into ANSYS ......................................................................................... 910 9.3.1.2.1. Batch ................................................................................................................ 910 9.3.1.2.2. GUI ................................................................................................................... 910 9.3.1.3. Select a Material Model Option .................................................................................. 910 9.3.1.3.1. Batch ................................................................................................................ 910 9.3.1.3.2. GUI ................................................................................................................... 911 9.3.1.4. Initialize the Coefficients ............................................................................................ 911 9.3.1.4.1. Batch ................................................................................................................ 912 9.3.1.4.2. GUI ................................................................................................................... 912 9.3.1.5. Specify Control Parameters and Solve ........................................................................ 912 9.3.1.5.1. Batch ................................................................................................................ 913 9.3.1.5.2. GUI ................................................................................................................... 913 9.3.1.6. Plot the Experimental Data and Analyze ..................................................................... 913 9.3.1.6.1. Batch ................................................................................................................ 913 9.3.1.6.2. GUI ................................................................................................................... 914 9.3.1.6.3. Analyze Your Curves for Proper Fit ..................................................................... 914 9.3.1.7. Write Data to TB Command ....................................................................................... 914 9.3.1.7.1. Batch ................................................................................................................ 914 9.3.1.7.2. GUI ................................................................................................................... 914 9.3.2. Tips For Curve Fitting Creep Models ................................................................................... 914 9.4. Viscoelastic Material Curve Fitting ............................................................................................... 915 9.4.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine the Coefficients of Viscoelastic Material Model ................. 916 9.4.1.1. Prepare Experimental Data ........................................................................................ 916 9.4.1.2. Input the Data into ANSYS ......................................................................................... 917 9.4.1.2.1. Batch ................................................................................................................ 917 9.4.1.2.2. GUI ................................................................................................................... 918 9.4.1.3. Select a Material Model Option .................................................................................. 918 9.4.1.3.1. Batch ................................................................................................................ 918 9.4.1.3.2. GUI ................................................................................................................... 918 9.4.1.4. Initialize the Coefficients ............................................................................................ 919 9.4.1.4.1. Batch ................................................................................................................ 919 9.4.1.4.2. GUI ................................................................................................................... 920 9.4.1.5. Specify Control Parameters and Solve ........................................................................ 920 9.4.1.5.1. Temperature Dependent Solves Using the Shift Function .................................. 921 9.4.1.5.2. Temperature Dependent Solves Without the Shift Function ............................... 921 9.4.1.5.3. Batch ................................................................................................................ 922 9.4.1.5.4. GUI ................................................................................................................... 923 9.4.1.6. Plot the Experimental Data and Analyze ..................................................................... 923 9.4.1.6.1. Batch ................................................................................................................ 923 9.4.1.6.2. GUI ................................................................................................................... 923 9.4.1.6.3. Analyze Your Curves for Proper Fit ..................................................................... 923 9.4.1.7. Write Data to TB Command ....................................................................................... 923 9.4.1.7.1. Batch ................................................................................................................ 923 9.4.1.7.2. GUI ................................................................................................................... 924 10. Gasket Joints Simulation ................................................................................................................. 101 10.1. Overview of Gasket Joints ......................................................................................................... 101 10.2. Performing a Gasket Joint Analysis ............................................................................................ 101 10.3. Finite Element Formulation ....................................................................................................... 102
xvi
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 10.3.1. Element Topologies ......................................................................................................... 102 10.3.2. Thickness Direction .......................................................................................................... 102 10.4. ANSYS Family of Interface Elements .......................................................................................... 103 10.4.1. Element Selection ............................................................................................................ 103 10.4.2. Applications ..................................................................................................................... 103 10.5. Material Definition .................................................................................................................... 104 10.5.1. Material Characteristics .................................................................................................... 104 10.5.2. Input Format .................................................................................................................... 105 10.5.2.1. Define General Parameters ...................................................................................... 106 10.5.2.2. Define Compression Load Closure Curve .................................................................. 106 10.5.2.3. Define Linear Unloading Data .................................................................................. 106 10.5.2.4. Define Nonlinear Unloading Data ............................................................................. 107 10.5.3. Temperature Dependencies ............................................................................................. 108 10.5.4. Plotting Gasket Data ....................................................................................................... 1011 10.6. Meshing Interface Elements .................................................................................................... 1012 10.7. Solution Procedure and Result Output ..................................................................................... 1016 10.7.1. Typical Gasket Solution Output Listing ............................................................................ 1017 10.8. Reviewing the Results ............................................................................................................. 1019 10.8.1. Points to Remember ....................................................................................................... 1019 10.8.2. Reviewing Results in POST1 ............................................................................................ 1019 10.8.3. Reviewing Results in POST26 .......................................................................................... 1020 10.9. Sample Gasket Element Verification Analysis (Command or Batch Method) .............................. 1020 11. Fracture Mechanics .......................................................................................................................... 111 11.1. Definition of Fracture Mechanics ............................................................................................... 111 11.2. Solving Fracture Mechanics Problems ....................................................................................... 111 11.2.1. Modeling the Crack Region ............................................................................................... 111 11.2.1.1. 2-D Fracture Models ................................................................................................ 113 11.2.1.2. 3-D Fracture Models ................................................................................................ 114 11.2.2. Calculating Fracture Parameters ....................................................................................... 115 11.2.2.1. Stress Intensity Factors ............................................................................................ 115 11.2.2.2. J-Integral ................................................................................................................. 116 11.2.2.3. Energy Release Rate ................................................................................................. 118 12. Composites ...................................................................................................................................... 121 12.1. Definition of Composites ........................................................................................................... 121 12.2. Modeling Composites ............................................................................................................... 121 12.2.1. Choosing the Proper Element Type ................................................................................... 121 12.2.2. Defining the Layered Configuration .................................................................................. 122 12.2.2.1. Specifying Individual Layer Properties ...................................................................... 123 12.2.2.2. Defining the Constitutive Matrices ........................................................................... 124 12.2.2.3. Sandwich and Multiple-Layered Structures ............................................................... 124 12.2.2.4. Node Offset ............................................................................................................. 125 12.2.3. Specifying Failure Criteria ................................................................................................. 125 12.2.4. Additional Modeling and Postprocessing Guidelines ......................................................... 126 13. Fatigue ............................................................................................................................................. 131 13.1. Definition of Fatigue ................................................................................................................. 131 13.1.1. What the ANSYS Program Does ........................................................................................ 131 13.1.2. Basic Terminology ............................................................................................................ 131 13.2. Doing a Fatigue Evaluation ....................................................................................................... 132 13.2.1. Enter POST1 and Resume Your Database .......................................................................... 132 13.2.2. Establish the Size, Fatigue Material Properties, and Locations ............................................ 132 13.2.3. Store Stresses and Assign Event Repetitions and Scale Factors ........................................... 134 13.2.3.1. Storing Stresses ....................................................................................................... 134
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
xvii
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 13.2.3.1.1. Manually Stored Stresses ................................................................................. 134 13.2.3.1.2. Nodal Stresses from Jobname.RST ................................................................... 135 13.2.3.1.3. Stresses at a Cross-Section ............................................................................... 135 13.2.3.2. Listing, Plotting, or Deleting Stored Stresses ............................................................. 136 13.2.3.3. Assigning Event Repetitions and Scale Factors ......................................................... 136 13.2.3.4. Guidelines for Obtaining Accurate Usage Factors ..................................................... 137 13.2.4. Activate the Fatigue Calculations ...................................................................................... 139 13.2.5. Review the Results ........................................................................................................... 139 13.2.6. Other Approaches to Range Counting .............................................................................. 139 13.2.7. Sample Input ................................................................................................................... 139 14. p-Method Structural Static Analysis ................................................................................................ 141 14.1. Definition of p-Method Analysis ................................................................................................ 141 14.2. Benefits of Using the p-Method ................................................................................................. 141 14.3. Using the p-Method .................................................................................................................. 141 14.3.1. Select the p-Method Procedure ........................................................................................ 141 14.3.2. Build the Model ................................................................................................................ 142 14.3.2.1. Define the Element Types ........................................................................................ 142 14.3.2.1.1. Specifying a p-Level Range .............................................................................. 142 14.3.2.2. Specify Material Properties and/or Real Constants .................................................... 143 14.3.2.2.1. Material Properties .......................................................................................... 143 14.3.2.2.2. Real Constants ................................................................................................ 143 14.3.2.3. Define the Model Geometry ..................................................................................... 144 14.3.2.4. Mesh the Model into Solid or Shell Elements ............................................................ 144 14.3.2.4.1. Using Program Defaults .................................................................................. 144 14.3.2.4.2. Specifying Mesh Controls ................................................................................ 144 14.3.2.4.3. Guidelines for Creating a Good Mesh ............................................................... 145 14.3.3. Additional Information for Building Your Model ................................................................ 145 14.3.3.1. Viewing your element model ................................................................................... 145 14.3.3.2. Coupling ................................................................................................................. 146 14.3.3.2.1. Coupling of Corner Nodes ............................................................................... 146 14.3.3.2.2. Midside Node Coupling ................................................................................... 147 14.3.4. Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution ................................................................................ 147 14.3.5. Helpful Hints for Common Problems ............................................................................... 1412 14.3.6. Review the Results .......................................................................................................... 1412 14.3.6.1. The p-Element Subgrid .......................................................................................... 1413 14.3.7. Querying Subgrid Results ............................................................................................... 1413 14.3.8. Printing and Plotting Node and Element Results ............................................................. 1414 14.3.8.1. Specialized p-Method Displays and Listings ............................................................ 1414 14.4. Sample p-Method Analysis (GUI Method) ................................................................................. 1414 14.4.1. Problem Description ....................................................................................................... 1415 14.4.2. Problem Specifications ................................................................................................... 1415 14.4.3. Problem Diagram ........................................................................................................... 1415 14.4.3.1. Set the Analysis Title .............................................................................................. 1415 14.4.3.2. Select p-Method .................................................................................................... 1415 14.4.3.3. Define the Element Type and Options .................................................................... 1415 14.4.3.4. Define the Real Constants ...................................................................................... 1416 14.4.3.5. Define Material Properties ...................................................................................... 1416 14.4.3.6. Create Plate with Hole ............................................................................................ 1416 14.4.3.7. Mesh the Areas ...................................................................................................... 1416 14.4.3.8. Define Symmetry Boundary Conditions .................................................................. 1417 14.4.3.9. Define Pressure Load along Right Edge. .................................................................. 1417 14.4.3.10. Define Convergence Criteria ................................................................................ 1417
xviii
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 14.4.3.11. Solve the Problem ................................................................................................ 1417 14.4.3.12. Review the Results and Exit ANSYS ....................................................................... 1418 14.5. Sample p-Method Analysis (Command or Batch Method) ......................................................... 1418 15. Beam Analysis and Cross Sections .................................................................................................. 151 15.1. An Overview of Beams .............................................................................................................. 151 15.2. What Are Cross Sections? .......................................................................................................... 151 15.3. How to Create Cross Sections .................................................................................................... 152 15.3.1. Defining a Section and Associating a Section ID Number ................................................... 153 15.3.2. Defining Cross Section Geometry and Setting the Section Attribute Pointer ...................... 153 15.3.2.1. Determining the Number of Cells to Define .............................................................. 153 15.3.3. Meshing a Line Model with BEAM44, BEAM188, or BEAM189 Elements .............................. 154 15.4. Creating Cross Sections ............................................................................................................. 155 15.4.1. Using the Beam Tool to Create Common Cross Sections .................................................... 155 15.4.2. Creating Custom Cross Sections with a User-defined Mesh ................................................ 156 15.4.3. Creating Custom Cross Sections with Mesh Refinement and Multiple Materials .................. 157 15.4.4. Defining Composite Cross Sections ................................................................................... 158 15.4.5. Defining a Tapered Beam ................................................................................................. 158 15.5. Using Nonlinear General Beam Sections .................................................................................... 159 15.5.1. Defining a Nonlinear General Beam Section .................................................................... 1510 15.5.1.1. Strain Dependencies .............................................................................................. 1511 15.5.2. Considerations for Employing Nonlinear General Beam Sections ..................................... 1511 15.6. Managing Cross Section and User Mesh Libraries ..................................................................... 1512 15.7. Sample Lateral Torsional Buckling Analysis (GUI Method) ......................................................... 1512 15.7.1. Problem Description ....................................................................................................... 1513 15.7.2. Problem Specifications ................................................................................................... 1513 15.7.3. Problem Sketch .............................................................................................................. 1514 15.7.4. Eigenvalue Buckling and Nonlinear Collapse ................................................................... 1514 15.7.5. Set the Analysis Title and Define Model Geometry ........................................................... 1515 15.7.6. Define Element Type and Cross Section Information ....................................................... 1515 15.7.7. Define the Material Properties and Orientation Node ...................................................... 1515 15.7.8. Mesh the Line and Verify Beam Orientation ..................................................................... 1516 15.7.9. Define the Boundary Conditions ..................................................................................... 1516 15.7.10. Solve the Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis ......................................................................... 1517 15.7.11. Solve the Nonlinear Buckling Analysis ........................................................................... 1518 15.7.12. Plot and Review the Results .......................................................................................... 1518 15.8. Sample Problem with Cantilever Beams, Command Method .................................................... 1519 15.9. Where to Find Other Examples ................................................................................................ 1520 16. Shell Analysis and Cross Sections .................................................................................................... 161 16.1. An Overview of Shells ................................................................................................................ 161 16.2. What Are Cross Sections? .......................................................................................................... 161 16.3. How to Create Cross Sections .................................................................................................... 161 16.3.1. Defining a Section and Associating a Section ID Number ................................................... 162 16.3.2. Defining Layer Data .......................................................................................................... 162 16.3.3. Overriding Program Calculated Section Properties ............................................................ 163 16.3.4. Specifying a Shell Thickness Variation (Tapered Shells) ...................................................... 163 16.3.5. Setting the Section Attribute Pointer ................................................................................ 163 16.3.6. Associating an Area with a Section .................................................................................... 163 16.3.7. Using the Shell Tool to Create Sections ............................................................................. 163 16.3.8. Managing Cross Section Libraries ..................................................................................... 165 16.4. Using Preintegrated General Shell Sections ............................................................................... 165 16.4.1. Defining a Preintegrated Shell Section .............................................................................. 166 16.4.2. Considerations for Employing Preintegrated Shell Sections ............................................... 166
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
xix
List of Figures
2.1. Diagram of Allen Wrench .................................................................................................................. 214 3.1. Diagram of a Model Airplane Wing .................................................................................................... 313 3.2. Choose Master DOF .......................................................................................................................... 320 3.3. Choosing Master DOFs ...................................................................................................................... 321 3.4. Choosing Masters in an Axisymmetric Shell Model ............................................................................. 321 4.1. Harmonic Response Systems ............................................................................................................... 41 4.2. Relationship Between Real/Imaginary Components and Amplitude/Phase Angle ................................. 46 4.3. An Unbalanced Rotating Antenna ....................................................................................................... 47 4.4. Two-Mass-Spring-System .................................................................................................................. 414 5.1. Examples of Load-Versus-Time Curves ................................................................................................. 54 5.2. Examples of Gap Conditions .............................................................................................................. 521 5.3. Model of a Steel Beam Supporting a Concentrated Mass .................................................................... 527 5.4. Effect of Integration Time Step on Period Elongation ......................................................................... 534 5.5. Transient Input vs. Transient Response .............................................................................................. 535 5.6. Rayleigh Damping ............................................................................................................................ 538 6.1. Single-Point and Multi-Point Response Spectra ................................................................................... 62 6.2. Simply Supported Beam with Vertical Motion of Both Supports ......................................................... 611 7.1. Buckling Curves .................................................................................................................................. 71 7.2. Adjusting Variable Loads to Find an Eigenvalue of 1.0 .......................................................................... 74 7.3. Bar with Hinged Ends .......................................................................................................................... 79 8.1. Common Examples of Nonlinear Structural Behavior ........................................................................... 81 8.2. A Fishing Rod Demonstrates Geometric Nonlinearity ........................................................................... 82 8.3. Newton-Raphson Approach ................................................................................................................ 83 8.4. Traditional Newton-Raphson Method vs. Arc-Length Method .............................................................. 84 8.5. Load Steps, Substeps, and Time .......................................................................................................... 84 8.6. Nonconservative (Path-Dependent) Behavior ...................................................................................... 85 8.7. Load Directions Before and After Deflection ........................................................................................ 86 8.8. Stress-Stiffened Beams ........................................................................................................................ 88 8.9. Elastoplastic Stress-Strain Curve .......................................................................................................... 89 8.10. Kinematic Hardening ...................................................................................................................... 810 8.11. Bauschinger Effect .......................................................................................................................... 811 8.12. NLISO Stress-Strain Curve ................................................................................................................ 814 8.13. Cast Iron Plasticity ........................................................................................................................... 816 8.14. Hyperelastic Structure ..................................................................................................................... 817 8.15. Typical Hyperelastic Stress-Strain Curves ......................................................................................... 823 8.16. Data Locations in Stress and Strain Input Arrays ............................................................................... 825 8.17. Typical Evaluated Hyperelastic Stress-Strain Curve ........................................................................... 827 8.18. Stress Relaxation and Creep ............................................................................................................ 829 8.19. Time Hardening Creep Analysis ....................................................................................................... 830 8.20. Shape Memory Alloy Phases ............................................................................................................ 832 8.21. Viscoplastic Behavior in a Rolling Operation .................................................................................... 833 8.22. Viscoelastic Behavior (Maxwell Model) ............................................................................................. 834 8.23. Linear Interpolation of Nonlinear Results Can Introduce Some Error ................................................. 858 8.24. Convergence Norms Displayed By the Graphical Solution Tracking (GST) Feature ............................. 867 8.25. Typical Nonlinear Output Listing ..................................................................................................... 871 8.26. Cyclic Point Load History ................................................................................................................. 873 10.1. Element Topology of a 3-D 8-Node Interface Element ...................................................................... 102
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
xx
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 10.2. Pressure vs. Closure Behavior of a Gasket Material ............................................................................ 105 10.3. Gasket Material Input: Linear Unloading Curves ............................................................................... 107 10.4. Gasket Material Input: Nonlinear Unloading Curves ......................................................................... 108 10.5. Gasket Compression and Unloading Curves at Two Temperatures .................................................. 1011 10.6. Gasket Finite Element Model Geometry ......................................................................................... 1014 10.7. Whole Model Mesh with Brick Element .......................................................................................... 1014 10.8. Interface Layer Mesh ..................................................................................................................... 1015 10.9. Whole Model Tetrahedral Mesh ..................................................................................................... 1015 10.10. Interface Layer Mesh with Degenerated Wedge Elements ............................................................ 1016 11.1. Crack Tip and Crack Front ................................................................................................................ 112 11.2. Examples of Singular Elements ........................................................................................................ 113 11.3. A Fracture Specimen and 2-D FE Model ........................................................................................... 114 11.4. Taking Advantage of Symmetry ...................................................................................................... 114 11.5. Crack Coordinate Systems ............................................................................................................... 115 11.6. Typical Path Definitions ................................................................................................................... 116 11.7. J-Integral Contour Path Surrounding a Crack-Tip ............................................................................. 117 11.8. Examples of Paths for J-integral Calculation ..................................................................................... 117 12.1. Layered Model Showing Dropped Layer .......................................................................................... 123 12.2. Sandwich Construction ................................................................................................................... 124 12.3. Layered Shell With Nodes at Midplane ............................................................................................. 125 12.4. Layered Shell With Nodes at Bottom Surface ................................................................................... 125 12.5. Example of an Element Display ........................................................................................................ 127 12.6. Sample LAYPLOT Display for [45/-45/ - 45/45] Sequence .................................................................. 128 13.1. Cylinder Wall with Stress Concentration Factors (SCFs) .................................................................... 134 13.2. Three Loadings in One Event ........................................................................................................... 135 13.3. Surface Nodes are Identified by PPATH Prior to Executing FSSECT .................................................... 136 14.1. Fan Model Showing p-Element vs. h-Element Meshes ...................................................................... 145 14.2. Coupled Nodes on One Element ...................................................................................................... 146 14.3. Nodes Coupled Between Adjacent Elements ................................................................................... 146 14.4. Both Corner Nodes are Coupled ...................................................................................................... 147 14.5. All Coupled Nodes are Midside Nodes ............................................................................................. 147 14.6. Constraints on Rotated Nodes ......................................................................................................... 149 14.7. p-Element Subgrids for Quadrilateral Elements .............................................................................. 1413 14.8. Steel Plate With a Hole .................................................................................................................. 1415 15.1. Plot of a Z Cross Section .................................................................................................................. 152 15.2. Types of Solid Section Cell Mesh ...................................................................................................... 154 15.3. BeamTool with Subtypes Drop Down List Displayed ........................................................................ 156 15.4. Lateral-Torsional Buckling of a Cantilever I-Beam ........................................................................... 1513 15.5. Diagram of a Beam With Deformation Indicated ............................................................................ 1514 16.1. Plot of a Shell Section ...................................................................................................................... 162 16.2. Shell Tool With Layup Page Displayed ............................................................................................. 164 16.3. Shell Tool With Section Controls Page Displayed .............................................................................. 164 16.4. Shell Tool With Summary Page Displayed ........................................................................................ 165
List of Tables
1.1. Structural Element Types .................................................................................................................... 12 2.1. Basic Tab Options ............................................................................................................................... 23 2.2. Sol'n Options Tab Options ................................................................................................................... 24 2.3. Nonlinear Tab Options ........................................................................................................................ 24 2.4. Advanced NL Tab Options ................................................................................................................... 25
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
xxi
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 2.5. Loads Applicable in a Static Analysis ................................................................................................... 28 3.1. Analysis Types and Options ................................................................................................................. 32 3.2. Loads Applicable in a Modal Analysis .................................................................................................. 35 3.3. Load Commands for a Modal Analysis ................................................................................................. 35 3.4. Load Step Options .............................................................................................................................. 36 3.5. Expansion Pass Options ...................................................................................................................... 39 3.6. Symmetric System Eigensolver Choices ............................................................................................. 317 4.1. Analysis Types and Options ................................................................................................................. 44 4.2. Applicable Loads in a Harmonic Response Analysis .............................................................................. 47 4.3. Load Commands for a Harmonic Response Analysis ............................................................................ 48 4.4. Load Step Options .............................................................................................................................. 49 4.5. Expansion Pass Options .................................................................................................................... 422 5.1. Transient Tab Options ......................................................................................................................... 58 5.2. Options for the First Load Step-Mode Superposition Analysis ............................................................. 515 5.3. Options for the First Load Step-Reduced Analysis .............................................................................. 522 5.4. Expansion Pass Options .................................................................................................................... 524 5.5. Damping for Different Analysis Types ................................................................................................ 536 5.6. Damping Matrix Formulation with Different Damping Coefficients .................................................... 539 6.1. Analysis Types and Options ................................................................................................................. 64 6.2. Load Step Options .............................................................................................................................. 64 6.3. Solution Items Available in a PSD Analysis ......................................................................................... 621 6.4. Organization of Results Data from a PSD Analysis .............................................................................. 622 8.1. Suggested Mooney-Rivlin Constants ................................................................................................. 823 8.2. Data Locations in Stress and Strain Input Arrays ................................................................................. 824 9.1. Experimental Details for Case 1 and 2 Models and Blatz-Ko .................................................................. 92 9.2. Experimental Details for Case 3 Models ............................................................................................... 92 9.3. Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types ............................................................................................... 94 9.4. Creep Data Types and Abbreviations ................................................................................................... 99 9.5. Creep Model and Data/Type Attribute ................................................................................................. 99 9.6. Creep Models and Abbreviations ....................................................................................................... 911 9.7. Viscoelastic Data Types and Abbreviations ........................................................................................ 916 15.1. ANSYS Cross Section Commands ..................................................................................................... 152 15.2. ANSYS Commands for Specifying Nonlinear General Beam Section Data ........................................ 1510 16.1. ANSYS Cross Section Commands ..................................................................................................... 161 16.2. ANSYS Commands for Specifying Preintegrated Shell Section Data .................................................. 166
xxii
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
12
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
More information about the loads that you can apply in a static analysis appears in Section 2.3.4: Apply the Loads.
Chapter 2: Structural Static Analysis You can use both linear and nonlinear structural elements. Material properties can be linear or nonlinear, isotropic or orthotropic, and constant or temperature-dependent. You must define stiffness in some form (for example, Young's modulus (EX), hyperelastic coefficients, and so on). For inertia loads (such as gravity), you must define the data required for mass calculations, such as density (DENS). For thermal loads (temperatures), you must define the coefficient of thermal expansion (ALPX).
Note the following information about mesh density: Regions where stresses or strains vary rapidly (usually areas of interest) require a relatively finer mesh than regions where stresses or strains are nearly constant (within an element). While considering the influence of nonlinearities, remember that the mesh should be able to capture the effects of the nonlinearities. For example, plasticity requires a reasonable integration point density (and therefore a fine element mesh) in areas with high plastic deformation gradients.
22
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 2.3: Performing a Static Analysis You can use the Basic tab to set the options listed in Table 2.1: Basic Tab Options. For specific information about using the Solution Controls dialog box to set these options, access the dialog box, select the Basic tab, and click the Help button.
Control time settings, including: time at end of load step [TIME], automatic time stepping [AUTOTS], and number of substeps to be taken in a load step [NSUBST or DELTIM] Specify solution data to write to database [OUTRES]
Special considerations for setting these options in a static analysis include: When setting ANTYPE and NLGEOM, choose Small Displacement Static if you are performing a new analysis and you want to ignore large deformation effects such as large deflection, large rotation, and large strain. Choose Large Displacement Static if you expect large deflections (as in the case of a long, slender bar under bending) or large strains (as in a metal-forming problem). Choose Restart Current Analysis if you want to restart a failed nonlinear analysis, or you have previously completed a static analysis, and you want to specify additional loads. When setting TIME, remember that this load step option specifies time at the end of the load step. The default value is 1.0 for the first load step. For subsequent load steps, the default is 1.0 plus the time specified for the previous load step. Although time has no physical meaning in a static analysis (except in the case of creep, viscoplasticity, or other rate-dependent material behavior), it is used as a convenient way of referring to load steps and substeps (see Chapter 2, Loading in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide). When setting OUTRES, keep this caution in mind: Caution: By default, only 1000 results sets can be written to the results file (Jobname.RST). If this number is exceeded (based on your OUTRES specification), the program will terminate with an error. Use the command /CONFIG,NRES to increase the limit (see Chapter 19, Memory Management and Configuration in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide).
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
23
Special considerations for setting these options in a static analysis include: When setting EQSLV, specify one of these solvers: Program chosen solver (ANSYS selects a solver for you, based on the physics of the problem) Sparse direct solver (default for linear and nonlinear, static and full transient analyses) Preconditioned Conjugate Gradient (PCG) solver (recommended for large models/high wavefronts, bulky structures) Algebraic Multigrid (AMG) solver (applicable in the same situations as the PCG solver, but provides parallel processing; for faster turnaround times when used in a multiprocessor environment) Distributed Domain Solver (DDS) provides parallel processing on multiple systems across a network Iterative solver (auto-select; for linear static/full transient structural or steady-state thermal analyses only; recommended) Frontal direct solver
Note The AMG and DDS solvers are part of Parallel Performance for ANSYS, which is a separately-licensed product. See Chapter 14, Improving ANSYS Performance and Parallel Performance for ANSYS in the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide for more information about these solvers.
24
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
25
Chapter 2: Structural Static Analysis Prior to the analysis, you know that the structure is not likely to fail because of buckling (bifurcation, snap through).
Including stress stiffness terms, in general, accelerates nonlinear convergence characteristics. Keeping in mind the points listed above, you may choose to turn stress stiffening OFF for specific problems in which convergence difficulties are seen; for example, local failures. Command(s): SSTIF GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Options
26
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
2.3.4.1.2. Forces (FX, FY, FZ) and Moments (MX, MY, MZ)
These are concentrated loads usually specified on the model exterior. The directions implied by the labels are in the nodal coordinate system.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
27
Body Loads Section 2.6.8: Body Loads in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide Inertia Loads Section 2.6.9: Inertia Loads in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide
Section 2.3: Performing a Static Analysis When defining the table, TIME must be in ascending order in the table index (as in any table array). You can define a table array parameter via command or interactively. For more information on defining table array parameters, see the ANSYS APDL Programmer's Guide.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
29
! Specify only minimum no. of constraints ! Other loads ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Activates printout of all items Can also be set to -1 for precise mass and load summary only, no inertia relief Calculates element matrices Modifies element matrices and calculates inertia relief terms Lists the mass summary and total load summary tables
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for discussions of the OUTPR, IRLF, IRLIST, and PSOLVE commands.
2.
3.
4.
Derived data: Nodal and element stresses Nodal and element strains Element forces
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
210
2.3.6.1. Postprocessors
You can review these results using POST1, the general postprocessor, and POST26, the time-history processor. POST1 is used to review results over the entire model at specific substeps (time-points). Some typical POST1 operations are explained below. POST26 is used in nonlinear static analyses to track specific result items over the applied load history. See Chapter 8, Nonlinear Structural Analysis for the use of POST26 in a nonlinear static analysis. For a complete description of all postprocessing functions, see Chapter 4, An Overview of Postprocessing in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
2.
3.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
211
Chapter 2: Structural Static Analysis Use the PRESOL,F (or M) command to list nodal forces and moments (Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Element Solution). You can list the sum of all nodal forces and moments for a selected set of nodes. Select a set of nodes and use this feature to find out the total force acting on those nodes: Command(s): FSUM GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Nodal Calcs> Total Force Sum You can also check the total force and total moment at each selected node. For a body in equilibrium, the total load is zero at all nodes except where an applied load or reaction load exists: Command(s): NFORCE GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Nodal Calcs> Sum @ Each Node The FORCE command (Main Menu> General Postproc> Options for Outp) dictates which component of the forces is being reviewed: Total (default) Static component Damping component Inertia component
For a body in equilibrium, the total load (using all FORCE components) is zero at all nodes except where an applied load or reaction load exists. Option: Line Element Results For line elements, such as beams, spars, and pipes, use ETABLE to gain access to derived data (stresses, strains, and so on) (Main Menu> General Postproc> Element Table> Define Table). Results data are identified by a combination of a label and a sequence number or component name on the ETABLE command. See the ETABLE discussion in The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details. Option: Error Estimation For linear static analyses using solid or shell elements, use the PRERR command to list the estimated solution error due to mesh discretization (Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Percent Error). This command calculates and lists the percent error in structural energy norm (SEPC), which represents the error relative to a particular mesh discretization. Option: Structural Energy Error Estimation Use PLESOL,SERR to contour the element-by-element structural energy error (SERR) (Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Element Solu). Regions of high SERR on the contour display are good candidates for mesh refinement. (You can activate automatic mesh refinement by means of the ADAPT command - see the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information.) See Section 5.3.6: Estimating Solution Error in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for more details about error estimation. Option: Contour Displays Use PLNSOL and PLESOL to contour almost any result item, such as stresses (SX, SY, SZ...), strains (EPELX, EPELY, EPELZ...), and displacements (UX, UY, UZ...) (Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu or Element Solu). The KUND field on PLNSOL and PLESOL gives you the option of overlaying the undeformed shape on the display. 212
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 2.4: A Sample Static Analysis (GUI Method) Use PLETAB and PLLS to contour element table data and line element data (Main Menu> General Postproc> Element Table> Plot Element Table and Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Line Elem Res). Caution: Derived data, such as stresses and strains, are averaged at the nodes by the PLNSOL command. This averaging results in "smeared" values at nodes where elements of different materials, different shell thicknesses, or other discontinuities meet. To avoid the smearing effect, use selecting (described in Chapter 7, Selecting and Components in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide) to select elements of the same material, same shell thickness, and so on before issuing PLNSOL. Alternatively, use PowerGraphics with the AVRES command (Main Menu> General Postproc> Options for Outp) to not average results across different materials and/or different shell thicknesses. Option: Vector Displays Use PLVECT to view vector displays (Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Vector Plot> Predefined) and PRVECT to view vector listings (Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Vector Data). Vector displays (not to be confused with vector mode) are an effective way of viewing vector quantities, such as displacement (DISP), rotation (ROT), and principal stresses (S1, S2, S3). Option: Tabular Listings Use these commands to produce tabular listings: Command(s): PRNSOL (nodal results), PRESOL (element-by-element results) PRRSOL (reaction data), and so on GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> solution option Use the NSORT and ESORT commands to sort the data before listing them (Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Sorted Listing> Sort Nodes or Sort Elems). Other Postprocessing Capabilities Many other postprocessing functions - mapping results onto a path, load case combinations, and so on - are available in POST1. See Chapter 4, An Overview of Postprocessing in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details.
213
Chapter 2: Structural Static Analysis Length of handle = 20 cm Bend radius = 1 cm Modulus of elasticity = 2.07 x 1011 Pa Applied torquing force = 100 N Applied downward force = 20 N
214
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Note You can type the labels in upper- or lowercase; ANSYS always displays the labels in uppercase. 3. 4. Click on Close. Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
215
Chapter 2: Structural Static Analysis 4. Click on OK. A hexagon appears in the ANSYS Graphics window.
10. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Numbering. The Plot Numbering Controls dialog box appears. 11. Click the Keypoint numbers radio button to turn keypoint numbering on. 12. Click the Line numbers radio button to turn line numbering on. 13. Click on OK. 14. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Lines> Lines> Straight Line. The Create Straight Line picking menu appears. 15. Click once on keypoints 4 and 1 to create a line between keypoints 1 and 4. (If you have trouble reading the keypoint numbers in the ANSYS Graphics window, use the controls on the Pan-Zoom-Rotate dialog box (Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Pan/Zoom/Rotate) to zoom in.) 16. Click once on keypoints 7 and 8 to create a line between keypoints 7 and 8. 17. Click once on keypoints 8 and 9 to create a line between keypoints 8 and 9. 18. Click on OK.
216
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
9.
10. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Comp/Assembly> Create Component. The Create Component dialog box appears. 11. Enter BOTAREA for component name. 12. In the Component is made of drop down menu, select "Areas." 13. Click on OK.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
217
Chapter 2: Structural Static Analysis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Elem Attributes. The Element Attributes dialog box appears. In the Element type number drop down menu, select 2 PLANE42 and click on OK. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesher Opts. The Mesher Options dialog box appears. In the Mesher Type field, click on the Mapped radio button and then click on OK. The Set Element Shape dialog box appears. Click on OK to accept the default of Quad for 2-D shape key. Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
10. Click on Pick All. A second picking box appears. 11. Click once on lines 8, 10, and 9 (in that order). 12. Click on OK. The 3-D model appears in the ANSYS Graphics window. 13. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Elements. 14. Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
Section 2.4: A Sample Static Analysis (GUI Method) 3. 4. 5. 6. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Clear> Areas. The Clear Areas picking menu appears. Click on Pick All. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Everything. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Elements.
10. Click on OK. 11. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Displacement> On Nodes. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes picking menu appears. 12. Click on Pick All. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes dialog box appears. 13. In the scroll list for DOFs to be constrained, click on "ALL DOF." 14. Click on OK. 15. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities. 16. In the top drop down menu, select "Lines." 17. Click on the "Sele All" button, then click on Cancel.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
219
Chapter 2: Structural Static Analysis 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. In the second drop down menu, select "By Location." Click on the "Y coordinates" radio button to select it. Enter BENDRAD,L_HANDLE for Min, Max, and click on Apply. Click on "X coordinates" to select it. Click on Reselect. Enter W_FLAT/2,W_FLAT for Min, Max, and click on Apply. In the top drop down menu, select "Nodes."
10. In the second drop down menu, select "Attached to." 11. Click on the "Areas, all" radio button to select it. 12. Click on the "From Full" radio button to select it. 13. Click on Apply. 14. In the second drop down menu, select "By Location." 15. Click on the "Y coordinates" radio button to select it. 16. Click on the "Reselect" radio button. 17. Enter L_HANDLE+TOL,L_HANDLE-(3.0*L_ELEM)-TOL for Min, Max. 18. Click on OK. 19. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Parameters> Get Scalar Data. The Get Scalar Data dialog box appears. 20. In the scroll box on the left, scroll to "Model Data" and select it. 21. In the scroll box on the right, scroll to "For selected set" and select it. 22. Click on OK. The Get Data for Selected Entity Set dialog box appears. 23. Enter "minyval" for the name of the parameter to be defined. 24. In the scroll box on the left, click once on "Current node set" to select it. 25. In the scroll box on the right, click once on "Min Y coordinate" to select it. 26. Click on Apply. 27. Click on OK again to select the default settings. The Get Data for Selected Entity Set dialog box appears. 28. Enter "maxyval" for the name of the parameter to be defined. 29. In the scroll box on the left, click once on "Current node set" to select it. 30. In the scroll box on the right, click once on "Max Y coordinate" to select it. 31. Click on OK. 32. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Parameters> Scalar Parameters. The Scalar Parameters dialog box appears. 33. Type the text PTORQ=100/(W_HEX*(MAXYVAL-MINYVAL)) in the Selection text box and click on Accept. 34. Click on Close. 35. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Pressure> On Nodes. The Apply PRES on Nodes picking menu appears. 36. Click on Pick All. The Apply PRES on Nodes dialog box appears. 37. Enter PTORQ for Load PRES value and click on OK. 38. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Everything. 220
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 2.4: A Sample Static Analysis (GUI Method) 39. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Nodes. 40. Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
10. Click on Apply. 11. In the top drop down menu, select "Nodes." 12. In the second drop down menu, select "Attached to." 13. Click on the Areas, all radio button to select it, and click on Apply. 14. In the second drop down menu, select "By Location." 15. Click on the "Y coordinates" radio button to select it. 16. Click on the "Reselect" radio button. 17. Enter L_HANDLE+TOL,L_HANDLE-(3.0*L_ELEM)-TOL for Min, Max. 18. Click on OK. 19. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Pressure> On Nodes. The Apply PRES on Nodes picking menu appears. 20. Click on Pick All. The Apply PRES on Nodes dialog box appears. 21. Enter PDOWN for Load PRES value and click on OK. 22. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Everything. 23. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Nodes.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
221
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape. The Plot Deformed Shape dialog box appears. 11. Click on the "Def + undeformed" radio button and click on OK. 12. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Save Plot Ctrls. The Save Plot Controls dialog box appears. 13. Type "pldisp.gsa" in the Selection box, and click on OK. 14. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> View Settings> Angle of Rotation. The Angle of Rotation dialog box appears. 15. Enter 120 for Angle in degrees. 16. In the Relative/absolute drop down menu, select "Relative angle." 17. In the Axis of rotation drop down menu, select "Global Cartes Y." 18. Click on OK. 19. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu. The Contour Nodal Solution Data dialog box appears. 20. In the scroll box on the left, click on "Stress." In the scroll box on the right, click on "Intensity SINT." 21. Click on OK. 222
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 2.4: A Sample Static Analysis (GUI Method) 22. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Save Plot Ctrls. The Save Plot Controls dialog box appears. 23. Type "plnsol.gsa" in the Selection box, and click on OK.
10. Type "plnsol.gsa" in the Selection box, and click on OK. 11. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu. The Contour Nodal Solution Data dialog box appears. 12. In the scroll box on the left, click on "Stress." In the scroll box on the right, scroll to "Intensity SINT" and select it. 13. Click on OK.
10. On the Pan-Zoom-Rotate dialog box, click on the large round dot several times to zoom in on the cross section.
223
224
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
! Apply loads and obtain the solution /SOLU ANTYPE,STATIC ! Static analysis (default) /TITLE,Allen wrench -- Load step 1 ! First fix all nodes around bottom of shank CMSEL,,BOTAREA ! Bottom areas of shank LSEL,,EXT ! Exterior lines of those areas NSLL,,1 ! Nodes on those lines D,ALL,ALL ! Displacement constraints LSEL,ALL /PBC,U,,1 ! Displacement symbols turned on /TITLE,Boundary conditions on end of wrench NPLOT !Now apply pressure on handle to represent 100-N (22.5-lb) finger force ASEL,,LOC,Y,BENDRAD,L_HANDLE ! Areas on handle ASEL,R,LOC,X,W_FLAT/2,W_FLAT ! Two areas on one side of handle... NSLA,,1 ! ...and all corresponding nodes NSEL,R,LOC,Y,L_HANDLE+TOL,L_HANDLE-(3.0*L_ELEM)-TOL ! Reselects nodes at ! back end of handle (3 element lengths) *GET,MINYVAL,NODE,,MNLOC,Y ! Get minimum Y value of selected nodes *GET,MAXYVAL,NODE,,MXLOC,Y ! Get maximum Y value of selected nodes PTORQ=100/(W_HEX*(MAXYVAL-MINYVAL)) ! Pressure equivalent to 100 N SF,ALL,PRES,PTORQ ! PTORQ pressure on all selected nodes ALLSEL ! Restores full set of all entities /PSF,PRES,,2 ! Pressure symbols turned on /TITLE,Boundary conditions on wrench for load step 1 NPLOT LSWRITE ! Writes first load step /TITLE, Allen wrench -- load step 2 ! Downward pressure on top of handle, representing 20-N (4.5 -lb) force PDOWN=20/(W_FLAT*(MAXYVAL-MINYVAL)) ASEL,,LOC,Z,-(L_SHANK+(W_HEX/2)) ! Area on top flat of handle... NSLA,,1 ! ...and all corresponding nodes NSEL,R,LOC,Y,L_HANDLE+TOL,L_HANDLE-(3.0*L_ELEM)-TOL ! Reselects nodes at ! back end of handle (3 element lengths) SF,ALL,PRES,PDOWN ! PDOWN pressure at all selected nodes ALLSEL /TITLE,Boundary conditions on wrench for load step 2 NPLOT LSWRITE ! Writes second load step SAVE ! Save database before solution LSSOLVE,1,2 ! Initiates solution for load step files 1 and 2 FINISH !Review the results /POST1 SET,1 ! Reads load step 1 results PRRSOL ! Reaction solution listing /PBC,DEFA ! No BC symbols /PSF,DEFA ! No surface load symbols /EDGE,,1 ! Edges only, no interior element outlines /TITLE,Deformed allen wrench caused by torque PLDISP,2 ! Deformed shape overlaid with undeformed edge plot /GSAVE,pldisp,gsav ! Saves graphics specifications on pldisp.gsav /PLOPTS,INFO,ON ! Turns on entire legend column /PLOPTS,LEG1,OFF ! Turns off legend header /ANGLE,,120,YM,1 ! Additional rotation about model Y (to see high stress areas) /TITLE,Stress intensity contours caused by torque PLNSOL,S,INT ! Stress intensity contours
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
225
Section 2.6: Where to Find Other Examples VM199 - Viscoplastic Analysis of a Body Undergoing Shear Deformation VM201 - Rubber Cylinder Pressed Between Two Plates VM206 - Stranded Coil with Voltage Excitation VM211 - Rubber Cylinder Pressed Between Two Plates VM216 - Lateral Buckling of a Right-Angle Frame
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
227
228
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Chapter 3: Modal Analysis define the required real constants for the specific element type (COMBIN7, COMBIN14, COMBIN37, and so on).
Note When you specify a modal analysis, a Solution menu that is appropriate for modal analyses appears. The Solution menu will be either abridged or unabridged, depending on the actions you took prior to this step in your ANSYS session. The abridged menu contains only those solution options that are valid and/or recommended for modal analyses. If you are on the abridged Solution menu and you want to access other solution options (that is, solution options that are valid for you to use, but their use may not be encouraged for this type of analysis), select the Unabridged Menu option. For details, see Section 3.5.1: Using Abridged Solution Menus in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide. Note In the single point response spectrum (SPOPT,SPRS) and Dynamic Design analysis method (SPOPT,DDAM), the modal expansion can be performed after the spectrum analysis, based on the significance factor SIGNIF on the MXPAND command. If you want to perform modal expansion after the spectrum analysis, choose NO for mode expansion (MXPAND) on the dialog box for the modal analysis options (MODOPT).
32
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 3.5: Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution Note Restarts are not valid in a modal analysis. If you need to apply different sets of boundary conditions, do a new analysis each time (or use the "partial solution" procedure described in Chapter 3, Solution in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide).
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
33
Chapter 3: Modal Analysis For most applications, you will use the Block Lanczos, subspace, reduced, or PowerDynamics method. The unsymmetric, damped, and QR damped methods are meant for special applications. When you specify a mode-extraction method, ANSYS automatically chooses the appropriate equation solver. Note The damped, unsymmetric, and QR damped methods are not available in the ANSYS Professional program.
34
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
35
Damping is valid only for the damped and QR damped mode-extraction methods. Damping is ignored for the other mode-extraction methods; see the Note below. If you include damping and specify the damped mode-extraction method, the calculated eigenvalues and eigenvectors are complex. If you include damping and specify the QR damped mode-extraction method, the eigenvalues are complex. However, the real eigenvectors are used for the mode superposition analysis. See Section 3.13: Comparing Mode-Extraction Methods for details. Also see the section Section 5.10.3: Damping in Chapter 5, Transient Dynamic Analysis for more information on damping. Only the QR damped method supports the constant material damping coefficient application in a downstream mode superposition harmonic analysis. The QR damped eigen analysis itself, however, does not include the effect of the constant material damping coefficient. The corresponding modal damping matrix is formulated during modal harmonic analysis. Note Damping can be specified in a non-damped modal analysis if a single-point response spectrum analysis is to follow the modal analysis. Although the damping does not affect the eigenvalue solution, it is used to calculate an effective damping ratio for each mode, which is then used to calculate the response to the spectrum. Spectrum analyses are discussed in Chapter 6, Spectrum Analysis.
36
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3.5.7. Solve
Before you solve, you should save (SAVE) a back-up copy of the database to a named file. You can then retrieve your model by reentering the ANSYS program and issuing RESUME. Now start the solution calculations. Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS
3.5.7.1. Output
The output from the solution consists mainly of the natural frequencies, which are printed as part of the printed output (Jobname.OUT) and also written to the mode shape file (Jobname.MODE). The printed output may include reduced mode shapes and the participation factor table, depending on your analysis options and output controls. No mode shapes are written to the database or to the results file, so you cannot postprocess the results yet. To do this, you need to expand the modes (explained next).
To change the shift point that was used in the eigenvalue extraction, you can issue the MODOPT,,,FREQB command. If you prefer to use the GUI to change the shift point, follow these steps:
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
37
Chapter 3: Modal Analysis 1. 2. 3. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options. The Modal Analysis dialog box appears. Choose Subspace as the mode-extraction method and specify the number of modes to extract; then click OK. The Subspace Modal Analysis dialog box appears. Change the value of the FREQB field and click OK.
If you use the damped mode-extraction method, the eigenvalues and eigenvectors are complex. The imaginary part of the eigenvalue represents the natural frequency, and the real part is a measure of the stability of the system. If you use the QR damped mode-extraction method, the eigenvalues are complex. However, the real eigenvectors are used for the mode superposition analysis.
38
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
No. of Modes to Expand MXPAND Freq. Range for Expansion MXPAND Stress Calc. On/Off MXPAND
Each of these options is explained in detail below. Expansion Pass On/Off [EXPASS] Choose ON. Number of Modes to Expand [MXPAND, NMODE] Specify the number. Remember that only expanded modes can be reviewed in the postprocessor. Default is no modes expanded. Frequency Range for Expansion [MXPAND,, FREQB, FREQE] This is another way to control the number of modes expanded. If you specify a frequency range, only modes within that range are expanded. Stress Calculations On/Off [MXPAND,,,, Elcalc] Choose ON only if you plan to do a subsequent spectrum analysis and are interested in stresses or forces to do the spectrum. "Stresses" from a modal analysis do not represent actual stresses in the structure, but give you an idea of the relative stress distributions for each mode. Default is no stresses calculated. 3. Specify load step options. The only options valid in a modal expansion pass are output controls: Printed output Use this option to include any results data (expanded mode shapes, stresses, and forces) on the printed output file (Jobname.OUT). Command(s): OUTPR GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu Printout Database and results file output Use this option to control the data on the results file (Jobname.RST). The FREQ field on OUTRES can be only ALL or NONE; that is, the data are written for all modes or no modes. For example, you cannot write information for every other mode. Command(s): OUTRES GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> DB/Results File 4. Start expansion pass calculations. The output consists of expanded mode shapes and, if requested, relative stress distributions for each mode. Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
39
Chapter 3: Modal Analysis 5. Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4 for additional modes to be expanded (in different frequency ranges, for example). Each expansion pass is stored as a separate load step on the results file. Caution: Spectrum analyses expect all expanded modes to be in one load step. In the single point response spectrum (SPOPT,SPRS) and Dynamic Design analysis method (SPOPT,DDAM), the modal expansion can be performed after the spectrum analysis, based on the significance factor SIGNIF on the MXPAND command. If you want to perform modal expansion after the spectrum analysis, choose NO for mode expansion (MXPAND) on the dialog box for the modal analysis options (MODOPT). 6. Leave SOLUTION. You can now review results in the postprocessor. Command(s): FINISH GUI: Close the Solution menu.
Note The expansion pass has been presented here as a separate step. However, if you include the MXPAND command in the modal solution step, the program not only extracts the eigenvalues and eigenvectors, but also expands the specified mode shapes.
You can review these results in POST1 [/POST1], the general postprocessor. Some typical postprocessing operations for a modal analysis are described below. For a complete description of all postprocessing functions, see Chapter 4, An Overview of Postprocessing in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
2.
310
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
311
312
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
The detailed step-by-step procedure for this example, Modal Analysis of a Model Airplane Wing, is included in the Modal Tutorial.
1 2
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
313
314
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 3.12: Prestressed Modal Analysis of a Large-Deflection Solution VM89 - Natural Frequencies of a Two-mass-spring System VM151 - Nonaxisymmetric Vibration of a Circular Plate VM152 - Nonaxisymmetric Vibration of a Stretched Circular Membrane (Harmonic Els) VM153 - Nonaxisymmetric Vibration of a Stretched Circular Membrane (Modal) VM154 - Vibration of a Fluid Coupling VM175 - Natural Frequency of a Piezoelectric Transducer VM181 - Natural Frequency of a Flat Circular Plate with a Clamped Edge VM182 - Transient Response of a Spring-mass System VM183 - Harmonic Response of a Spring-mass System VM202 - Transverse Vibrations of a Shear Beam VM203 - Dynamic Load Effect on Simply-supported Thick Square Plate VM212 - Modal Analysis of a Rectangular Cavity
2.
3.
Step 1 above can also be a transient analysis. In such a case, save the EMAT and ESAV files at the desired time point. If the deformed shape from the static solution differs significantly from its nondeformed shape, you can perform a prestressed modal analysis of a large-deflection solution instead.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
315
Chapter 3: Modal Analysis Stress-stiffening (SSTIF,ON) must be applied instead. (This requirement applies to elements outside of the 18x family of elements only.) The EMATWRITE,YES command is also necessary to write the element matrices to File.EMAT.
Issuing either a PSTRES,OFF or SSTIF,OFF command prevents all previously specified prestressing from being applied. If the model is spinning, include spin-softening effects (via the OMEGA command's KSPIN option) in the modal solution if necessary.
! Initial, large deflection static analysis ! /PREP7 ... FINISH /SOLU ANTYPE,STATIC ! Static analysis NLGEOM,ON ! Large deflection analysis PSTRES,ON ! Flag to calculate the prestress matrix ... SOLVE FINISH ! ! Prestressed modal analysis ! /SOLU ANTYPE,MODAL ! Modal analysis UPCOORD,1.0,ON ! Display mode shapes relative to deformed geometry ! in the postprocessor. PSTRES,ON ! Prestress effects ON MODOPT,... ! Select eigensolver MXPAND,... ! Specify the number of modes to expand, if desired. PSOLVE,EIGxxxx ! Calculate the eigenvalues and eigenvectors. ! Use EIGLANB or EIGFULL to match MODOPT command. FINISH /SOLU !Additional solution step for expansion. EXPASS,ON PSOLVE,EIGEXP ! Expand the eigenvector solution. (Required if you ! want to review mode shapes in the postprocessor.) FINISH
Note You may also use one of the other eigensolvers (PSOLVE,EIGSYM, PSOLVE,EIGUNSY, PSOLVE,EIGDAMP or PSOLVE,EIGREDUC). In such a case, a PSOLVE,TRIANG command must precede the PSOLVE,EIGxxx command.
[K ]{ i} = 2 [M]{ i} i
where: [K] = stiffness matrix {i} = mode shape vector (eigenvector) of mode i 2 i = natural circular frequency of mode i ( i is the eigenvalue) [M] = mass matrix Many numerical methods are available to solve the above equation. ANSYS offers these methods:
316
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 3.13: Comparing Mode-Extraction Methods Block Lanczos method (default) Subspace method PowerDynamics method Reduced (Householder) method Unsymmetric method Damped method (The damped method solves a different equation; see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for more information.) QR damped method (The QR damped method solves a different equation; see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for more information.) Note The damped, unsymmetric, and QR damped methods are not available in the ANSYS Professional program. The first four methods (Block Lanczos, subspace, PowerDynamics, and reduced) are the most commonly used. Table 3.6: Symmetric System Eigensolver Choices compares these four mode-extraction methods. Following the table is a brief description of each mode-extraction method.
Subspace
Low
High
Power Dynamics To find few modes (up to about 20) of large models. Recommended for fast computation of eigenvalues of over 100K DOF models. On coarse mesh models, the frequencies are approximate. Missed modes are possible when repeated frequencies are present. Reduced To find all modes of small to medium models (less than 10K DOF). Can be used to find few modes (up to about 40) of large models with proper selection of master DOF, but accuracy of frequencies depends on the master DOF selected.
High
Low
Low
Low
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
317
318
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
319
Chapter 3: Modal Analysis then expand the solution to the full DOF set by performing an expansion pass. The main advantage of this procedure is the savings in CPU time to obtain the reduced solution, especially for dynamic analyses of large problems.
(a) Possible out-of-plane masters for a flat plate(b) Motion in X induces motion in Y Choose masters at locations having relatively large mass or rotary inertia and relatively low stiffness (see Figure 3.3: Choosing Master DOFs). Examples of such locations are overhangs and "loosely" connected structures. Conversely, do not choose masters at locations with relatively small mass, or at locations with high stiffness (such as DOF close to constraints).
320
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Choose masters at locations with (a) large rotary inertia, (b) large mass If your primary interest is in bending modes, you can neglect rotational and "stretching" DOF. If the degree of freedom to be chosen belongs to a coupled set, choose only the first (primary) DOF of the coupled set. Choose master DOF at locations where forces or nonzero displacements are to be applied. For axisymmetric shell models (SHELL51 or SHELL61), choose as masters the global UX degree of freedom at all nodes on those sections of the model that are parallel to or nearly parallel to the center line, so oscillatory motions between master DOF can be avoided (see Figure 3.4: Choosing Masters in an Axisymmetric Shell Model). This recommendation can be relaxed if the motion is primarily parallel to the centerline. For axisymmetric harmonic elements with MODE = 2 or greater, choose as masters both UX and UZ degrees of freedom.
The best way to check the validity of the master DOF set is to rerun the analysis with twice (or half) the number of masters and to compare the results. Another way is to review the reduced mass distribution printed during a modal solution. The reduced mass should be, at least in the dominant direction of motion, within 10-15 percent of the total mass of the structure.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
321
322
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Typical harmonic response system. Fo and are known. uo and are unknown (a). Transient and steady-state dynamic response of a structural system (b). Harmonic response analysis is a linear analysis. Some nonlinearities, such as plasticity will be ignored, even if they are defined. You can, however, have unsymmetric system matrices such as those encountered in a fluidstructure interaction problem (see Chapter 15, Acoustics in the ANSYS Coupled-Field Analysis Guide). Harmonic analysis can also be performed on a prestressed structure, such as a violin string (assuming the harmonic stresses are much smaller than the pretension stress). See Section 4.11.1.1: Prestressed Full Harmonic Response Analysis for more information on prestressed harmonic analyses.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
' 8$ (94 6
A disadvantage is that this method usually is more expensive than either of the other methods when you use the frontal solver. However, when you use the JCG solver or the ICCG solver, the full method can be very efficient.
42
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 4.5: How to Do Harmonic Response Analysis The initial solution calculates only the displacements at the master DOF. A second step, known as the expansion pass, is required for a complete displacement, stress, and force solution. (However, the expansion pass might be optional for some applications.) Element loads (pressures, temperatures, etc.) cannot be applied. All loads must be applied at user-defined master degrees of freedom. (This limits the use of solid-model loads.)
Disadvantages of the mode superposition method are: Imposed (nonzero) displacements cannot be applied. When you are using PowerDynamics for the modal analysis, initial conditions cannot have previouslyapplied loads.
You can overcome any of these restrictions by performing a transient dynamic analysis, with harmonic loads expressed as time-history loading functions. Chapter 5, Transient Dynamic Analysis describes the procedure for a transient dynamic analysis.
43
Chapter 4: Harmonic Response Analysis 2. 3. Apply loads and obtain the solution. Review the results.
Analysis Type: Harmonic Response ANTYPE Solution Method Solution Listing Format Mass Matrix Formulation Equation Solver HROPT HROUT LUMPM EQSLV
44
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 4.5: How to Do Harmonic Response Analysis Option: New Analysis (ANTYPE) Choose New Analysis. Restarts are not valid in a harmonic response analysis; if you need to apply additional harmonic loads, do a new analysis each time. Option: Analysis Type: Harmonic Response (ANTYPE) Choose Harmonic Response as the analysis type. Option: Solution Method (HROPT) Choose one of the following solution methods: Full method Reduced method Mode superposition method
Option: Solution Listing Format (HROUT) This option determines how the harmonic displacement solution is listed in the printed output (Jobname.OUT). You can choose between real and imaginary parts (default), and amplitudes and phase angles.
Option: Mass Matrix Formulation (LUMPM) Use this option to specify the default formulation (which is element dependent) or lumped mass approximation. We recommend the default formulation for most applications. However, for some problems involving "skinny" structures such as slender beams or very thin shells, the lumped mass approximation often yields better results. Also, the lumped mass approximation can result in a shorter run time and lower memory requirements. After you complete the fields on the Harmonic Analysis Options dialog box, click on OK to reach a second Harmonic Analysis dialog box, where you choose an equation solver.
Option: Equation Solver (EQSLV) You can choose the frontal solver (default), the sparse direct solver (SPARSE), the Jacobi Conjugate Gradient (JCG) solver, or the Incomplete Cholesky Conjugate Gradient (ICCG) solver. The frontal direct solver or sparse direct solver is recommended for most structural models. When using a direct solver to solve a relatively large problem, choose the sparse solver over the frontal solver.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
45
The amplitude is the maximum value of the load, which you specify using the commands shown in Table 4.2: Applicable Loads in a Harmonic Response Analysis. The phase angle is a measure of the time by which the load lags (or leads) a frame of reference. On the complex plane (see Figure 4.2: Relationship Between Real/Imaginary Components and Amplitude/Phase Angle), it is the angle measured from the real axis. The phase angle is required only if you have multiple loads that are out of phase with each other. For example, the unbalanced rotating antenna shown in Figure 4.3: An Unbalanced Rotating Antenna will produce out-of-phase vertical loads at its four support points. The phase angle cannot be specified directly; instead, you specify the real and imaginary components of the out-of-phase loads using the VALUE and VALUE2 fields of the appropriate displacement and force commands. Pressures and other surface and body loads can only be specified with a phase angle of 0 (no imaginary component) with the following exceptions: nonzero imaginary components of pressures can be applied using the SURF153 and SURF154 elements in a full harmonic response analysis, or using a mode superposition harmonic response analysis if the mode-extraction method is Block Lanczos (see the SF and SFE commands). Figure 4.2: Relationship Between Real/Imaginary Components and Amplitude/Phase Angle shows how to calculate the real and imaginary components. The forcing frequency range is the frequency range of the harmonic load (in cycles/time). It is specified later as a load step option with the HARFRQ command.
46
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3 S 7 $A43 2! @9( 6 0
P a V # 3 `Y XWbXc &UT
P # IdC ! H P HIGECB F D
P
An unbalanced rotating antenna will produce out-of-phase vertical loads at its four support points. Note A harmonic analysis cannot calculate the response to multiple forcing functions acting simultaneously with different frequencies (for example, two machines with different rotating speeds running at the same time). However, POST1 can superimpose multiple load cases to obtain the total response. Table 4.2: Applicable Loads in a Harmonic Response Analysis summarizes the loads applicable to a to a harmonic response analysis. Except for inertia loads, you can define loads either on the solid model (keypoints, lines, and areas) or on the finite element model (nodes and elements). For a general discussion of solid-model loads versus finite element loads, see Chapter 2, Loading in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
$ 9 6 C I @!9 !9 @9 3 @HG!4 # I 9 F C
47
Solid Model Keypoints Solid Model Lines Solid Model Areas Finite Elem Nodes Nodes
Force Pressure
Solid Model Keypoints Finite Elem Solid Model Lines Solid Model Areas Finite Elem Finite Elem Nodes Elements
Temperature, Fluence
Solid Model Keypoints Solid Model Lines Solid Model Areas Solid Model Volumes Finite Elem Nodes
Elements -
BFEDELE -
BFELIST -
BFSCALE -
48
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ALPHAD, BETAD, DM- Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/FrePRAT quenc> Damping MP,DAMP, MP,DMPR Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Change Mat Props> Material Models> Structural> Damping Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu Printout Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> DB/ Results File Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Integration Pt
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
49
410
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
4.5.4.1. Postprocessors
You can review these results using either POST26 or POST1. The normal procedure is to first use POST26 to identify critical forcing frequencies - frequencies at which the highest displacements (or stresses) occur at points of interest in the model - and to then use POST1 to postprocess the entire model at these critical forcing frequencies. POST1 is used to review results over the entire model at specific frequencies. POST26 allows you to review results at specific points in the model over the entire frequency range.
Some typical postprocessing operations for a harmonic response analysis are explained below. For a complete description of all postprocessing functions, see Chapter 4, An Overview of Postprocessing in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
411
Chapter 4: Harmonic Response Analysis 2. Graph the variables (versus frequency or any other variable). Then use PLCPLX to work with just the amplitude, phase angle, real part, or imaginary part. Command(s): PLVAR, PLCPLX GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Graph Variables Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings> Graph Get a listing of the variable. To list just the extreme values, use the EXTREM command. Then use the PRCPLX command to work with amplitude and phase angle or real and imaginary part. Command(s): PRVAR, EXTREM, PRCPLX GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> List Variables> List Extremes Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> List Extremes Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings> List
3.
Many other functions, such as performing math operations among variables (in complex arithmetic), moving variables into array parameters, moving array parameters into variables, etc., are available in POST26; see Chapter 6, The Time-History Postprocessor (POST26) in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details. By reviewing the time-history results at strategic points throughout the model, you can identify the critical frequencies for further POST1 postprocessing.
2.
412
Section 4.6: Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (GUI Method) GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Nodal Solution Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Element Solution Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Reaction Solution Use the NSORT and ESORT commands to sort the data before listing them. Many other functions, such as mapping results on to a path, transforming results to different coordinate systems, load case combinations, etc., are available in POST1; see Chapter 3, Solution in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details. See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, HROPT, HROUT, HARFRQ, DMPRAT, NSUBST, KBC, NSOL, ESOL, RFORCE, PLCPLX, PLVAR, PRCPLX, PRVAR, PLDISP, PRRSOL, and PLNSOL commands.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
413
Section 4.6: Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (GUI Method) 8. 9. Click on OK. The Library of Element Types dialog box closes. Click on Close in the Element Types dialog box.
10. Click on OK. 11. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Nodes> Fill between Nds. A picking menu appears. 12. In the ANSYS Graphics window, click once on nodes 1 and 4 (on the left and right sides of the screen). A small box appears around each node. 13. Click on OK on the picking menu. The Create Nodes Between 2 Nodes dialog box appears. 14. Click on OK to accept the default of 2 nodes to fill. Nodes 2 and 3 appear in the graphics window.
415
Chapter 4: Harmonic Response Analysis 6. 7. Click once on nodes 3 and 4. Click on OK. A line appears between the selected nodes.
4.6.3.7. Specify the Analysis Type, MDOF, and Load Step Specifications
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis. Click once on "Harmonic" and click on OK. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options. Click once on "Full" to select the solution method. Click once on "Amplitud + phase" to select the DOF printout format and click on OK. Click OK in the Full Harmonic Analysis dialog box. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu Printout. Click on "Last substep" to set the print frequency and click on OK. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Freq and Substeps.
10. Enter 0 and 7.5 for the harmonic frequency range. 11. Enter 30 for the number of substeps. 12. Click once on "Stepped" to specify stepped boundary conditions. 13. Click on OK.
Section 4.6: Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (GUI Method) 8. 9. In the scroll box for DOFs to be constrained, click once on "UX" to highlight it and click once on "UY" to deselect it. Click on OK.
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Force/ Moment> On Nodes. A picking menu appears. 11. In the graphics window, click once on node 2. 12. Click on OK. The Apply F/M on Nodes dialog box appears. 13. In the scroll box for direction of force/moment, click once on "FX." 14. Enter 200 for the real part of force/moment and click on OK.
10. Click on OK to accept the default of Nodal DOF result. The Define Nodal Data dialog box appears. 11. Enter 3 for reference number of variable. 12. Enter 3 for node number. 13. Enter 3UX for the user-specified label. 14. In the scroll box on the right, click once on "Translation UX" to highlight it. 15. Click on OK. 16. Click on Close. 17. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Graphs. The Graph Controls dialog box appears. 18. In the scroll box for type of grid, scroll to "X and Y lines" to select it.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
417
Chapter 4: Harmonic Response Analysis 19. Click on OK. 20. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Graph Variables. The Graph Time-History Variables dialog box appears. Your graph should look like this:
21. Enter 2 for 1st variable to graph. 22. Enter 3 for 2nd variable to graph. 23. Click on OK. A graph appears in the graphic window.
418
! Harmonic response analysis ! Full harmonic response ! Print results as amplitudes and phase angles ! ! ! ! ! 30 Intervals within freq. range Frequency range from 0 to 7.5 HZ Step boundary condition Constrain all 44 DOF Constrain nodes 1 and 4 in UX
! Store UX Displacements ! Turn grid on ! Y-axis label disp ! Display variables 2 and 3
419
Chapter 4: Harmonic Response Analysis 2. 3. 4. 5. Apply the loads and obtain the reduced solution. Review the results of the reduced solution. Expand the solution (expansion pass). Review the results of the expanded solution.
Of these, the first step is the same as for the full method. Details of the other steps are explained below.
2.
3.
Define master degrees of freedom. Master DOF are essential or dynamic degrees of freedom that characterize the dynamic behavior of the structure. For a reduced harmonic response dynamic analysis, master DOF are also required at locations where you want to apply forces or nonzero displacements. See Section 3.14: Matrix Reduction for guidelines to choose master DOF. Apply loads on the model. Harmonic loading is the same as described for the full method, except for the following restrictions: Only displacements and forces are valid. Element loads such as pressures, temperatures, and accelerations are not allowed. Forces and nonzero displacements must be applied only at master DOF.
4.
5.
Specify load step options. These are the same as described for the full method except that the OUTRES and ERESX commands are not available, and the constant material damping coefficient (MP,DMPR) is not applicable for the reduced method. The OUTPR command controls the printout of the nodal solution at the master DOF (OUTPR,NSOL,ALL (or NONE)). Save a copy of the database. Command(s): SAVE GUI: Utility Menu> File> Save as Start solution calculations. Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS Repeat steps 4 through 7 for any additional loads and frequency ranges (that is, for additional load steps). If you plan to do time-history postprocessing (POST26), the frequency ranges should not overlap from one load step to the next. Another method for multiple load steps, which allows you to store the load steps on files and then solve them at once using a macro, is described in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
6.
7.
8.
420
Section 4.9: Reduced Harmonic Response Analysis 9. Leave SOLUTION. Command(s): FINISH GUI: Close the Solution menu.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
421
Each of these options is explained in detail below. Option: Expansion Pass On/Off (EXPASS) Choose ON. Option: Number of Solutions to Expand (NUMEXP,NUM) Specify the number. This number of evenly spaced solutions will be expanded over a frequency range (specified next). For example, NUMEXP,4,1000,2000 specifies four solutions in the frequency range 1000 to 2000 (that is, expanded solutions at 1250, 1500, 1750, and 2000). Option: Frequency Range for Expansion (NUMEXP, BEGRNG, ENDRNG) Specify the frequency range. See the example above. If you do not need to expand multiple solutions, you can use EXPSOL to identify a single solution for expansion (either by its load step and substep numbers or by its frequency value). Option: Phase Angle for Expansion (HREXP) If multiple solutions are to be expanded over a frequency range (NUMEXP), we suggest that you request both the real and imaginary parts to be expanded (HREXP,ALL). This way, you can easily combine the two parts in POST26 to review the peak values of displacements, stresses, and other results. If, on the other hand, a single solution is to be expanded (EXPSOL), you can specify the phase angle at which peak displacements occurred using HREXP,angle. Option: Stress Calculations On/Off (NUMEXP or EXPSOL) You can turn off stress and force calculations if you are not interested in them. Default is to calculate stresses and forces. Option: Nodal Solution Listing Format (HROUT) Determines how the harmonic displacement solution is listed in the printed output (Jobname.OUT). You can choose between real and imaginary parts (default), and amplitudes and phase angles. 3. Specify load step options. The only options valid for a harmonic expansion pass are output controls: 422 Printed Output
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 4.9: Reduced Harmonic Response Analysis Use this option to include any results data on the printed output file (Jobname.OUT). Command(s): OUTPR GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu Printout Database and Results File Output Use this option to control the data on the results file (Jobname.RST). Command(s): OUTRES GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> DB/Results File Extrapolation of Results Use this option to review element integration point results by copying them to the nodes instead of extrapolating them (default). Note The FREQ field on OUTPR and OUTRES can be only ALL or NONE. Command(s): ERESX GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Integration Pt 4. Start expansion pass calculations. Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4 for additional solutions to be expanded. Each expansion pass is stored as a separate load step on the results file. Caution: Subsequent spectrum analyses expect all expanded modes to be in one load step. 6. Leave SOLUTION. You can now review results in the postprocessor. Command(s): FINISH GUI: Close the Solution menu.
5.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
423
! ! ! !
Reenter SOLUTION Expansion pass Expand a single solution Phase angle for expanded solution
! Review the Results of the Expanded Solution /POST1 SET,... ! Read results for desired frequency PLDISP,... ! Deformed shape PRRSOL,... ! List reactions PLNSOL,... ! Contour plot of nodal results -----! Other postprocessing as desired --FINISH
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, HROPT, HROUT, M, TOTAL, HARFRQ, DMPRAT, NSUBST, KBC, FILE, NSOL, PLCPLX, PLVAR, PRCPLX, PRVAR, EXPASS, EXPSOL, HREXP, PLDISP, PRRSOL, and PLNSOL commands.
Of these, the first step is the same as described for the full method. The remaining steps are described below. 424
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
2.
425
Chapter 4: Harmonic Response Analysis Optionally, at each frequency, print a summary table that lists the contributions of each mode to the response (HROUT). Note, OUTPR,NSOL must be specified to print mode contributions at each frequency.
3.
Apply loads on the model. Harmonic loading is the same as described for the full method, except for the following restrictions: Only forces, accelerations, and the load vector created in the modal analysis are valid. Use the LVSCALE command to apply the load vector from the modal solution. Note that ALL loads from the modal analysis are scaled, including forces and accelerations. To avoid load duplication, delete any loads that were applied in the modal analysis. If mode shapes from a reduced modal solution are being used, forces may be applied only at master DOF.
4.
Specify load step options. These are the same as described for the reduced method except that you can also specify modal damping (MDAMP). In addition, if the QR damped method is specified, constant material damping coefficients (MP,DMPR) can be defined. The NSUBST command specifies the number of solutions on each side of a natural frequency if the clustering option (HROUT) is chosen. The default is to calculate four solutions, but you can specify any number of solutions from 2 through 20. (Any value over this range defaults to 10 and any value below this range defaults to 4.)
5.
If you used either the Block Lanczos (default) or the subspace option for the modal analysis (MODOPT,LANB or SUBSP), you may use a nodal component with the OUTRES,NSOL command to limit the displacement data written to the reduced displacement file Jobname.RFRQ. The expansion pass will only produce valid results for those nodes and for those elements in which all of the nodes of the elements have been written to the .RFRQ file. To use this option, first suppress all writing by invoking OUTRES,NSOL,NONE, then specify the item(s) of interest by invoking OUTRES,NSOL,ALL,component. Repeat the OUTRES command for any additional nodal components that you want to write to the .RFRQ file. Save a copy of the database. Command(s): SAVE GUI: Utility Menu> File> Save as Start solution calculations. Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS Repeat steps 3 to 7 for any additional loads and frequency ranges (that is, for additional load steps). If you plan to do time-history postprocessing (POST26), the frequency ranges should not overlap from one load step to the next. Leave SOLUTION. Command(s): FINISH GUI: Close the Solution menu.
6.
7.
8.
9.
The mode superposition harmonic solution is written to the reduced displacement file, Jobname.RFRQ, regardless of whether the subspace, Block Lanczos, reduced, PowerDynamics, or QR damped method was used for the modal solution. You will therefore need to expand the solution if you are interested in stress results.
426
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
! Obtain the Modal Solution /SOLU ! Enter SOLUTION ANTYPE,MODAL ! Modal analysis MODOPT,REDU ! Reduced method M,... ! Masters TOTAL,.. D,... ! Constraints SF,... ! Element loads SAVE SOLVE ! Initiate modal solution FINISH ! Obtain the Mode Superposition Harmonic Solution /SOLU ! Enter SOLUTION ANTYPE,HARMIC HROPT,MSUP,... HROUT,... LVSCALE,... F,... HARFRQ,... DMPRAT,... MDAMP,... NSUBST,... KBC,... SAVE SOLVE FINISH ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Harmonic analysis Mode superposition method; number of modes to use Harmonic analysis output options; cluster option Scale factor for loads from modal analysis Nodal loads Forcing frequency range Damping ratio Modal damping ratios Number of harmonic solutions Ramped or stepped loads
! Initiate solution
! Review the Results of the Mode Superposition Solution /POST26 FILE,,RFRQ ! Postprocessing file is Jobname.RFRQ NSOL,... ! Store nodal result as a variable PLCPLX,... ! Define how to plot complex variables PLVAR,... ! Plot variables FINISH ! Expand the Solution (for Stress Results) /SOLU! Re-enter SOLUTION EXPASS,ON ! Expansion pass
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
427
! Review the Results of the Expanded Solution /POST1 SET,... ! Read results for desired frequency PLDISP,... ! Deformed shape PLNSOL,... ! Contour plot of nodal results --FINISH
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, MODOPT, M, TOTAL, HROPT, HROUT, LVSCALE, F, HARFRQ, DMPRAT, MDAMP, NSUBST, KBC, FILE, NSOL, PLCPLX, PLVAR, EXPASS, EXPSOL, HREXP, SET, and PLNSOL commands.
428
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
429
430
2. 3.
4.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
The main disadvantage of the full method is that it is more expensive than either of the other methods. For procedural information about using the full method, see Section 5.4: Performing a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis.
The disadvantages of the mode superposition method are: The time step must remain constant throughout the transient, so automatic time stepping is not allowed. The only nonlinearity allowed is simple node-to-node contact (gap condition). It does not accept imposed (nonzero) displacements.
52
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 5.4: Performing a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis For procedural information about using the mode superposition method, see Section 5.5: Performing a Mode Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis.
The disadvantages of the reduced method are: The initial solution calculates only the displacements at the master DOF. A second step, known as the expansion pass, is required for a complete displacement, stress, and force solution. (However, the expansion pass might not be needed for some applications.) Element loads (pressures, temperatures, and so on) cannot be applied. Accelerations, however, are allowed. All loads must be applied at user-defined master degrees of freedom. (This limits the use of solid-model loads.) The time step must remain constant throughout the transient, so automatic time stepping is not allowed. The only nonlinearity allowed is simple node-to-node contact (gap condition).
For procedural information about using the reduced method, see Section 5.6: Performing a Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis.
10. Section 5.4.10: Exit the Solution Processor 11. Section 5.4.11: Review the Results
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
53
Some comments on mesh density: The mesh should be fine enough to resolve the highest mode shape of interest. Regions where stresses or strains are of interest require a relatively finer mesh than regions where only displacements are of interest. If you want to include nonlinearities, the mesh should be able to capture the effects of the nonlinearities. For example, plasticity requires a reasonable integration point density (and therefore a fine element mesh) in areas with high plastic deformation gradients. If you are interested in wave propagation effects (for example, a bar dropped exactly on its end), the mesh should be fine enough to resolve the wave. A general guideline is to have at least 20 elements per wavelength along the direction of the wave.
54
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 5.4: Performing a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis The first load step you apply is usually to establish initial conditions. You then specify the loads and load step options for the second and subsequent transient load steps. For each load step, you need to specify both load values and time values, along with other load step options such as whether to step or ramp the loads, use automatic time stepping, and so on. You then write each load step to a file and solve all load steps together. Establishing initial conditions is described below; the remaining tasks are described later in this chapter. The first step in applying transient loads is to establish initial conditions (that is, the condition at Time = 0). A transient dynamic analysis requires two sets of initial conditions (because the equations being solved are of
u u second order): initial displacement (uo) and initial velocity ( o ). If no special action is taken, both uo and o are
assumed to be zero. Initial accelerations ( o ) are always assumed to be zero, but you can specify nonzero initial accelerations by applying appropriate acceleration loads over a small time interval. The following paragraphs describe how to apply different combinations of initial conditions. Zero initial displacement and zero initial velocity - These are the default conditions, that is, if uo = o = 0, you do not need to specify anything. You may apply the loads corresponding to the first corner of the load-versus-time curve in the first load step. Nonzero initial displacement and/or nonzero initial velocity - You can set these initial conditions with the IC command. Command(s): IC GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Initial Condit'n> Define Caution: Be careful not to define inconsistent initial conditions. For instance, if you define an initial velocity at a single DOF, the initial velocity at every other DOF will be 0.0, potentially leading to conflicting initial conditions. In most cases, you will want to define initial conditions at every unconstrained DOF in your model. If these conditions are not the same at every DOF, it is usually much easier to define initial conditions explicitly, as documented below (rather than by using the IC command). See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the TIMINT and IC commands. Zero initial displacement and nonzero initial velocity - The nonzero velocity is established by applying small displacements over a small time interval on the part of the structure where velocity is to be specified. For example if
uo = 0.25, you can apply a displacement of 0.001 over a time interval of 0.004, as shown below.
... TIMINT,OFF D,ALL,UY,.001 TIME,.004 LSWRITE DDEL,ALL,UY TIMINT,ON ... ! ! ! ! ! ! Time integration effects off Small UY displ. (assuming Y-direction velocity) Initial velocity = 0.001/0.004 = 0.25 Write load data to load step file (Jobname.S01) Remove imposed displacements Time integration effects on
Nonzero initial displacement and nonzero initial velocity - This is similar to the above case, except that the imposed displacements are actual values instead of "small" values. For example, if uo = 1.0 and a displacement of 1.0 over a time interval of 0.4:
... TIMINT,OFF D,ALL,UY,1.0 TIME,.4 LSWRITE DDELE,ALL,UY ! ! ! ! ! Time integration effects off Initial displacement = 1.0 Initial velocity = 1.0/0.4 = 2.5 Write load data to load step file (Jobname.S01) Remove imposed displacements
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
55
Nonzero initial displacement and zero initial velocity - This requires the use of two substeps (NSUBST,2) with a step change in imposed displacements (KBC,1). Without the step change (or with just one substep), the imposed displacements would vary directly with time, leading to a nonzero initial velocity. The example below shows how
Nonzero initial acceleration - This can be approximated by specifying the required acceleration (ACEL) over a small interval of time. For example, the commands to apply an initial acceleration of 9.81 would look like this:
... ACEL,,9.81 ! Initial Y-direction acceleration TIME,.001 ! Small time interval NSUBST,2 ! Two substeps KBC,1 ! Stepped loads ! The structure must be unconstrained in the initial load step, or ! else the initial acceleration specification will have no effect. DDELE, ... ! Remove displacement constraints (if appropriate) LSWRITE ! Write load data to load step file (Jobname.S01) ! Transient solution TIME, ... ! Realistic time interval NSUBST, ... ! Use appropriate time step KBC,0 ! Ramped loads (if appropriate) D, ... ! Constrain structure as desired ! Continue with normal transient solution procedures LSWRITE ! Write load data to load step file (Jobname.S02) ...
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for discussions of the ACEL, TIME, NSUBST, KBC, LSWRITE, DDELE, and KBC commands.
56
Section 5.4: Performing a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis box. For details about how to set these options, select the tab that you are interested in (from within the ANSYS program), and then click the Help button. Chapter 8, Nonlinear Structural Analysis also contains details about the nonlinear options introduced in this chapter.
57
Specify mass and stiffness damping (ALPHAD, BETAD) Choose the time integration method, Newmark or HHT (TRNOPT) Define integration parameters (TINTP)
Special considerations for setting these options in a full transient analysis include: TIMINT is a dynamic load step option that specifies whether time integration effects are on or off. Time integration effects must be turned on for inertia and damping effects to be included in the analysis (otherwise a static solution is performed), so the default is to include time integration effects. This option is useful when beginning a transient analysis from an initial static solution; that is, the first load steps are solved with the time integration effects off. ALPHAD (alpha, or mass, damping) and BETAD (beta, or stiffness, damping) are dynamic load step options for specifying damping options. Damping in some form is present in most structures and should be included in your analysis. See Section 5.4.4.2: Damping Option for other damping options. TRNOPT (TINTOPT) specifies the time integration method to be used. The default is Newmark method. TINTP is a dynamic load step option that specifies transient integration parameters. Transient integration parameters control the nature of the Newmark and HHT time integration techniques.
Section 5.4: Performing a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis Section 2.3.3: Set Additional Solution Options Section 2.3.3.1: Stress Stiffening Effects Section 2.3.3.2: Newton-Raphson Option Section 2.3.3.7: Creep Criteria Section 2.3.3.8: Printed Output Section 2.3.3.9: Extrapolation of Results
Additional solution options for a full transient analysis that differ from those for a static analysis, or have different descriptions are presented in the following sections.
To use the MP form of damping: Command(s): MP,DAMP GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Change Mat Props> Material Models> Structural> Damping Note that constant material damping coefficient (MP,DMPR) is not applicable in transient analysis. See Section 5.10.3: Damping for further details.
59
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis Apply the Loads describes the types of loads that are applicable. In an analysis, loads can be applied, removed, operated on, or deleted. For a general discussion of solid-model loads versus finite-element loads, see Chapter 2, Loading in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide. You can also apply time-dependent boundary conditions by defining a one-dimensional table (TABLE type array parameter). See Section 2.3.4.2.1: Applying Loads Using TABLE Type Array Parameters.
5.4.6. Save the Load Configuration for the Current Load Step
As described in Section 5.4.2: Establish Initial Conditions, you need to apply loads and save the load configuration to a load step file for each corner of the load-versus-time curve. You may also want to have an additional load step that extends past the last time point on the curve to capture the response of the structure after the transient loading. Command(s): LSWRITE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Write LS File
5.4.11.1. Postprocessors
You can review these results using either POST26, which is the time-history postprocessor, or POST1, which is the general postprocessor. POST26 is used to review results at specific points in the model as functions of time. POST1 is used to review results over the entire model at specific time points.
Some typical postprocessing operations for a transient dynamic analysis are explained below. For a complete description of all postprocessing functions, see Section 4.1: What Is Postprocessing? in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
511
2.
3.
! Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution /SOLU ! Enter SOLUTION ANTYPE,TRANS ! Transient analysis TRNOPT,FULL ! Full method D,... ! Constraints F,... ! Loads SF,... ALPHAD,... ! Mass damping BETAD,... ! Stiffness damping KBC,... ! Ramped or stepped loads TIME,... ! Time at end of load step AUTOTS,ON ! Auto time stepping DELTIM,... ! Time step size OUTRES,... ! Results file data options LSWRITE ! Write first load step -----! Loads, time, etc. for 2nd load step --LSWRITE ! Write 2nd load step SAVE LSSOLVE,1,2 ! Initiate multiple load step solution FINISH ! ! Review the Results /POST26 SOLU,... ! Store solution summary data
512
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
/POST1 SET,... ! PLDISP,... ! PRRSOL,... ! PLNSOL,... ! PRERR ! -----! Other postprocessing as --FINISH
Read desired set of results into database Deformed shape Reaction loads Contour plot of nodal results Global percent error (a measure of mesh adequacy) desired
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for discussions of the ANTYPE, TRNOPT, ALPHAD, BETAD, KBC, TIME, AUTOTS, DELTIM, OUTRES, LSWRITE, LSSOLVE, SOLU, NSOL, ESOL, RFORCE, PLVAR, PRVAR, PLDISP, PRRSOL, PLNSOL, and PRERR commands.
513
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis in the modal analysis. (ANSYS ignores damping specified during the mode superposition harmonic analysis.) You can set a constant damping ratio (DMPRAT) or define the damping ratio as a function of mode (MDAMP) in a modal superposition harmonic analysis. Note that constant material damping coefficient (MP,DMPR) is not applicable in transient analysis. Specify displacement constraints, if any. These constraints will be ignored if they are specified in the mode superposition transient solution instead of in the modal solution. If you need to apply element loads (pressures, temperatures, accelerations, and so on) in the transient dynamic analysis, you must specify them in the modal analysis. The loads are ignored for the modal solution, but a load vector will be calculated and written to the mode shape file (Jobname.MODE). You can then use this load vector for the transient solution. The modes need not be expanded for the mode superposition solution. (If you want to review mode shapes from a reduced modal solution, however, you must expand the mode shapes.) The model data (for example, nodal rotations) should not be changed between the modal and transient analyses.
2.
514
Section 5.5: Performing a Mode Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis Specify the number of modes you want to use for the solution (TRNOPT). This determines the accuracy of the transient solution. At a minimum, you should use all modes that you think will contribute to the dynamic response. If you expect higher frequencies to be excited, for example, the number of modes specified should include the higher modes. The default is to use all modes calculated in the modal solution. If you do not want to use rigid body (0 frequency) modes, use MINMODE on the TRNOPT command to skip over them. Nonlinear options (NLGEOM, SSTIF, NROPT) are not available.
3.
Define gap conditions, if any. They can only be defined between two master degree of freedom (DOF) nodes or between master DOF nodes and ground. When a non-reduced mode-extraction method is used, a master DOF implies an unconstrained, active DOF. If you used the QR damped mode-extraction method, gap conditions are not supported. More details about gap conditions are presented in Section 5.6.1.3.1: Gap Conditions. Command(s): GP GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Dynamic Gap Cond> Define Apply loads to the model. The following loading restrictions apply in a mode superposition transient dynamic analysis: Only forces, accelerations applied via the ACEL command, and a load vector created in the modal analysis are valid. Imposed nonzero displacements are ignored. Use the LVSCALE command (Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Load Vector> For Mode Super) to apply the load vector from the modal solution. If mode shapes from a reduced modal solution are being used, forces may be applied only at master DOF.
4.
Multiple load steps are usually required to specify the load history in a transient analysis. The first load step is used to establish initial conditions, and second and subsequent load steps are used for the transient loading, as explained next. 5. Establish initial conditions. In modal superposition transient analyses, a first solution is done at TIME = 0. This establishes the initial condition and time step size for the entire transient analysis. Generally, the only load applicable for the first load step is initializing nodal forces. For this pseudo-static analysis, the mode superposition method may yield poor results at TIME = 0 if nonzero loads are applied. The following load step options are available for the first load step:
Table 5.2 Options for the First Load Step-Mode Superposition Analysis
Option Dynamics Options Transient Integration Para- TINTP meters Load Vector Damping LVSCALE Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time Integration Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Load Vector> For Mode Super Command GUI Path
ALPHAD, BETAD, Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> DMPRAT, MP, Damping MDAMP Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Change Mat Props> Material Models> Structural> Damping
General Options
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
515
Dynamics options include the following: Transient Integration Parameters (TINTP) Transient integration parameters control the nature of the Newmark time integration technique. The default is to use the constant average acceleration scheme; see your ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for further details. Load Vector (LVSCALE) The load vector option allows you to apply a load vector created by the modal solution as one of the loads. You can use such a load vector to apply element loads (pressures, temperatures, and so on) on the model. Damping Damping in some form is present in most structures and should be included in your analysis. You can specify five forms of damping in a mode superposition transient dynamic analysis: Alpha (mass) damping (ALPHAD) Beta (stiffness) damping (BETAD) Constant damping ratio (DMPRAT) Material-dependent beta damping (MP,DAMP) Modal damping (MDAMP) Remember that, as described earlier in Section 5.5.2: Obtain the Modal Solution, any damping that you specify in the mode superposition transient analysis is ignored if you used the QR damped mode-extraction method. Constant material damping coefficient (MP,DMPR) is not applicable in transient analysis. See Section 5.10.3: Damping for further details.
The only valid general option for the first load step is integration time step (DELTIM), which is assumed to be constant throughout the transient. By default, the integration time step is assumed to be 1/(20f), where f is the highest frequency chosen for the solution. The DELTIM command is valid only in the first load step and is ignored in subsequent load steps. Note If you do issue the TIME command in the first load step, it will be ignored. The first solution is always a static solution at TIME = 0.
The output control option for the first load step is printed output (OUTPR). Use this option to control printout of the displacement solution at the master DOF.
6.
Write the first load step to a load step file (Jobname.S01) by issuing the LSWRITE command. Command(s): LSWRITE
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
516
Section 5.5: Performing a Mode Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Write LS File 7. Specify loads and load step options for the transient loading portion, writing each load step to a load step file (LSWRITE). General options include the following: Time Option (TIME) This option specifies time at the end of the load step. Load Vector (LVSCALE) The load vector option allows you to apply a load vector created by the modal solution as one of the loads. Stepped or Ramped Loads (KBC) This option indicates whether to ramp the load change over the load step (KBC) or to step-apply the load change (KBC,1). The default is ramped. Output control options include the following: Printed Output (OUTPR) Use this option to control printed output. Database and Results File Output (OUTRES) This option controls the data on the reduced displacement file. The only valid label on these commands is NSOL (nodal solution). The default for OUTRES is to write the solution for every fourth time-point to the reduced displacement file (unless there are gap conditions defined, in which case the default is to write every solution). 8. If you used either the Block Lanczos (default) or subspace option for the modal analysis (MODOPT,LANB or MODOPT,SUBSP), you may use a nodal component with the OUTRES,NSOL command to limit the displacement data written to the reduced displacement file Jobname.RDSP. The expansion pass will only produce valid results for those nodes and for those elements in which all of the nodes of the elements have been written to the .RDSP file. To use this option, first suppress all writing by invoking OUTRES,NSOL,NONE, then specify the item(s) of interest by invoking OUTRES,NSOL,FREQ,COMP. Repeat the OUTRES command for any additional nodal components that you want to write to the .RDSP file. Only one output frequency is allowed - ANSYS uses the last frequency specified by OUTRES. Save a backup copy of the database to a named file. Command(s): SAVE GUI: Utility Menu> File> Save as
9.
10. Start the transient solution. Command(s): LSSOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> From LS Files 11. Leave SOLUTION. Command(s): FINISH GUI: Close the Solution menu.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
517
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis The mode superposition transient solution is written to the reduced displacement file, Jobname.RDSP, regardless of whether the subspace, Block Lanczos, reduced, PowerDynamics, or QR damped method was used for the modal solution. You will therefore need to expand the solution if you are interested in stress results.
! Obtain the Modal Solution /SOLU ! Enter SOLUTION ANTYPE,MODAL ! Modal analysis MODOPT,REDU ! Reduced method M,... ! Master DOF TOTAL,... D,... ! Constraints SF,... ! Element loads ACEL,... SAVE SOLVE FINISH ! Obtain the Mode Superposition Transient Solution /SOLU ! Reenter SOLUTION ANTYPE,TRANS ! Transient analysis TRNOPT,MSUP,... ! Mode superposition method LVSCALE,... ! Scale factor for element loads F,... ! Nodal Loads MDAMP,... ! Modal damping ratios DELTIM,... ! Integration time step sizes LSWRITE ! Write first load step (Remember: the first load step --! is solved statically at time=0.) -----! Loads, etc. for 2nd load step TIME,... ! Time at end of second load step KBC,... ! Ramped or stepped loads OUTRES,... ! Results-file data controls --LSWRITE ! Write 2nd load step (first transient load step) SAVE
518
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
! Review results of the mode superposition solution /POST26 ! Enter POST26 FILE,,RDSP ! Results file is Jobname.RDSP SOLU,... ! Store solution summary data NSOL,... ! Store nodal result as a variable PLVAR,... ! Plot variables PRVAR,... ! List variables FINISH ! Expand the Solution /SOLU ! Reenter SOLUTION EXPASS,ON ! Expansion pass NUMEXP,... ! No. of solutions to expand; time range OUTRES,... ! Results-file data controls SOLVE FINISH ! Review the Results of the Expanded Solution /POST1 SET,... ! Read desired set of results into database PLDISP,... ! Deformed shape PRRSOL,... ! Reaction loads PLNSOL,... ! Contour plot of nodal results PRERR ! Global percent error (a measure of mesh adequacy) -----! Other postprocessing as desired --FINISH
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for discussions of the ANTYPE, MODOPT, M, TOTAL, ACEL, TRNOPT, LVSCALE, MDAMP, DELTIM, TIME, KBC, OUTRES, LSSOLVE, FILE, SOLU, NSOL, PLVAR, PRVAR, EXPASS, NUMEXP, OUTRES, PLDISP, PRRSOL, PLNSOL, and PRERR commands.
Of these, the first step is the same as for the full method, except that no nonlinearities are allowed (other than simple node-to-node contact, which is specified in the form of a gap condition instead of an element type). Details of the other steps are explained below.
519
Gap conditions are similar to gap elements and are specified between surfaces that are expected to contact (impact) each other during the transient. The ANSYS program accounts for the gap force, which develops when the gap closes, by using an equivalent nodal load vector. Some guidelines to define gap conditions are presented below: Use enough gap conditions to obtain a smooth contact stress distribution between the contacting surfaces. Define a reasonable gap stiffness. If the stiffness is too low, the contacting surfaces may overlap too much. If the stiffness is too high, a very small time step will be required during impact. A general recommendation is to specify a gap stiffness that is one or two orders of magnitude higher than the adjacent element stiffness. You can estimate the adjacent element stiffness using AE/L, where A is the contributing area around the gap condition, E is the elastic modulus of the softer material at the interface, and L is the depth of the first layer of elements at the interface. The nonlinear gap damping provided through the DAMP field of the GP command runs faster than a full transient analysis using a gap element COMBIN40. Only TRNOPT = MSUP allows the nonlinear gap damping action. Damping conditions are ignored for the reduced transient analysis method.
As mentioned for the full method, multiple load steps are usually required to specify the load history in a transient analysis. The first load step is used to establish initial conditions, and second and subsequent load steps are used for the transient loading, as explained next. Establish initial conditions. The only initial condition that may be explicitly established is the initial displacement (uo); that is, initial velocity and acceleration must be zero ( o = 0, o = 0). Displacements cannot be deleted in subsequent load steps, therefore they cannot be used to specify an initial velocity. In a reduced transient analysis, a static solution is always performed as the first solution, using the loads given, to determine uo.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
521
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis Specify load step options for the first load step. Valid options appear in Table 5.3: Options for the First Load Step-Reduced Analysis.
General Options Integration Time Step Output Control Options Printed Output OUTPR DELTIM
522
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
The only valid label on these commands is NSOL (nodal solution). The default for OUTRES is to write the solution for every fourth time-point to the reduced displacement file (unless there are gap conditions defined, in which case the default is to write every solution).
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
523
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis FILE command would be: FILE,TRANS,RDSP. (By default, POST26 looks for a results file, which is not written by a reduced transient solution.) Only nodal degree of freedom data (at master DOF) are available for processing, so you can use only the NSOL command to define variables.
524
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 5.6: Performing a Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis Specify the number. This number of evenly spaced solutions will be expanded over the specified time range. The solutions nearest these times will be expanded. Also specify whether to calculate stresses and forces (default is to calculate both). Option: Single Solution to Expand (EXPSOL) Use this option to identify a single solution for expansion if you do not need to expand multiple solutions in a range. You can specify it either by load step and substep number or by time. Also specify whether to calculate stresses and forces (default is to calculate both). 3. Specify load step options. The only options valid for a transient dynamic expansion pass are output controls: Output Controls Printed Output (OUTPR) Use this option to include any results data on the output file (Jobname.OUT). Database and Results File Output (OUTRES) This option controls the data on the results file (Jobname.RST). Extrapolation of Results (ERESX) Use this option to review element integration point results by copying them to the nodes instead of extrapolating them (default). Note The FREQ field on OUTPR and OUTRES can only be ALL or NONE. ERESX allows you to review element integration point results by copying them to the nodes instead of extrapolating them (default).
4.
Start expansion pass calculations. Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4 for additional solutions to be expanded. Each expansion pass is stored as a separate load step on the results file. Leave SOLUTION. Command(s): FINISH GUI: Close the Solution window.
5. 6.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
525
526
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
527
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Enter 1 for Area, 800.6 for IZZ, and 18 for Height. Click on OK. In the Real Constants dialog box, click on Add. Click on Type 2 MASS21 and click on OK. The Real Constant Set Number 2, for MASS21 dialog box appears. Enter .0259067 in the 2-D mass field and click on OK. Click on Close in the Real Constants dialog box.
528
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 5.7: Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (GUI Method) 9. Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
529
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis 2. Click on the "Every substep" radio button and click on OK.
Section 5.8: Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (Command or Batch Method) 5. 6. 7. Review the information in the status window, and click on Close. Click on OK on the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to begin the solution. Click on Close when the Solution is done! window appears.
10. Click on OK, then click on Close in the Defined Time-History Variables dialog box. 11. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Graph Variables. 12. Enter 2 for 1st variable to graph and click on OK. The graph appears in the ANSYS Graphics window. 13. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> List Variables. 14. Enter 2 for 1st variable to list and click on OK. 15. Review the information in the status window and click on Close.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
531
! Type 2 element with real constant 2 ! Master DOF in Y direction at middle of beam
! Transient dynamic analysis ! Reduced transient analysis, ignore damping ! Integration time step size
! Force = 0 at Time = 0 ! Time at end of load step ! Force is ramped to 20 ! Constant force until time = 0.1
/SOLU ! The following is the expansion pass using BEAM3 and MASS21 elements EXPASS,ON ! Expansion pass on EXPSOL,,,0.092 ! Time of maximum response SOLVE FINISH /POST26 NUMVAR,0 FILE,file,rdsp NSOL,2,2,U,Y,NSOL PLVAR,2 PRVAR,2 FINISH /POST1 SET,FIRST PLDISP,1 FINISH
532
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 5.10: Other Analysis Details Apply all prestressing loads. Turn time integration effects off (TIMINT,OFF). Turn stress stiffening effects on (SSTIF,ON). Set time equal to some small dummy value (TIME). Write your first load step to Jobname.S01 (LSWRITE).
If prestressing effects develop because of nonlinear behavior (as in the case of residual thermal stresses in a casting), several load steps might be required to complete the static prestressing phase of your analysis. In the case of geometric nonlinearities (large deformation effects), you can capture the prestressing effect by issuing NLGEOM,ON. 2. For all subsequent load steps, turn time integration effects on (TIMINT,ON), and proceed using the full transient dynamic analysis procedures described previously. Once all load steps are written to files (LSWRITE), you can initiate the multiple load step solution (LSSOLVE).
Note The static prestress solution must be done as a separate solution if initial conditions are to be defined with the IC command. (Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Initial Condit'n> Define) The IC command is valid only in the first load step.
533
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis 1. Resolve the response frequency. The time step should be small enough to resolve the motion (response) of the structure. Since the dynamic response of a structure can be thought of as a combination of modes, the time step should be able to resolve the highest mode that contributes to the response. For the Newmark time integration scheme, it has been found that using approximately twenty points per cycle of the highest frequency of interest results in a reasonably accurate solution. That is, if f is the frequency (in cycles/time), the integration time step (ITS) is given by ITS = 1/20f Smaller ITS values may be required if acceleration results are needed. The following figure shows the effect of ITS on the period elongation of a single-DOF spring-mass system. Notice that 20 or more points per cycle result in a period elongation of less than 1 percent.
For the HHT time integration method, the same guidelines for time step should be applied. Note that if the same time step and time integration parameters are used, the HHT method will be more accurate compared to the Newmark method. 2. Resolve the applied load-versus-time curve(s). The time step should be small enough to follow the loading function. The response tends to lag the applied loads, especially for stepped loads, as shown in Figure 5.5: Transient Input vs. Transient Response. Stepped loads require a small ITS at the time of the step change so that the step change can be closely followed. ITS values as small as 1/180f may be needed to follow stepped loads.
534
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
3.
Resolve the contact frequency. In problems involving contact (impact), the time step should be small enough to capture the momentum transfer between the two contacting surfaces. Otherwise, an apparent energy loss will occur and the impact will not be perfectly elastic. The integration time step can be determined from the contact frequency (fc) as:
ITS =1/Nfc
fc =(1/ 2) k /m
where k is the gap stiffness, m is the effective mass acting at the gap, and N is the number of points per cycle. To minimize the energy loss, at least thirty points per cycle of (N = 30) are needed. Larger values of N may be required if acceleration results are needed. For the reduced and mode superposition methods, N must be at least 7 to ensure stability. You can use fewer than thirty points per cycle during impact if the contact period and contact mass are much less than the overall transient time and system mass, because the effect of any energy loss on the total response would be small. 4. Resolve the wave propagation. If you are interested in wave propagation effects, the time step should be small enough to capture the wave as it travels through the elements. See Section 5.4.1: Build the Model for a discussion of element size. Resolve the nonlinearities. For most nonlinear problems, a time step that satisfies the preceding guidelines is sufficient to resolve the nonlinearities. There are a few exceptions, however: if the structure tends to stiffen under the loading (for example, large deflection problems that change from bending to membrane load-carrying behavior), the higher frequency modes that are excited will have to be resolved.
5.
After calculating the time step using the appropriate guidelines, use the minimum value for your analysis. By using automatic time stepping, you can let the ANSYS program decide when to increase or decrease the time step during the solution. Automatic time stepping is discussed next. Caution: Avoid using exceedingly small time steps, especially when establishing initial conditions. Exceedingly small numbers can cause numerical difficulties. Based on a problem time scale of unity, for example, time steps smaller than 10-10 could cause numerical difficulties.
535
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis number of times that you might have to rerun the analysis (adjusting the time step size, nonlinearities, and so on) is greatly reduced. If nonlinearities are present, automatic time stepping gives the added advantage of incrementing the loads appropriately and retreating to the previous converged solution (bisection) if convergence is not obtained. You can activate automatic time stepping with the AUTOTS command. (For more information on automatic time stepping in the context of nonlinearities, see Chapter 8, Nonlinear Structural Analysis.) Although it seems like a good idea to activate automatic time stepping for all analyses, there are some cases where it may not be beneficial (and may even be harmful): Problems that have only localized dynamic behavior (for example, turbine blade and hub assemblies), where the low-frequency energy content of part of the system may dominate the high-frequency areas Problems that are constantly excited (for example, seismic loading), where the time step tends to change continually as different frequencies are excited Kinematics (rigid-body motion) problems, where the rigid-body contribution to the response frequency term may dominate
5.10.3. Damping
Damping is present in most systems and should be specified in a dynamic analysis. The following forms of damping are available in the ANSYS program: Alpha and Beta Damping (Rayleigh Damping) Material-Dependent Damping Constant Material Damping Coefficient Constant Damping Ratio Modal Damping Element Damping
Only the constant damping ratio and modal damping are available in the ANSYS Professional program. You can specify more than one form of damping in a model. The program will formulate the damping matrix (C) as the sum of all the specified forms of damping. The constant material damping coefficient is only applicable in full and modal harmonic analyses. Table 5.5: Damping for Different Analysis Types shows the types of damping available for different structural analyses.
536
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Alpha, Beta Damping ALAnalysis Type PHAD, BETAD Mode Sup Transient Full Reduced Mode Sup Spectrum SPRS, MPRS(2) DDAM(2) PSD(2) Buckling Substructure Yes(1) Yes(1) Yes N/A Yes Yes Yes Yes(6) Yes(6)
N/A Not applicable 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. damping only, no damping Damping is used only for mode combination and not for computation of mode coefficients Includes superelement damping matrix If converted to modal damping by expansion of modes If specified, an effective damping ratio is calculated for subsequent spectrum analyses If you use the QR damped mode-extraction method (MODOPT,QRDAMP), and you specify any kind of damping during preprocessing or in the modal analysis, ANSYS ignores damping specified during the mode superposition analysis Only the QR damped method supports the constant material damping coefficient application in a downstream mode superposition harmonic analysis
7.
Alpha damping and Beta damping are used to define Rayleigh damping constants and . The damping matrix (C) is calculated by using these constants to multiply the mass matrix (M) and stiffness matrix (K): (C) = (M) + (K) The ALPHAD and BETAD commands are used to specify and , respectively, as decimal numbers. The values of and are not generally known directly, but are calculated from modal damping ratios, i. i is the ratio of actual damping to critical damping for a particular mode of vibration, i. If i is the natural circular frequency of mode i, and satisfy the relation i = /2i + i/2 In many practical structural problems, alpha damping (or mass damping) may be ignored ( = 0). In such cases, you can evaluate from known values of i and i, as = 2 i/i Only one value of can be input in a load step, so choose the most dominant frequency active in that load step to calculate .
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
537
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis To specify both and for a given damping ratio , it is commonly assumed that the sum of the and terms is nearly constant over a range of frequencies (see Figure 5.6: Rayleigh Damping). Therefore, given and a frequency range i to j, two simultaneous equations can be solved for and .
Alpha damping can lead to undesirable results if an artificially large mass has been introduced into the model. One common example is when an artificially large mass is added to the base of a structure to facilitate acceleration spectrum input. (You can use the large mass to convert an acceleration spectrum to a force spectrum.) The alpha damping coefficient, which is multiplied by the mass matrix, will produce artificially large damping forces in such a system, leading to inaccuracies in the spectrum input, as well as in the system response. Beta damping and material damping can lead to undesirable results in a nonlinear analysis. These damping coefficients are multiplied by the stiffness matrix, which is constantly changing in a nonlinear analysis. The resulting change in damping can sometimes be opposite to the actual change in damping that can occur in physical structures. For example, whereas physical systems that experience softening due to plastic response will usually experience a corresponding increase in damping, an ANSYS model that has beta damping will experience a decrease in damping as plastic softening response develops. Material-dependent damping allows you to specify beta damping () as a material property (MP,DAMP). Note, however, that MP,DAMP in a spectrum analysis (ANTYPE,SPECTR) specifies a material-dependent damping ratio , not . Also note that for multi-material elements such as SOLID46, SOLID65, SHELL91, and SHELL99, can only be specified for the element as a whole, not for each material in the element. In these cases, is determined from the material pointer for the element (set with the MAT command), rather than the material pointed to by any real constant MAT for the element. MP,DAMP is not assumed to be temperature-dependent, and is always evaluated at T = 0.0. The constant material damping coefficient is available only for full and modal harmonic analyses. The constant damping ratio is the simplest way of specifying damping in the structure. It represents the ratio of actual damping to critical damping, and is specified as a decimal number with the DMPRAT command. DMPRAT is available only for spectrum, harmonic response, and mode superposition transient dynamic analyses. Modal damping gives you the ability to specify different damping ratios for different modes of vibration. It is specified with the MDAMP command and is available only for the spectrum and mode superposition method of solution (transient dynamic and harmonic response analyses). Element damping involves using element types having viscous damping characteristics, such as COMBIN7, COMBIN14, COMBIN37, COMBIN40, and so on.
538
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 5.10: Other Analysis Details If you are running a mode superposition analysis and used the QR damping solution method for the modal solution, alpha (ALPHAD), beta (BETAD), material-dependent, and element damping must be defined in the QR damping modal solution for the damping to be available in a subsequent mode superposition analysis. For more information about damping, see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference. The explicit mathematical expressions that form the damping matrix in different analysis options are shown in Table 5.6: Damping Matrix Formulation with Different Damping Coefficients. These expressions define how each of the damping options in Table 5.5: Damping for Different Analysis Types is handled in a dynamic analysis.
T[K ] = 2 i
T[K ] = 2 i
i 2
No
[K]
MP,DAMP j
Nm
j =1
m j [K j ]
No
No
No
Nm
j =1 Nm
m s j Ej s Ej j =1
j =1
T m [K j ] j
j =1
Nm
T m [K j ] j
j =1
Nm
No
DMPRAT
Harmonic
No
2i
2i
No
2 [K ]
MDAMP
m i
No
No
2mi i
2mi i
m i
No
Element Damping
Ne
k =1
[Ck ]
No
Ne
No
No
No
k =1
[Ck ]
No
T [Ck ]
k =1
Ne
T [Ck ]
k =1
Ne
MP,DMPR
Harmonic
Nm 2 j [K j ] j =1
No
No
No
2 [K j ] j j =1
N T m
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
539
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis Note 1. For modal, mode superposition, and spectrum analyses the boxes are split where applicable with the top indicating the Lanczos method and the bottom indicating the QR damped method.
540
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
The only method available in the ANSYS Professional program is the single-point response spectrum.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
62
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 6.3: Steps in a Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS) Analysis 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Obtain the modal solution. Obtain the spectrum solution. Expand the modes. Combine the modes. Review the results.
The modal solution is required because the structure's mode shapes and frequencies must be available to calculate the spectrum solution. Also, by performing the spectrum solution ahead of mode expansion, you can expand only the significant modes that contribute to the final solution.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
63
Chapter 6: Spectrum Analysis 1. Enter SOLUTION. Command(s): /SOLU GUI: Main Menu> Solution Define the analysis type and analysis options. ANSYS offers the following analysis options for a spectrum analysis. Not all modal analysis options and not all eigenvalue extraction techniques work with all spectrum analysis options.
2.
Analysis Type: Spectrum ANTYPE No. of Modes to Use for SPOPT Solution
Option: Spectrum Type: Single-point Response Spectrum [SPOPT] Choose Single-point Response Spectrum (SPRS).
Option: Number of Modes to Use for Solution [SPOPT] Choose enough modes to cover the frequency range spanned by the spectrum and to characterize the structure's response. The accuracy of the solution depends on the number of modes used: the larger the number, the higher the accuracy. Make sure to choose YES on the SPOPT command if you want to calculate element stresses.
3.
Specify load step options. The following options are available for single-point response spectrum analysis:
64
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Spectrum Options These data include the following: Type of Response Spectrum [SVTYP] The spectrum type can be displacement, velocity, acceleration, force, or PSD. All except the force spectrum represent seismic spectra; that is, they are assumed to be specified at the base. The force spectrum is specified at non-base nodes with the F or FK command, and the direction is implied by labels FX, FY, FZ. The PSD spectrum [SVTYP,4] is internally converted to a displacement response spectrum and is limited to flat, narrowband spectra; a more robust random vibration analysis procedure is described in Section 6.7: How to Do a Random Vibration (PSD) Analysis. Excitation Direction [SED] Spectral-Value-Versus-Frequency Curve [FREQ, SV] SV and FREQ commands are used to define the spectral curve. You can define a family of spectral curves, each curve for a different damping ratio. Use the STAT command to list current spectrum curve values. Another command, ROCK, allows you to specify a rocking spectrum.
Damping (Dynamics Options) If you specify more than one form of damping, the ANSYS program calculates an effective damping ratio at each frequency. The spectral value at this effective damping ratio is then calculated by loglog interpolation of the spectral curves. If no damping is specified, the spectral curve with the lowest damping is used. For further details about the different forms of damping, see Section 5.10.3: Damping in Chapter 5, Transient Dynamic Analysis. The following forms of damping are available: Beta (stiffness) Damping [BETAD] This option results in a frequency-dependent damping ratio. Constant Damping Ratio [DMPRAT] This option specifies a constant damping ratio to be used at all frequencies. Modal Damping [MDAMP] Note Material-dependent damping ratio [MP,DAMP] is also available but only if specified in the modal analysis. MP,DAMP also specifies a material-dependent constant damping ratio (and not material-dependent beta damping, as used in other analyses).
4.
Start solution calculations. Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
65
Chapter 6: Spectrum Analysis The output from the solution includes the participation factor table. The participation factor table, which is part of the printed output, lists the participation factors, mode coefficients (based on lowest damping ratio), and the mass distribution for each mode. To obtain the maximum response of each mode (modal response), multiply the mode shape by the mode coefficient. You do this by retrieving the mode coefficient with the *GET command and using it as a scale factor in the SET command. 5. 6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for additional response spectra, if any. Note that solutions are not written to the file.rst at this time. Leave the SOLUTION processor. Command(s): FINISH GUI: Close the Solution menu.
2.
Note that modal analysis solutions are written to the results file (Jobname.RST) only if the mode expansion is performed.
66
Section 6.3: Steps in a Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS) Analysis 2. Define analysis type. Command(s): ANTYPE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis Option: New Analysis [ANTYPE] Choose New Analysis. Option: Analysis Type: Spectrum [ANTYPE] Choose analysis type spectrum. 3. Choose one of the mode combination methods. ANSYS offers five different mode combination methods for the single-point response spectrum analysis: Square Root of Sum of Squares (SRSS) Complete Quadratic Combination (CQC) Double Sum (DSUM) Grouping (GRP) Naval Research Laboratory Sum (NRLSUM)
The NRLSUM method is typically used in the context of the Dynamic Design and Analysis Method (DDAM) spectrum analysis. The following commands are used to invoke different methods of mode combinations: Command(s): SRSS, CQC, DSUM, GRP, NRLSUM GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis> Spectrum Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Opts> Single-pt resp Main Menu> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> Spectrum-Single Point-Mode Combine These commands allow computation of three different types of responses: Displacement (label = DISP)
Displacement response refers to displacements, stresses, forces, etc. Velocity (label = VELO)
Velocity response refers to velocities, "stress velocities," "force velocities," etc. Acceleration (label = ACEL)
Acceleration response refers to accelerations, "stress accelerations," "force accelerations," etc. The DSUM method also allows the input of time duration for earthquake or shock spectrum. Note You must specify damping if you use the Complete Quadratic Combination method of mode combination (CQC). In addition, if you use material-dependent damping [MP,DAMP,...], you must request that element results be calculated in the modal expansion. (Elcalc = YES on the MXPAND command.) 4. Start solution.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
67
Chapter 6: Spectrum Analysis Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS The mode combination phase writes a file of POST1 commands (Jobname.MCOM). Read in this file in POST1 to do the mode combinations, using the results file (Jobname.RST) from the modal expansion pass. The file Jobname.MCOM contains POST1 commands that combine the maximum modal responses by using the specified mode combination method to calculate the overall response of the structure. The mode combination method determines how the structure's modal responses are to be combined: If you selected displacement as the response type (label = DISP), displacements and stresses are combined for each mode on the mode combination command. If you selected velocity as the response type (label = VELO), velocities and stress velocities are combined for each mode on the mode combination command. If you selected acceleration as the response type (label = ACEL), accelerations and stress accelerations are combined for each mode on the mode combination command.
5.
Leave the SOLUTION processor. Command(s): FINISH GUI: Close the Solution menu. Note If you want to compute velocity or acceleration in addition to displacement, repeat the mode combination step after postprocessing the displacement solution by using the VELO or ACEL label on the mode combination commands (SRSS, CQC, GRP, DSUM, NRLSUM). Remember that the existing Jobname.MCOM file is overwritten by the additional mode combination step(s).
68
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 6.3: Steps in a Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS) Analysis For example, issue /INPUT with the following arguments:
/INPUT,FILE,MCOM!Assumes the default jobname FILE
2.
Display results. Option: Display Deformed Shape Command(s): PLDISP GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape Option: Contour Displays Command(s): PLNSOL or PLESOL GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu or Element Solu Use PLNSOL or PLESOL to contour almost any result item, such as stresses (SX, SY, SZ ...), strains (EPELX, EPELY, EPELZ ...), and displacements (UX, UY, UZ ...). If you previously issued the SUMTYPE command, the results of the PLNSOL or PLESOL command are affected by the particular SUMTYPE command option (SUMTYPE,COMP or SUMTYPE,PRIN) that you selected. Use the PLETAB command to contour element table data and PLLS to contour line element data. Caution: Derived data, such as stresses and strains, are averaged at the nodes by the PLNSOL command. This averaging results in "smeared" values at nodes where elements of different materials, different shell thicknesses, or other discontinuities meet. To avoid the smearing effect, use selecting (described in Chapter 7, Selecting and Components in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide) to select elements of the same material, same shell thickness, etc. before issuing PLNSOL. You can view correct membrane results for shells (SHELL, MID) by using KEYOPT(8) = 2 (for SHELL93, SHELL181, SHELL208, and SHELL209) or KEYOPT(11) = 2 (SHELL63). These KEYOPTS write the mid-surface node results directly to the results file, and allow the membrane results to be directly operated on during squaring operations. The default method of averaging the TOP and BOT squared values to obtain a MID value can possibly yield incorrect MID values. Option: Vector Displays Command(s): PLVECT GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Vector Plot> Predefined Option: Tabular Listings Command(s): PRNSOL (nodal results) PRESOL (element-by-element results) PRRSOL (reaction data) GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Nodal Solution Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Element Solution Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Reaction Solution Other Capabilities Many other postprocessing functions, such as mapping results onto a path, transforming results to different coordinate systems, and load case combinations, are available in POST1. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
69
Chapter 6: Spectrum Analysis The modal solution and spectrum solution passes can be combined into a single modal analysis [ANTYPE,MODAL] solution pass, with spectrum loads [SV, SVTYP, SED, FREQ]. The mode expansion and mode combination solution passes can be combined into a single modal analysis [ANTYPE,MODAL and EXPASS,ON] solution pass with a mode combination command.
610
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
6.4.4. Procedure
6.4.4.1. Set the Analysis Title
1. 2. Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Change Title. Type the text "Seismic Response of a Beam Structure" and click on OK.
611
Chapter 6: Spectrum Analysis 4. 5. 6. 7. Enter 273.9726 for cross-sectional area. Enter (1000/3) for area moment of inertia. Enter 14 for total beam height and click on OK. Click on Close to close the Real Constants dialog box.
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Lines> Lines> Straight Line. A picking menu appears. 11. Click on keypoint 1, and then on keypoint 2. A straight line appears between the two keypoints. 12. Click on OK. The picking menu closes.
612
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
10. Choose Pick All. The Define Master DOFs dialog box appears. 11. Select UY for the 1st degree of freedom and click on OK. The Define Master DOFs dialog box closes.
2.
613
Chapter 6: Spectrum Analysis 3. 4. 5. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> Single Point> Settings. The Settings for Single-point Response Spectrum dialog box appears. Select "Seismic displac" in the scroll box as the type of response spectrum. Enter 0,1,0 for excitation direction into the excitation direction input windows and click on OK.
2. 3. 4.
614
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
2. 3. 4.
615
Chapter 6: Spectrum Analysis 6. 7. 8. 9. Click on OK. The Read File dialog box closes. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Nodal Solution. The List Nodal Solution dialog box appears. Click on OK to accept the default settings of "DOF solution" in the scroll box on the left and "All DOFs DOF" in the scroll box on the right. The List Nodal Solution dialog box closes. The PRNSOL Command listing window appears. Review the results and click on Close to close the PRNSOL Command listing window.
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Element Solution. The List Element Solution dialog box appears. 11. Scroll down the list on the left to select "Line Elem results" and select "Structural ELEM" on the scroll box on the right. Click on OK. The List Element Solution dialog box closes. 12. The PRESOL Command listing window appears. Review the results and click on Close to close the PRESOL Command listing window. 13. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Reaction Solu. The List Reaction Solution dialog box appears. 14. Scroll down the list to "All struc forc F" to select it and click on OK. The List Reaction Solution dialog box closes. 15. The PRRSOL Command listing window appears. Review the results in the listing window and click on Close to close the PRRSOL Command listing window.
616
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
! ! ! ! ! !
Spectrum analysis Single point spectrum Global Y-axis as spectrum direction Seismic displacement spectrum Frequency points for SV vs. freq. table Spectrum values associated with frequency points
! Mode-frequency analysis ! Expand 10 mode shapes, calculate element stresses ! set signif=0.005
! Square Root of Sum of Squares Mode combination ! with signif=0.15 and displacement solution requested
! Print nodal solution ! Print element solution in element format ! Print reaction solution
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
617
Of these, the first two steps are the same as described for a single-point response spectrum analysis. The procedure for the remaining four steps is explained below. Random vibration analysis is not available in the ANSYS Professional program. In the GUI method, the dialog box for the modal analysis options [MODOPT] contains an option for mode expansion [MXPAND]. Choose YES for mode expansion. You then follow the instructions in Section 6.7.1: Expand the Modes. The procedures for obtaining the modal solution and expanding the nodes are combined into a single step.
As explained in Chapter 3, Modal Analysis, you can combine the modal solution and mode expansion steps by including the MXPAND command in the modal analysis step (GUI and batch modes).
2.
618
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 6.7: How to Do a Random Vibration (PSD) Analysis For spectrum type [SPOPT], choose Power Spectral Density (PSD). Specify stress calculations ON [SPOPT] if you are interested in stress results. Stresses caused by the spectrum are calculated only if they were also requested during the modal expansion pass.
3.
Specify load step options. The following options are available for a random vibration analysis: Spectrum Data Type of PSD Command(s): PSDUNIT GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Settings The PSD type can be displacement, velocity, force, pressure, or acceleration. Whether it is a base excitation or a nodal excitation is specified in Steps 4 and 5. If a pressure PSD is to be applied, the pressures should be applied in the modal analysis itself. PSD-versus-frequency table Define a piecewise-linear (in log-log scale) PSD versus frequency table. Since a curve-fitting polynomial is used for the closed-form integration of the curve, you should graph the input, which is overlaid with the fitted curve, to ensure a good fit. If the fit is not good, you should add one or more intermediate points to the table until you obtain a good fit. Command(s): PSDFRQ, PSDVAL, PSDGRAPH GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> PSD vs Freq Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Graph PSD Tables PSDFRQ and PSDVAL are used to define the PSD-versus-frequency table. Step 6 describes how to apply additional PSD excitations (if any). You can issue STAT to list PSD tables and issue PSDGRAPH to graph them. Damping (Dynamics Options) The following forms of damping are available: ALPHAD, BETAD, and MDAMP result in a frequencydependent damping ratio, whereas DMPRAT specifies a constant damping ratio to be used at all frequencies. If you specify more than one form of damping, ANSYS calculates an effective damping ratio at each frequency. Note If no damping is specified in a PSD analysis, a default DMPRAT of 1 percent is used. Alpha (Mass) Damping Command(s): ALPHAD GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Damping Beta (Stiffness) Damping Command(s): BETAD GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Damping Constant Damping Ratio Command(s): DMPRAT GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Damping Frequency-Dependent Damping Ratio Command(s): MDAMP GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Damping
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
619
The remaining steps are specific to a random vibration analysis: 4. Apply the PSD excitation at the desired nodes. Use a value of 1.0 to indicate points where the PSD excitation applies. A value of 0.0 (or blank) can be used to remove a specification. The excitation direction is implied by the UX, UY, UZ labels on the D command (for base excitation), and by FX, FY, FZ on the F command (for nodal excitation). For nodal excitation, values other than 1.0 can be used to scale the participation factors. For pressure PSD, bring in the load vector from the modal analysis (LVSCALE). You can use the scale factor. Note You can apply base excitations only at nodes that were constrained in the modal analysis. Command(s): D (or DK, DL, or DA) for base excitation F (or FK) for nodal excitation LVSCALE for pressure PSD GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Spectrum> Base PSD Excit> On Nodes 5. Begin participation factor calculations for the above PSD excitation. Use the TBLNO field to indicate which PSD table to use, and Excit to specify whether the calculations are for a base or nodal excitation. Command(s): PFACT GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Calculate PF 6. If you need to apply multiple PSD excitations on the same model, repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for each additional PSD table. Then define, as necessary, the degree of correlation between the excitations, using any of the following commands: Command(s): COVAL for cospectral values, QDVAL for quadspectral values, PSDSPL for a spatial relationship, PSDWAV for a wave propagation relationship, PSDGRAPH to graph the data overlaid with the fitted curve GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Correlation Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Graph Tables When you use the PSDSPL or PSDWAV command, you must use SPATIAL or WAVE, respectively, for
Parcor on the PFACT command. PSDSPL and PSDWAV relationships might be quite CPU intensive for
multi-point base excitations. Nodal excitation and base excitation input must be consistent when using PSDWAV and PSDSPL (for example, FY cannot be applied to one node and FZ be applied to another). The PSDSPL and PSDWAV commands are not available for a pressure PSD analysis. 7. Specify the output controls. The only valid output control command for this analysis is PSDRES, which specifies the amount and form of output written to the results file. Up to three sets of solution quantities can be calculated: displacement solution, velocity solution, or acceleration solution. Each of these can be relative to the base or absolute. Command(s): PSDRES GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Calc Controls Table 6.3: Solution Items Available in a PSD Analysis shows a summary of the possible solution sets. To limit the amount of data written to the results file, use OUTRES at the mode expansion step. Using OUTPR,NSOL,ALL provides a summary table of the significant modal covariance terms.
620
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
8.
Start solution calculations. Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS Leave the SOLUTION processor. Command(s): FINISH GUI: Close the Solution menu.
9.
2.
5.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
621
You can review these results in POST1, the general postprocessor, and then calculate response PSDs in POST26, the time-history postprocessor.
Command(s): SET GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> First Set 622
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
2.
3.
4.
2.
3.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
623
Chapter 6: Spectrum Analysis 4. Obtain the covariance. Command(s): *GET,NameVARI,n,EXTREM,CVAR GUI: Utility Menu> Parameters> Get Scalar Data
! ! ! !
PSDVAL, ... DMPRAT, ... D,0 PFACT, ... PSDRES, ... SAVE SOLVE FINISH ! ! Combine modes using PSD method /SOLU ! Re-enter SOLUTION ANTYPE,SPECTR ! Spectrum analysis PSDCOM,SIGNIF,COMODE ! PSD mode combinations with significance factor and ! option for selecting a subset of modes for ! combination SOLVE FINISH ! ! Review the Results /POST1 ! Enter POST1 SET, ... ! Read results from appropriate load step, substep ...! Postprocess as desired ...! (PLDISP; PLNSOL; NSORT; PRNSOL; etc.) ... FINISH ! ! Calculate Response PSD /POST26 ! Enter POST26
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Spectrum analysis Power Spectral Density; No. of modes; Stress calcs. on/off Type of spectrum Frequency pts. (for spectrum values vs. frequency tables) Spectrum values Damping ratio Base excitation Calculate participation factors Output controls
624
! ! ! ! ! *GET,CVAR23U,VARI,4,EXREME,CVAR ! FINISH
Reset all POST26 specifications to initial defaults. Define variable 2 (nodal data). Define variable 3 (nodal data). Calculate covariance between displacement at nodes 2 and 3. Obtain covariance.
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, MODOPT, M, TOTAL, D, EXPASS, MXPAND, SPOPT, PSDUNIT, PSDFRQ, PSDVAL, DMPRAT, PFACT, PSDCOM, SUMTYPE, and PSDRES commands.
625
Chapter 6: Spectrum Analysis You cannot specify any degree of correlation between the spectra (i.e., they are assumed to be uncorrelated). Only relative results (relative to the base excitation) not absolute values, are calculated. All mode combination methods are available except PSDCOM. Results from a multi-point response spectrum analysis are written to the mode combination file, Jobname.MCOM, in the form of POST1 commands. The commands calculate the overall response of the structure by combining the maximum modal responses in some fashion (specified by the mode combination command in SOLUTION). The overall response consists of the overall displacements and, if placed on the results file during the modal expansion pass, the overall stresses, strains, and reaction forces. If Label = VELO or ACEL on the mode combination command (SRSS, CQC, GRP, DSUM, or NRLSUM) during SOLUTION, the corresponding velocity or acceleration responses are written to the mode combination file.
Multi-point response spectrum analysis is not available in the ANSYS Professional program.
626
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
7.4.3. Important
Remember that an unconverged solution does not necessarily mean that the structure has reached its maximum load. It could also be caused by numerical instability, which might be corrected by refining your modeling technique. Track the load-deflection history of your structure's response to decide whether an unconverged load step represents actual structural buckling, or whether it reflects some other problem. Perform a preliminary analysis using the arc-length method [ARCLEN] to predict an approximate value of buckling load. Compare this approximate value to the more precise value calculated using bisection to help determine if the structure has indeed reached its maximum load. You can also use the arc-length method itself to obtain a precise buckling load, but this method requires you to adjust the arc-length radius by trial-and-error in a series of manually directed reanalyses.
72
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
73
You can apply a nonzero constraint in the prestressing pass as the static load. The eigenvalues found in the buckling solution will be the load factors applied to these nonzero constraint values. However, the mode shapes will have a zero value at these degrees of freedom (and not the nonzero value specified). At the end of the solution, leave SOLUTION [FINISH].
74
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
2.
4.
Specify load step options. The only load step options valid for eigenvalue buckling are output controls and expansion pass options. Command(s): OUTPR,NSOL,ALL GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu Printout You can make the expansion pass a part of the eigenvalue buckling solution or perform it as a separate step. In this document, we treat the expansion pass as a separate step. See Section 7.5.4: Expand the Solution for details.
5.
75
Chapter 7: Buckling Analysis GUI: Utility Menu> File> Save As 6. Start solution calculations. Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS The output from the solution mainly consists of the eigenvalues, which are printed as part of the printed output (Jobname.OUT). The eigenvalues represent the buckling load factors; if unit loads were applied in the static analysis, they are the buckling loads. No buckling mode shapes are written to the database or the results file, so you cannot postprocess the results yet. To do this, you need to expand the solution (explained next). Sometimes you may see both positive and negative eigenvalues calculated. Negative eigenvalues indicate that buckling occurs when the loads are applied in an opposite sense. 7. Exit the SOLUTION processor. Command(s): FINISH GUI: Close the Solution menu.
3.
76
Section 7.5: Procedure for Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis For Elcalc, indicate whether you want ANSYS to calculate stresses. "Stresses" in an eigenvalue analysis do not represent actual stresses, but give you an idea of the relative stress or force distribution for each mode. By default, no stresses are calculated.
4.
Specify load step options. The only options valid in a buckling expansion pass are the following output controls: Printed Output Use this option to include any results data on the output file (Jobname.OUT). Command(s): OUTPR GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrl> Solu Printout Database and Results File Output This option controls the data on the results file (Jobname.RST). Command(s): OUTRES GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrl> DB/Results File Note The FREQ field on OUTPR and OUTRES can only be ALL or NONE, that is, the data can be requested for all modes or no modes - you cannot write information for every other mode, for instance.
5.
Start expansion pass calculations. The output consists of expanded mode shapes and, if requested, relative stress distributions for each mode. Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS
6.
Leave the SOLUTION processor. You can now review results in the postprocessor. Command(s): FINISH GUI: Close the Solution menu. Note The expansion pass has been presented here as a separate step. You can make it part of the eigenvalue buckling solution by including the MXPAND command (Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Expand Modes) as one of the analysis options.
77
Chapter 7: Buckling Analysis 2. Read in data for the desired mode to display buckling mode shapes. (Each mode is stored on the results file as a separate substep.) Command(s): SET,SBSTEP GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> load step Display the mode shape. Command(s): PLDISP GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape Contour the relative stress distributions. Command(s): PLNSOL or PLESOL GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solution Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Element Solution
3.
4.
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, PSTRES, D, F, SF, BUCOPT, EXPASS, MXPAND, OUTRES, SET, PLDISP, and PLNSOL commands.
78
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
79
10. Choose menu path Material> Exit to remove the Define Material Model Behavior dialog box.
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Auto Numbered> Thru Nodes. The Elements from Nodes picking menu appears. 11. Click on nodes 1 and 2, then click on OK. 12. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Copy> Elements> Auto Numbered. The Copy Elems Auto-Num picking menu appears. 13. Click on Pick All. The Copy Elements (Automatically-Numbered) dialog box appears. 14. Enter 10 for total number of copies and enter 1 for node number increment. 15. Click on OK. The remaining elements appear in the ANSYS Graphics window. 710
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
10. Click on node 11, then click OK. The Apply F/M on Nodes dialog box appears. 11. In the scroll box for Direction of force/mom, scroll to "FY" to select it. 12. Enter -1 for the force/moment value, and click on OK. The force symbol appears in the ANSYS Graphics window.
711
Chapter 7: Buckling Analysis 9. Carefully review the information in the status window, and click on Close.
10. Click on OK in the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to begin the solution. 11. Click on Close in the Information window when the solution is finished.
! ! ! !
Static analysis Calculate prestress effects Fix symmetry ends Unit load at free end
! Buckling analysis ! Use Block Lanczos solution method, extract 1 mode ! Expand 1 mode shape
Section 7.8: Where to Find Other Examples Manual does not present them as step-by-step examples with lengthy data input instructions and printouts. However, most ANSYS users who have at least limited finite element experience should be able to fill in the missing details by reviewing each test case's finite element model and input data with accompanying comments. The ANSYS Verification Manual contains a variety of buckling analysis test cases: VM17 - Snap-Through Buckling of a Hinged Shell VM127 - Buckling of a Bar with Hinged Ends (Line Elements) VM128 - Buckling of a Bar with Hinged Ends (Area Elements)
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
713
714
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
82
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Before each solution, the Newton-Raphson method evaluates the out-of-balance load vector, which is the difference between the restoring forces (the loads corresponding to the element stresses) and the applied loads. The program then performs a linear solution, using the out-of-balance loads, and checks for convergence. If convergence criteria are not satisfied, the out-of-balance load vector is reevaluated, the stiffness matrix is updated, and a new solution is obtained. This iterative procedure continues until the problem converges. A number of convergence-enhancement and recovery features, such as line search, automatic load stepping, and bisection, can be activated to help the problem to converge. If convergence cannot be achieved, then the program attempts to solve with a smaller load increment. In some nonlinear static analyses, if you use the Newton-Raphson method alone, the tangent stiffness matrix may become singular (or non-unique), causing severe convergence difficulties. Such occurrences include nonlinear buckling analyses in which the structure either collapses completely or "snaps through" to another stable configuration. For such situations, you can activate an alternative iteration scheme, the arc-length method, to help avoid bifurcation points and track unloading. The arc-length method causes the Newton-Raphson equilibrium iterations to converge along an arc, thereby often preventing divergence, even when the slope of the load vs. deflection curve becomes zero or negative. This iteration method is represented schematically in Figure 8.4: Traditional Newton-Raphson Method vs. ArcLength Method.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
83
To summarize, a nonlinear analysis is organized into three levels of operation: The "top" level consists of the load steps that you define explicitly over a "time" span (see the discussion of "time" in Chapter 2, Loading in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide). Loads are assumed to vary linearly within load steps (for static analyses). Within each load step, you can direct the program to perform several solutions (substeps or time steps) to apply the load gradually. At each substep, the program will perform a number of equilibrium iterations to obtain a converged solution.
Figure 8.5: Load Steps, Substeps, and Time illustrates a typical load history for a nonlinear analysis. Also see the discussion of load steps, substeps, and equilibrium iterations in Chapter 2, Loading in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
84
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 8.1: What is Structural Nonlinearity? The ANSYS program gives you a number of choices when you designate convergence criteria: you can base convergence checking on forces, moments, displacements, or rotations, or on any combination of these items. Additionally, each item can have a different convergence tolerance value. For multiple-degree-of-freedom problems, you also have a choice of convergence norms. You should almost always employ a force-based (and, when applicable, moment-based) convergence tolerance. Displacement-based (and, when applicable, rotation-based) convergence checking can be added, if desired, but should usually not be used alone.
8.1.2.2. Substeps
When using multiple substeps, you need to achieve a balance between accuracy and economy: more substeps (that is, small time step sizes) usually result in better accuracy, but at a cost of increased run times. ANSYS provides automatic time stepping that is designed for this purpose. Automatic time stepping adjusts the time step size as needed, gaining a better balance between accuracy and economy. Automatic time stepping activates the ANSYS program's bisection feature. Bisection provides a means of automatically recovering from a convergence failure. This feature will cut a time step size in half whenever equilibrium iterations fail to converge and automatically restart from the last converged
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
85
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis substep. If the halved time step again fails to converge, bisection will again cut the time step size and restart, continuing the process until convergence is achieved or until the minimum time step size (specified by you) is reached.
86
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 8.2: Using Geometric Nonlinearities In contrast, large strain analyses account for the stiffness changes that result from changes in an element's shape and orientation. By issuing NLGEOM,ON (GUI path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( : Basic Tab) or Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options), you activate large strain effects in those element types that support this feature. The large strain feature is available in most of the solid elements (including all of the large strain and hyperelastic elements), as well as in most of the shell and beam elements. Large strain effects are not available in the ANSYS Professional program. However, large deflection effects (NLGEOM command) are supported for shell and beam elements in ANSYS Professional, if indicated as such in the ANSYS Elements Reference. The large strain procedure places no theoretical limit on the total rotation or strain experienced by an element. (Certain ANSYS element types will be subject to practical limitations on total strain - see below.) However, the procedure requires that strain increments must be restricted to maintain accuracy. Thus, the total load should be broken into smaller steps.
8.2.1. Stress-Strain
In large strain solutions, all stress-strain input and results will be in terms of true stress and true (or logarithmic) strain. (In one dimension, true strain would be expressed as = ln ( / 0). For small-strain regions of response, true strain and engineering strain are essentially identical.) To convert strain from small (engineering) strain to logarithmic strain, use ln = ln (1 + eng). To convert from engineering stress to true stress, use true = eng (1 + eng). (This stress conversion is valid only for incompressible plasticity stress-strain data.)
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
87
To use stress stiffening in the second category of systems, you must issue PSTRES,ON (GUI path Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options) in your first load step. Large strain and large deflection procedures include initial stress effects as a subset of their theory. For most elements, initial stiffness effects are automatically included when large deformation effects are activated [NLGEOM,ON] (GUI path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( : Basic Tab) or Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options).
Section 8.3: Modeling Material Nonlinearities relationships in terms of a data table. The exact form of these commands varies depending on the type of nonlinear material behavior being defined. The different material behavior options are described briefly below. See Data Tables - Implicit Analysis in the ANSYS Elements Reference for specific details for each material behavior type.
8.3.1.1. Plasticity
Most common engineering materials exhibit a linear stress-strain relationship up to a stress level known as the proportional limit. Beyond this limit, the stress-strain relationship will become nonlinear, but will not necessarily become inelastic. Plastic behavior, characterized by nonrecoverable strain, begins when stresses exceed the material's yield point. Because there is usually little difference between the yield point and the proportional limit, the ANSYS program assumes that these two points are coincident in plasticity analyses (see Figure 8.9: Elastoplastic Stress-Strain Curve). Plasticity is a nonconservative, path-dependent phenomenon. In other words, the sequence in which loads are applied and in which plastic responses occur affects the final solution results. If you anticipate plastic response in your analysis, you should apply loads as a series of small incremental load steps or time steps, so that your model will follow the load-response path as closely as possible. The maximum plastic strain is printed with the substep summary information in your output (Jobname.OUT).
The automatic time stepping feature [AUTOTS] (GUI path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( : Basic Tab) or Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc>Time and Substps) will respond to plasticity after the fact, by reducing the load step size after a load step in which a large number of equilibrium iterations was performed or in which a plastic strain increment greater than 15% was encountered. If too large a step was taken, the program will bisect and resolve using a smaller step size. Other kinds of nonlinear behavior might also occur along with plasticity. In particular, large deflection and large strain geometric nonlinearities will often be associated with plastic material response. If you expect large deformations in your structure, you must activate these effects in your analysis with the NLGEOM command (GUI path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( : Basic Tab) or Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options). For large strain analyses, material stress-strain properties must be input in terms of true stress and logarithmic strain.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
89
See the MPTEMP, MP, TB, TBTEMP, TBDATA, TBLIST, /XRANGE, and TBPLOT command descriptions for more information.
810
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
The Multilinear Kinematic Hardening (KINH and MKIN) options use the Besseling model, also called the sublayer or overlay model, so that the Bauschinger effect is included. KINH is preferred for use over MKIN because it uses Rice's model where the total plastic strains remain constant by scaling the sublayers. KINH allows you to define more stress-strain curves (40 vs. 5), and more points per curve (20 vs. 5). Also, when KINH is used with LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209, you can use TBOPT = 4 (or PLASTIC) to define the stress vs. plastic strain curve. For either option, if you define more than one stress-strain curve for temperature dependent properties, then each curve should contain the same number of points. The assumption is that the corresponding points on the different stressstrain curves represent the temperature dependent yield behavior of a particular sublayer. These options are not recommended for large-strain analyses. You can combine either of these options with the Hill anisotropy option to simulate more complex material behaviors. See Material Model Combinations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.3.2: Material Model Combinations in this chapter for sample input listings of material combinations. Figure 8.10: Kinematic Hardening(b) illustrates typical stressstrain curves for the MKIN option. A typical stress-strain temperature data input using KINH is demonstrated by this example.
TB,KINH,1,2,3 TBTEMP,20.0 TBPT,,0.001,1.0 TBPT,,0.1012,1.2 TBPT,,0.2013,1.3 TBTEMP,40.0 TBPT,,0.008,0.9 TBPT,,0.09088,1.0 TBPT,,0.12926,1.05 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Activate a data table Temperature = 20.0 Strain = 0.001, Stress = 1.0 Strain = 0.1012, Stress = 1.2 Strain = 0.2013, Stress = 1.3 Temperature = 40.0 Strain = 0.008, Stress = 0.9 Strain = 0.09088, Stress = 1.0 Strain = 0.12926, Stress = 1.05
In this example, the third point in the two stress-strain curves defines the temperature-dependent yield behavior of the third sublayer. A typical stress- plastic strain temperature data input using KINH is demonstrated by this example.
TB,KINH,1,2,3,PLASTIC TBTEMP,20.0 TBPT,,0.000,1.0 TBPT,,0.1012,1.2 TBPT,,0.2013,1.3 TBTEMP,40.0 TBPT,,0.008,0.9 TBPT,,0.09088,1.0 TBPT,,0.12926,1.05 ! Activate a data table ! Temperature = 20.0 ! Plastic Strain = 0.0000, ! Plastic Strain = 0.1000, ! Plastic Strain = 0.2000, ! Temperature = 40.0 ! Plastic Strain = 0.0000, ! Plastic Strain = 0.0900, ! Plastic Strain = 0.1290,
Stress = 1.0 Stress = 1.2 Stress = 1.3 Stress = 0.9 Stress = 1.0 Stress = 1.05
In this example, the stress - strain behavior is the same as the previous sample, except now the strain value is the plastic strain. The plastic strain can be converted from total strain as follows:
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
811
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis Plastic Stain = (total strain - stress)/Young's Modulus. A typical stress-strain temperature data input using MKIN is demonstrated by this example.
MPTEMP,1,0,500 ! Define temperature-dependent EX, MP,EX,1,12E6,-8E3 ! as in BKIN example TB,MKIN,1,2 ! Activate a data table TBTEMP,,STRAIN ! Next TBDATA values are strains TBDATA,1,3.67E-3,5E-3,7E-3,10E-3,15E-3 ! Strains for all temps TBTEMP,0.0 ! Temperature = 0.0 TBDATA,1,44E3,50E3,55E3,60E3,65E3 ! Stresses at temperature = 0.0 TBTEMP,500 ! Temperature = 500 TBDATA,1,29.33E3,37E3,40.3E3,43.7E3,47E3 ! Stresses at temperature = 500 /XRANGE,0,0.02 TBPLOT,MKIN,1
Please see the MPTEMP, MP, TB, TBPT, TBTEMP, TBDATA, /XRANGE, and TBPLOT command descriptions for more information. The Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening (CHABOCHE) option uses the Chaboche model, which is a multi-component nonlinear kinematic hardening model that allows you to superpose several kinematic models. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details. Like the BKIN and MKIN options, you can use the CHABOCHE option to simulate monotonic hardening and the Bauschinger effect. This option also allows you to simulate the ratcheting and shakedown effect of materials. By combining the CHABOCHE option with isotropic hardening model options BISO, MISO, and NLISO, you have the further capability of simulating cyclic hardening or softening. You can also combine this option with the Hill anisotropy option to simulate more complex material behaviors. See Material Model Combinations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.3.2: Material Model Combinations in this chapter for sample input listings of material combinations. The model has 1 + 2 x n constants, where n is the number of kinematic models, and is defined by NPTS in the TB command. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details. You define the material constants using the TBTEMP and TBDATA commands. This model is suitable for large strain analysis. The following example is a typical data table with no temperature dependency and one kinematic model:
TB,CHABOCHE,1 TBDATA,1,C1,C2,C3 ! Activate CHABOCHE data table ! Values for constants C1, C2, and C3
The following example illustrates a data table of temperature dependent constants with two kinematic models at two temperature points:
TB,CHABOCHE,1,2,2 TBTEMP,100 TBDATA,1,C11,C12,C13,C14,C15 TBTEMP,200 TBDATA,1,C21,C22,C23,C24,C25 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Activate CHABOCHE data table Define first temperature Values for constants C11, C12, C13, C14, and C15 at first temperature Define second temperature Values for constants C21, C22, C23, C24, and C25 at second temperature
Please see the TB, TBTEMP, and TBDATA command descriptions for more information. The Bilinear Isotropic Hardening (BISO) option uses the von Mises yield criteria coupled with an isotropic work hardening assumption. This option is often preferred for large strain analyses. You can combine BISO with Chaboche, creep, viscoplastic, and Hill anisotropy options to simulate more complex material behaviors. See Material Model Combinations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.3.2: Material Model Combinations in this chapter for sample input listings of material combinations. The Multilinear Isotropic Hardening (MISO) option is like the bilinear isotropic hardening option, except that a multilinear curve is used instead of a bilinear curve. This option is not recommended for cyclic or highly nonproportional load histories in small-strain analyses. It is, however, recommended for large strain analyses. The MISO option can contain up to 20 different temperature curves, with up to 100 different stress-strain points allowed
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
812
Section 8.3: Modeling Material Nonlinearities per curve. Strain points can differ from curve to curve. You can combine this option with nonlinear kinematic hardening (CHABOCHE) for simulating cyclic hardening or softening. You can also combine the MISO option with creep, viscoplastic, and Hill anisotropy options to simulate more complex material behaviors. See Material Model Combinations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.3.2: Material Model Combinations in this chapter for sample input listings of material combinations. The stress-straintemperature curves from the MKIN example would be input for a multilinear isotropic hardening material as follows:
/prep7 MPTEMP,1,0,500 ! Define temperature-dependent EX, MPDATA,EX,1,,14.665E6,12.423e6 MPDATA,PRXY,1,,0.3 TB,MISO,1,2,5 TBTEMP,0.0 TBPT,DEFI,2E-3,29.33E3 TBPT,DEFI,5E-3,50E3 TBPT,DEFI,7E-3,55E3 TBPT,DEFI,10E-3,60E3 TBPT,DEFI,15E-3,65E3 TBTEMP,500 TBPT,DEFI,2.2E-3,27.33E3 TBPT,DEFI,5E-3,37E3 TBPT,DEFI,7E-3,40.3E3 TBPT,DEFI,10E-3,43.7E3 TBPT,DEFI,15E-3,47E3 /XRANGE,0,0.02 TBPLOT,MISO,1 ! Activate a data table ! Temperature = 0.0 ! Strain, stress at temperature = 0
See the MPTEMP, MP, TB, TBTEMP, TBPT, /XRANGE, and TBPLOT command descriptions for more information. The Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening (NLISO) option is based on the Voce hardening law (see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details). The NLISO option is a variation of BISO where an exponential saturation hardening term is appended to the linear term (see Figure 8.12: NLISO Stress-Strain Curve).
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
813
The advantage of this model is that the material behavior is defined as a specified function which has four material constants that you define through the TBDATA command. You can obtain the material constants by fitting material tension stress-strain curves. Unlike MISO, there is no need to be concerned about how to appropriately define the pairs of the material stress-strain points. However, this model is only applicable to the tensile curve like the one shown in Figure 8.12: NLISO Stress-Strain Curve. This option is suitable for large strain analyses. You can combine NLISO with Chaboche, creep, viscoplastic, and Hill anisotropy options to simulate more complex material behaviors. See Material Model Combinations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.3.2: Material Model Combinations in this chapter for sample input listings of material combinations. The following example illustrates a data table of temperature dependent constants at two temperature points:
TB,NLISO,1 TBTEMP,100 TBDATA,1,C11,C12,C13,C14 TBTEMP,200 TBDATA,1,C21,C22,C23,C24 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Activate NLISO data table Define first temperature Values for constants C11, C12, C13, C14 at first temperature Define second temperature Values for constants C21, C22, C23, C24 at second temperature
Please see the TB, TBTEMP, and TBDATA command descriptions for more information. The Anisotropic (ANISO) option allows for different bilinear stress-strain behavior in the material x, y, and z directions as well as different behavior in tension, compression, and shear. This option is applicable to metals that have undergone some previous deformation (such as rolling). It is not recommended for cyclic or highly nonproportional load histories since work hardening is assumed. The yield stresses and slopes are not totally independent (see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details).
814
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 8.3: Modeling Material Nonlinearities To define anisotropic material plasticity, use MP commands (Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Change Mat Props) to define the elastic moduli (EX, EY, EZ, NUXY, NUYZ, and NUXZ). Then, issue the TB command [TB,ANISO] followed by TBDATA commands to define the yield points and tangent moduli. (See Nonlinear StressStrain Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference for more information.) The Hill Anisotropy (HILL) option, when combined with other material options simulates plasticity, viscoplasticity, and creep - all using the Hill potential. See Material Model Combinations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.3.2: Material Model Combinations in this chapter for sample input listings of material combinations. The Hill potential may only be used with the following elements: PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209. The Drucker-Prager (DP) option is applicable to granular (frictional) material such as soils, rock, and concrete, and uses the outer cone approximation to the Mohr-Coulomb law.
MP,EX,1,5000 MP,NUXY,1,0.27 TB,DP,1 TBDATA,1,2.9,32,0
! Cohesion = 2.9 (use consistent units), ! Angle of internal friction = 32 degrees, ! Dilatancy angle = 0 degrees
See the MP, TB, and TBDATA command descriptions for more information. The Cast Iron (CAST, UNIAXIAL) option assumes a modified von Mises yield surface, which consists of the von Mises cylinder in compression and a Rankine cube in tension. It has different yield strengths, flows, and hardenings in tension and compression. Elastic behavior is isotropic, and is the same in tension and compression. The TB,CAST command is used to input the plastic Poisson's ration in tension, which can be temperature dependent. Use the TB,UNIAXIAL command to enter the yield and hardening in tension and compression. Note Cast Iron is intended for monotonic loading only and cannot be used with any other material model.
TB,CAST,1,,,ISOTROPIC TBDATA,1,0.04 TB,UNIAXIAL,1,1,5,TENSION TBTEMP,10 TBPT,,0.550E-03,0.813E+04 TBPT,,0.100E-02,0.131E+05 TBPT,,0.250E-02,0.241E+05 TBPT,,0.350E-02,0.288E+05 TBPT,,0.450E-02,0.322E+05 TB,UNIAXIAL,1,1,5,COMPRESSION TBTEMP,10 TBPT,,0.203E-02,0.300E+05 TBPT,,0.500E-02,0.500E+05 TBPT,,0.800E-02,0.581E+05 TBPT,,0.110E-01,0.656E+05 TBPT,,0.140E-01,0.700E+05
Figure 8.13: Cast Iron Plasticity illustrates the idealized response of gray cast iron in tension and compression.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
815
Tension
816
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
If you use state variables in the USERMAT subroutine, you must first define the number of state variables using the TB,STATE command. You then use the TBDATA command to initialize the value of the state variables, as shown in the following example:
TB,STATE,1,,4, TBDATA,1,C1,C2,C3,C4, ! Define material 1, which ! has 4 state variables. ! Initialize the 4 state variables.
You cannot use TB,STATE in the USERPL subroutine. See the TB, and TBDATA command descriptions for more information.
8.3.1.4. Hyperelasticity
A material is said to be hyperelastic if there exists an elastic potential function (or strain energy density function), which is a scalar function of one of the strain or deformation tensors, whose derivative with respect to a strain component determines the corresponding stress component. Hyperelasticity can be used to analyze rubber-like materials (elastomers) that undergo large strains and displacements with small volume changes (nearly incompressible materials). Large strain theory is required [NLGEOM,ON]. A representative hyperelastic structure (a balloon seal) is shown in Figure 8.14: Hyperelastic Structure.
There are two types of elements suitable for simulating hyperelastic materials: the hyperelastic elements (HYPER56, HYPER58, HYPER74, HYPER158), and all of the 18x family of elements except the link and beam elements (SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209). For further details on the use of hyperelastic elements, and on mixed formulation of the 18x solid elements, see Mixed u-P Formulation Elements in the ANSYS Elements Reference. The material response in ANSYS hyperelastic models is always assumed to be isotropic and isothermal. Because of this assumption, the strain energy potentials are expressed in terms of strain invariants. Unless indicated otherwise, the hyperelastic materials are also assumed to be nearly or purely incompressible. Material thermal expansion is also assumed to be isotropic. ANSYS supports several options of strain energy potentials for the simulation of incompressible or nearly incompressible hyperelastic materials. All options are applicable to elements SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185,
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
817
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209. Access these options through the TBOPT argument of TB,HYPER. One of the options, the Mooney-Rivlin option, is also applicable to elements HYPER56, HYPER58, HYPER74, HYPER158, and explicit dynamics elements PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164, and SOLID168. To access the MooneyRivlin option for these elements, use TB,MOONEY. ANSYS provides tools to help you determine the coefficients for all of the hyperelastic options defined by TB,HYPER. The TBFT command allows you to compare your experimental data with existing material data curves and visually fit your curve for use in the TB command. All of the TBFT command capability is available via either batch or interactive (GUI) mode. See Material Curve Fitting (also in this manual) for more information. Each of the hyperelastic options is presented in the following sections.
Refer to Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Material (TB,HYPER) in the ANSYS Elements Reference for a description of the material constants required for this option.
Compared to the other options, the Ogden option usually provides the best approximation to a solution at larger strain levels. The applicable strain level can be up to 700%. A higher parameter value can provide a better fit to the exact solution. It may however cause numerical difficulties in fitting the material constants, and it requires enough data to cover the whole range of deformation for which you may be interested. For these reasons, a high parameter value is not recommended. The following example input listing shows a typical use of the Ogden option with 2 parameters:
TB,HYPER,1,,2,OGDEN TBDATA,1,0.326996 !Activate 2 parameter Ogden data table !Define 1
818
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Refer to Ogden Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference for a description of the material constants required for this option.
Refer to Neo-Hookean Hyperelastic Material in the ANSYS Elements Reference for a description of the material constants required for this option.
Refer to Arruda-Boyce Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference for a description of the material constants required for this option.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
819
Refer to Gent Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference for a description of the material constants required for this option.
Refer to Yeoh Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference for a description of the material constants required for this option.
Refer to Blatz-Ko Foam Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference for a description of the material constants required for this option.
Section 8.3: Modeling Material Nonlinearities The following example input listing shows a typical use of the Ogden foam option with 2 parameters:
TB,HYPER,1,,2,FOAM TBDATA,1,1.85 TBDATA,2,4.5 TBDATA,3,-9.20 TBDATA,4,-4.5 TBDATA,5,0.92 TBDATA,6,0.92 !Activate 2 parameter Ogden foam data table !Define 1 !Define 1 !Define 2 !Define 2 !Define first compressibility parameter !Define second compressibility parameter
Refer to Ogden Compressible Foam Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference for a description of the material constants required for this option.
Refer to Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Material Constants (TB,MOONEY) in the ANSYS Elements Reference for a description of the constants required as input for this option. The Mooney-Rivlin constants for any given hyperelastic material are not generally available in the open literature. Consequently, you can use the *MOONEY command to automatically determine a set of Mooney-Rivlin constants from a set of known experimental test data. Sometimes the manufacturer of the material will be able to supply some or all of the needed test data, but you might find that you need to obtain more data from a testing laboratory. Hyperelastic material behavior is much more complicated than typical metallic material behavior. Hyperelastic stress-strain relationships usually differ significantly for tension, compression, and shear modes of deformation. Therefore, using *MOONEY to generate a generally applicable hyperelastic material model will require test data
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
821
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis that encompasses all possible modes of deformation: tension, compression, and shear. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for a discussion of hyperelastic test methods and equivalent deformation modes. If an incomplete set of data is provided (for instance, if only uniaxial tension data are available), the program can still determine usable hyperelastic material properties. However, in such cases the deformations experienced in the model should be limited to be of the same nature as those experienced in the tests. In other words, the test data should represent all modes of deformation and ranges of response (strain) that will be experienced in the model. This advice is simply common sense - if you do not know how the material behaves in a certain mode of deformation or range of strain, you cannot accurately predict the behavior of a part that experiences such deformations or strains. For example, if all you have is uniaxial tension data, do not model a part that experiences significant shear deformations. If your test data extend only from 0% to 100% strain, do not model a part that experiences 150% strain. If, after reviewing your analysis, you discover that the available test data do not adequately characterize the model's response, get more test data! You can use the *MOONEY command to automatically determine a set of Mooney-Rivlin constants from experimental test data. ANSYS determines the constants and stores them in the database, and in an array parameter. Additionally, it writes an ASCII file (Jobname.TB) that records the Mooney-Rivlin constants in the form of a series of TB and TBDATA commands. Once such a file exists, you can use it in future analyses to define that same material's Mooney-Rivlin constants - you do not need to use the *MOONEY command every time to regenerate these constants. Determining and Applying Mooney-Rivlin Constants The procedure for determining and applying Mooney-Rivlin constants consists of five main steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Dimension all arrays that will be used for data input, Mooney-Rivlin constant storage, and calculated stress-strain evaluation. Fill the input-data arrays with engineering stress and strain test data. Determine the Mooney-Rivlin constants automatically. Evaluate the quality of the automatically determined Mooney-Rivlin constants. Apply the Mooney-Rivlin constants in your analysis.
Step 1: Dimension the Arrays Command(s): *DIM GUI: Utility Menu> Parameters> Array Parameters> Define/Edit You must dimension arrays before using the *MOONEY command. In most cases, you will need to dimension at least six different arrays. (You can give these arrays any valid parameter names, but for convenience, we will use specific array names, such as STRAIN, STRESS, and so on, in our discussion. You can substitute any other valid parameter names that you like.) The arrays are STRAIN, STRESS, CONST, CALC, SORTSN, and SORTSS. STRAIN Array: An array of engineering strain data from mechanical material tests, arranged in three columns: Column 1: uniaxial tension and/or compression data Column 2: equibiaxial tension and/or compression data Column 3: shear data (planar tension and/or compression)
This array has the dimensions N x 3, where N equals the maximum number of data points in any one of the three columns. For example, if you have 20 data points from uniaxial tension/compression tests and 10 data points from shear tests, N = 20. This array must always be N x 3, even if fewer than three types of test data are available. 822
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 8.3: Modeling Material Nonlinearities Although it might be preferable to input the data points in order of ascending strain values, it is not necessary to do so. STRESS Array: An array of engineering stress data from mechanical material tests input stress-data array, also of dimension N x 3. You must input stress data points in the same order as the corresponding strain-data input. CONST Array: A Mooney-Rivlin constant array of dimension M x 1, where M equals the desired number of Mooney-Rivlin constants. (M must be either 2, 5, or 9; any other value will produce an error message when *MOONEY is invoked.) You actually tell the program in this dimensioning operation how many Mooney-Rivlin constants you want. The *MOONEY command later reads the dimensions of this array to determine how many Mooney-Rivlin constants to generate, and then writes the values of those constants to this array. How many Mooney-Rivlin constants should you use? As a rule of thumb, you should have at least twice as many data points (N, as defined above) as the desired number of Mooney-Rivlin constants. Using more terms will usually improve the statistical quality of your curve fit (that is, it will probably be more tightly fitted through the data points), but the overall shape of the curve might be worse than that obtained with fewer terms. As a practical matter, you should probably try two-term, five-term, and nine-term functions in sequence, and examine the resulting stress-strain curves to decide which function gives you the best combination of tight fit and satisfactory curve shape.
CALC Array: An output stress-data array of dimension N x 3 (where N is as described above), in which sorted calculated stress values are stored. These stress values will be sorted into the same order as their corresponding sorted strain values (which will be sorted into ascending order). SORTSN Array: An array of dimension N x 3 in which sorted input strain data are stored. SORTSS Array: An array of dimension N x 3 in which sorted input stress data are stored. For example, if your test data contained up to 20 data points for any one test type, and if you wanted to generate a five-term set of Mooney-Rivlin constants, you might issue the following commands to dimension the necessary arrays (remember that you can substitute any valid parameter names for the ones shown here):
*DIM,STRAIN,,20,3 *DIM,STRESS,,20,3 *DIM,CONST,,5,1 *DIM,CALC,,20,3 ! ! ! ! Dim. Dim. Dim. Dim. array array array array (STRAIN) for 20 input strain-data points (STRESS) for input stress data (20 pts.) (CONST) for 5-term M-R constants (CALC) for sorted calculated stresses
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
823
See the *DIM command description for more information. Step 2: Fill the Input-Data Arrays Once you have dimensioned your arrays, you can then fill the STRAIN and STRESS arrays with test data using the *SET command (GUI path Utility Menu> Parameters> Scalar Parameters). (Again, remember that you can give these arrays any valid parameter names; particular array names are used here only for the convenience of this discussion.) Note The *MOONEY command interprets all input stress and strain data as engineering stress and engineering strain. These arrays are of dimension N x 3, with each column of the arrays containing data from one type of test, in this order: First column: Uniaxial tension and/or uniaxial compression Second column: Equibiaxial tension and/or equibiaxial compression Third column: Shear (planar tension or compression)
Note that these do not have a 1:1 relationship with the modes of deformation and their equivalencies. The first mode of deformation, uniaxial tension, has equibiaxial compression as its equivalency, but the first column of the array contains data from uniaxial tension and/or uniaxial compression. Likewise, the second mode of deformation, equibiaxial tension, has uniaxial compression as its equivalency, but the second column of the array contains data from equibiaxial tension and/or equibiaxial compression.
If fewer than three types of tests are used, you must leave the missing columns blank. Schematically, data input might be represented as shown in Figure 8.16: Data Locations in Stress and Strain Input Arrays.
824
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Consider a case in which data from uniaxial tension and shear tests are available. The commands to store the strain and stress data in the input-data arrays could look something like this (of course, the arrays can have any valid array names, and the number of data points represented by N1 and N2 in this example can be any integral numbers):
! Uniaxial Tension Data *SET,STRAIN(1,1), ... ! *SET,STRAIN(11,1),... ! *SET,STRESS(1,1), ... ! *SET,STRESS(11,1),... ! ! Shear Data *SET,STRAIN(1,3), ... ! *SET,STRESS(1,3), ... ! First 10 strain data points Strain data points 11 through N1 (if N1<21) First 10 stress data points Stress data points 11 through N1 Strain data points 1 through N2 (if N2<11) Stress data points 1 through N2
See the *SET command description for more information. Step 3: Determine the Mooney-Rivlin Constants To generate Mooney-Rivlin constants automatically, first use the TB command, with Lab = MOONEY and TBOPT = 1. Next, issue the *MOONEY command, inserting the appropriate names of arrays that you have already dimensioned (particular names have been used in this example for convenience of discussion only; you can use any valid parameter names):
TB,MOONEY,MAT,NTEMP,,1 *MOONEY,STRAIN(1,1),STRESS(1,1),,CONST(1),CALC(1),SORTSN(1), SORTSS(1),Fname,Ext
The program automatically determines the Mooney-Rivlin constants, stores them in the database and in the CONST array (which can have any valid parameter name), and writes a series of TB and TBDATA commands in the ASCII file Fname.Ext (default file name = Jobname.TB). Uniaxial equations will be used for the data in column 1, equibiaxial equations for the data in column 2, and planar (pure shear) equations for the data in column 3. Note All the laboratory test data entered in the STRAIN and STRESS arrays will be used to determine the Mooney-Rivlin hyperelastic material constants. Step 4: Evaluate the Quality of the Mooney-Rivlin Constants
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
825
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis In your printout (file Jobname.OUT), examine the "ROOT-MEAN-SQUARE ERROR (PERCENTAGE)" and the "COEFFICIENT OF DETERMINATION." These two values give you a statistical measure of how well your calculated stress-strain curve fits the experimental data points. The root-mean-square error, which is expressed as a percentage (that is, a value of 2.5 means 2.5 %), should be "close" to zero. The coefficient of determination will be less than 1.0, but should be "close" to 1.0 (that is, typically 0.99 or better). In addition, you should use the *EVAL and *VPLOT commands (GUI paths Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Mooney-Rivlin> Evaluate Const and Utility Menu> Plot> Array Parameters) to graph the input and calculated stress-strain curves, in order to obtain a visual check on how well the calculated curve matches the experimental data. In comparing these curves, you should compare calculated values against test data that represent the same mode of deformation. That is, you should compare the shape of the calculated uniaxial tension curve (EVPARM = 1 in the *EVAL command) against uniaxial tension data only (column 1 of the sorted STRAIN and STRESS arrays). Similarly, you should compare the calculated uniaxial compression curve against the uniaxial compression data only, and the calculated shear curve against the shear data only. When you graph your calculated stress-strain curves, you can extend the displayed curve into regions that were not defined by the experimental data. Graphing your curves over such an extended range can help you qualitatively understand your model's behavior if its response ever happens to exceed the range of experimental strain. However, realize that if you extend a displayed curve into a region that represents a different mode of deformation, then that portion of the display will be meaningless. For instance, you should graph a uniaxial tension curve only in regions of positive strain, and a uniaxial compression curve only in regions of compressive strain. Remember that good practice usually requires that the test data should represent all modes of deformation and ranges of response (strain) experienced by your model. The *MOONEY command automatically writes the Mooney-Rivlin constants to the CONST array. Because *EVAL reads these same constants from this CONST array, you can readily do a *EVAL following a *MOONEY operation in the same ANSYS session. If you already have the Mooney-Rivlin constants (and thus will not be doing a *MOONEY calculation), you must first dimension [*DIM]and fill the CONST array with the Mooney-Rivlin constants before you can evaluate the curves [*EVAL]. You can fill this array fairly easily, given that the CONST array is either 1 x 2, 1 x 5, or 1 x 9 at most. You could also add the *DIM and array-filling commands to your archived Jobname.TB file to make this operation more convenient. To check your curve's shape, you must dimension [*DIM] two more table array vectors (identified as XVAL and ECALC in the *EVAL command description; any valid parameter names may be used). Each of these table array vectors should have dimension P, where P is the number of points you want to use to plot your curve. (Typically, you will want to make P fairly large in order to generate a very smooth curve.) Next, specify the mode of deformation, define an extended range of strain, and fill the arrays with engineering strain and calculated engineering stress data, using the *EVAL command. Finally, graph [*VPLOT] the calculated stress-strain curve. The following example demonstrates how to graph a calculated curve for the uniaxial compression deformation mode:
! Dimension strain and stress arrays for the calculated curve: ! (Any valid parameter names can be used) *DIM,XVAL,TABLE,1000 *DIM,ECALC,TABLE,1000 ! Specify the mode of deformation (EVPARM), define the strain range ! (XMIN,XMAX), and use the M-R constants (CONST) to fill the strain (XVAL) ! and stress (ECALC) arrays with calculated data: *EVAL,1,2,CONST(1),XMIN,XMAX,XVAL(1),ECALC(1) ! Label the graph axes: /AXLAB,X,Engineering Strain /AXLAB,Y,Engineering Stress ! Plot the calculated uniaxial compression curve: *VPLOT,XVAL(1),ECALC(1)
See the *DIM, *EVAL, /AXLAB, and *VPLOT command descriptions for more information.
826
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Step 5: Using the Mooney-Rivlin Constants If the curve-fit statistics and the overall curve shape are satisfactory, then you can proceed to use the generated Mooney-Rivlin material properties in your analysis. (The *MOONEY command will have stored these constants in the database.) In future analyses using the same material model, you can simply read in [/INPUT] the file Jobname.TB to load the constants into your new database. However, do not forget to define a value for Poisson's ratio [MP,NUXY,...]. Always remember to examine your analysis results carefully to determine whether or not your model's modes of deformation and values of maximum strain were properly represented by the original test data. Analyses involving hyperelastic elements are sometimes very sensitive to material property specification and load application. Some values of Mooney-Rivlin constants result in very stable stiffness matrices whereas others do not. Therefore, choose constants with caution and experiment with slightly different values. ANSYS provides internal stability checks for hyperelastic materials based on the Mooney-Rivlin constants that you enter. These checks occur at two levels: The first stability check occurs before the analysis. The check is for six typical stress paths (uniaxial tension and compression, equibiaxial tension and compression, and planar tension and compression), and covers a stretch ratio ranging from 0.1 to 10. If the material is not stable over the range, a message appears that states the critical values of the nominal strains where the material first becomes unstable, and lists the Mooney-Rivlin constants that you entered. If the material is stable over the range, you will not see any message or indication. The sample warning message below lists the nominal strains where Material 1 loses stability, then lists the constants that were entered for this example:
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
827
Mooney-Rivlin constants of the hyperelastic material are: 0.170E+02, 0.000E+00, 0.000E+00, 0.000E+00, 0.000E+00, 0.000E+00, 0.150E+03 0.000E+00 0.000E+00
For the hyperelastic elements with mixed u-P formulation (HYPER56, HYPER58, HYPER74, and HYPER158), you can also have ANSYS perform a stability check during an analysis by setting KEYOPT(8) = 1. For each equilibrium iteration, the program checks every Gauss point in the problem for stability violations. If the problem fails the stability check, you will see a message in the solution history section of the ANSYS Output window reporting the total number of Gauss points that were unstable for that iteration. You will not see any messages if the problem passes the check. The sample message below shows that, during an analysis, ANSYS detected 3 Gauss points that exceeded the material stability limit:
DISP CONVERGENCE VALUE = 22.81 CRITERION= 0.5000 EQUIL ITER 1 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= 10.00 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.5018E+07 CRITERION= 0.1917E+05 >>> 3 Gauss points have exceeded the material stability limit
For elements that contain at least one unstable Gauss point, the instability indicator is set to 1 and stored in the result file as an item in the SMISC record. You can plot the region of instability in POST1 by plotting this SMISC record identified as STFLAG for the element. The SMISC number for STFLAG differs for some of the elements. See the appropriate table for the SMISC item that corresponds to instability indicator STFLAG, for the particular element of interest: HYPER56 Item and Sequence Numbers for ETABLE and ESOL Commands, HYPER58 Item and Sequence Numbers for ETABLE and ESOL Commands, HYPER74 Item and Sequence Numbers for ETABLE and ESOL Commands, HYPER158 Item and Sequence Numbers for ETABLE and ESOL Commands. You should be aware that even though a material failing a stability check is often an indication of convergence difficulty, it does not necessarily mean that your solution is invalid once the material enters the unstable region. The material stability check is simply a tool to help you diagnose the problem when the solution fails to converge. For nearly incompressible materials with Poisson's ratio greater than 0.49, we recommend that you use the hyperelastic elements with mixed u-P formulation (HYPER56, HYPER58, HYPER74, and HYPER158). Note The element types HYPER84 and HYPER86 are intended primarily for modeling compressible, foam-like elastomers, using a Blatz-Ko function to describe the material properties. Select the Blatz-Ko option by setting KEYOPT(2) = 1 for these elements, then use MP commands to enter appropriate values for EX and NUXY to define the initial material shear modulus. An incompressible hyperelastic material option is also available for HYPER84 and HYPER86, but it is limited to two-term Mooney-Rivlin only. In general, it is recommended that you use HYPER56, HYPER58, HYPER74, or HYPER158 (not HYPER84 or HYPER86) for all incompressible hyperelastic materials. Problems using hyperelastic elements can be sensitive to the rate of load application. In most instances, load application should be slow so as not to over-distort elements in the converging sequence. Each problem may be unique and require special consideration. Bifurcation of the solution, indicating that two or more different geometric configurations have the same minimum potential energy, may occur at various times during the
828
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 8.3: Modeling Material Nonlinearities loading history. Automatic time stepping with bisection [AUTOTS,ON] is often effective in overcoming these difficulties.
8.3.1.5. Creep
Creep is a rate dependent material nonlinearity in which the material continues to deform under a constant load. Conversely, if a displacement is imposed, the reaction force (and stresses) will diminish over time (stress relaxation; see Figure 8.18: Stress Relaxation and Creep(a)). The three stages of creep are shown in Figure 8.18: Stress Relaxation and Creep(b). The ANSYS program has the capability of modeling the first two stages (primary and secondary). The tertiary stage is usually not analyzed since it implies impending failure.
Creep is important in high temperature stress analyses, such as for nuclear reactors. For example, suppose you apply a preload to some part in a nuclear reactor to keep adjacent parts from moving. Over a period of time at high temperature, the preload would decrease (stress relaxation) and potentially let the adjacent parts move. Creep can also be significant for some materials such as prestressed concrete. Typically, the creep deformation is permanent. ANSYS analyzes creep using two time integration methods. Both are applicable to static or transient analyses.The implicit creep method is robust, fast, accurate, and recommended for general use. It can handle temperature dependent creep constants, as well as simultaneous coupling with isotropic hardening plasticity models. The explicit creep method is useful for cases where very small time steps are required. Creep constants cannot be dependent on temperature. Coupling with other plastic models is available by superposition only. Note The terms implicit and explicit as applied to creep, have no relationship to explicit dynamics, or any elements referred to as explicit elements. The implicit creep method supports the following elements: PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209. The explicit creep method supports the following elements: LINK1, PLANE2, LINK8, PIPE20, BEAM23, BEAM24, PLANE42, SHELL43, SOLID45, SHELL51, PIPE60, SOLID62, SOLID65, PLANE82, SOLID92, and SOLID95. The creep strain rate may be a function of stress, strain, temperature, and neutron flux level. Libraries of creep strain rate equations are built into the ANSYS program for primary, secondary, and irradiation induced creep. (See Creep Equations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for discussions of, and input procedures for, these various creep equations.) Some equations require specific units. In particular, for the explicit creep option, temperatures used in the creep equations should be based on an absolute scale.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
829
You can input other creep expressions using the user programmable feature and setting TBOPT = 100. You can define the number of state variables using the TB command with Lab = STATE. The following example shows how five state variables are defined.
TB,STATE,1,,5
You can simultaneously model creep [TB,CREEP] and isotropic, bilinear kinematic, and Hill anisotropy options to simulate more complex material behaviors. See Material Model Combinations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.3.2: Material Model Combinations in this chapter for sample input listings of material combinations. To perform an implicit creep analysis, you must also issue the solution RATE command, with Option = ON (or 1). The following example shows a procedure for a time hardening creep analysis (See Figure 8.19: Time Hardening Creep Analysis).
The user applied mechanical loading in the first load step, and turned the RATE command OFF to bypass the creep strain effect. Since the time period in this load step will affect the total time thereafter, the time period for this load step should be small. For this example, the user specified a value of 1.0E-8 seconds. The second load step is a creep analysis. The RATE command must be turned ON. Here the mechanical loading was kept constant, and the material creeps as time increases.
/SOLU RATE,OFF TIME,1.0E-8 !First load step, apply mechanical loading !Creep analysis turned off !Time period set to a very small value
830
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
The RATE command works only when modeling implicit creep with either von Mises or Hill potentials. When modeling implicit creep with von Mises potential, you can use the RATE command with the following elements: LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209. When modeling anisotropic creep (TB,CREEP with TB,HILL), you can use the RATE command with the following elements: PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209. For most materials, the creep strain rate changes significantly at an early stage. Because of this, a general recommendation is to use a small initial incremental time step, then specify a large maximum incremental time step by using solution command DELTIM or NSUBST. For implicit creep, you may need to examine the effect of the time increment on the results carefully because ANSYS does not enforce any creep ratio control by default. You can always enforce a creep limit ratio using the creep ratio control option in commands CRPLIM or CUTCONTROL,CRPLIMIT. A recommended value for a creep limit ratio ranges from 1 to 10. The ratio may vary with materials so your decision on the best value to use should be based on your own experimentation to gain the required performance and accuracy. For larger analyses, a suggestion is to first perform a time increment convergence analysis on a simple small size test. ANSYS provides tools to help you determine the coefficients for all of the implicit creep options defined in TB,CREEP. The TBFT command allows you to compare your experimental data with existing material data curves and visually fit your curve for use in the TB command. All of the TBFT command capability is available via either batch or interactive (GUI) mode. See Material Curve Fitting (also in this manual) for more information.
For the explicit creep method, you can incorporate other creep expressions into the program by using User Programmable Features (see the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features). For highly nonlinear creep strain vs. time curves, a small time step must be used with the explicit creep method. Creep strains are not computed if the time step is less than 1.0e-6. A creep time step optimization procedure is available [AUTOTS and CRPLIM] for automatically adjusting the time step as appropriate.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
831
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis three distinct phases: an austenite phase (linear elastic), a martensite phase (also linear elastic), and the transition phase between these two.
Use the MP command to input the linear elastic behavior of the austenite phase, and the TB,SMA command to input the behavior of the transition and martensite phases. Use the TBDATA command to enter the specifics (data sets) of the alloy material. You can enter up to six sets of data. SMAs can be specified for the following elements: PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, and SOLSH190. A typical ANSYS input listing (fragment) will look similar to this:
MP,EX,1,60.0E3 MP,NUXY,1.0.3 TB,SMA,1,2 TBTEMP,10 TBDATA,1,520.0,600.0,300.0,200.0,0.07,0.12 TBDATA,7,5.0E4 TBTEMP,20 TBDATA,1,420.0,540.0,300.0,200.0,0.10,0.15 TBDATA,7,4.0E3 ! Define austenite elastic properties ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Define second starting temp ! Define SMA parameters ! Define material 1 as SMA, with two temperatures Define first starting temp Define SMA parameters
832
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
8.3.1.7. Viscoplasticity
Viscoplasticity is a time-dependent plasticity phenomenon, where the development of the plastic strains are dependent on the rate of loading. The primary applications are high-temperature metal forming processes such as rolling and deep drawing, which involve large plastic strains and displacements with small elastic strains (see Figure 8.21: Viscoplastic Behavior in a Rolling Operation). The plastic strains are typically very large (for example, 50% or greater), requiring large strain theory [NLGEOM,ON]. Viscoplasticity is modeled with element types VISCO106, VISCO107, and VISCO108, using Anand's model for material properties as described in Nonlinear Stress-Strain Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Viscoplasticity is defined by unifying plasticity and creep via a set of flow and evolutionary equations. A constraint equation is used to preserve volume in the plastic region. The Rate-Dependent Plasticity (Viscoplasticity) or TB,RATE option allows you to introduce the strain rate effect in material models to simulate the time-dependent response of materials. Two material options are available, the Perzyna model and the Peirce model (see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details). In contrast to other rate-dependent material options in ANSYS such as Creep or Anand's model, the Perzyna and Peirce models also include a yield surface. The plasticity and thus the strain rate hardening effect are active only after plastic yielding. You must use the models in combination with the BISO, MISO, or NLISO material options to simulate viscoplasticity. Further, you can simulate anisotropic viscoplasticity by also combining the HILL option. See Material Model Combinations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.3.2: Material Model Combinations in this chapter for sample input listings of material combinations. For isotropic hardening, the intent is for simulating the strain rate hardening of materials rather than softening. This option is also suitable for large strain analysis, and is applicable to the following elements: PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209. Some typical applications of these material options are metal forming and micro-electromechanical systems (MEMS).
8.3.1.8. Viscoelasticity
Viscoelasticity is similar to creep, but part of the deformation is removed when the loading is taken off. A common viscoelastic material is glass. Some plastics are also considered to be viscoelastic. One type of viscoelastic response is illustrated in Figure 8.22: Viscoelastic Behavior (Maxwell Model).
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
833
Viscoelasticity is modeled with element types VISCO88 and VISCO89 for small deformation viscoelasticity and LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209 for small and large deformation viscoelasticity. You must input material properties using the TB family of commands. For SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209, the underlying elasticity is specified by either the MP command (hypoelasticity) or by the TB,HYPER command (hyperelasticity). For LINK180, BEAM188, and BEAM189, the underlying elasticity is specified using the MP command (hypoelasticity) only. The elasticity constants correspond to those of the fast load limit. Use the TB,PRONY and TB,SHIFT commands to input the relaxation property (see the TB command description for more information).
!Small Strain Viscoelasticity mp,ex,1,20.0E5 !elastic properties mp,nuxy,1,0.3 tb,prony,1,,2,shear !define viscosity parameters (shear) tbdata,1,0.5,2.0,0.25,4.0 tb,prony,1,,2,bulk !define viscosity parameters (bulk) tbdata,1,0.5,2.0,0.25,4.0 !Large Strain Viscoelasticity tb,hyper,1,,,moon !elastic properties tbdata,1,38.462E4,,1.2E-6 tb,prony,1,,1,shear !define viscosity parameters tbdata,1,0.5,2.0 tb,prony,1,,1,bulk !define viscosity parameters tbdata,1,0.5,2.0
See Viscoelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference and the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details about how to input viscoelastic material properties using the TB family of commands. ANSYS provides tools to help you determine the coefficients for all of the viscoelastic options defined by TB,PRONY. The TBFT command allows you to compare your experimental data with existing material data curves and visually fit your curve for use in the TB command. All of the TBFT command capability is available via either batch or interactive (GUI) mode. See Material Curve Fitting (also in this manual) for more information.
8.3.1.9. Swelling
Certain materials respond to neutron flux by enlarging volumetrically, or swelling. In order to include swelling effects, you must write your own swelling subroutine, USERSW. (See the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for a discussion of User-Programmable Features.) Swelling Equations in the ANSYS Elements Reference discusses how to use the TB family of commands to input constants for the swelling equations. Swelling can also be related to other phenomena, such as moisture content. The ANSYS commands for nuclear swelling can be used analogously to define swelling due to other causes.
834
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
! CHABOCHE TABLE
! BISO TABLE
For information on the BISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the CHAB option, see Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the CHAB option, see Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
TB,CHAB,1,3,5 ! CHABOCHE TABLE TBTEMP,20,1 ! THIS EXAMPLE TEMPERATURE DEPENDENT TBDATA,1,500,20000,100,40000,200,10000 TBDATA,7,1000,200,100,100,0 TBTEMP,40,2
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
835
For information on the NLISO option, see Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the CHAB option, see Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! BISO TABLE
! RATE TABLE
For information on the BISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the RATE option, see Rate-Dependent Viscoplastic Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.7: Viscoplasticity in this chapter.
! MISO TABLE
! RATE TABLE
For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the RATE option, see Rate-Dependent Viscoplastic Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.7: Viscoplasticity in this chapter.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
836
! NLISO TABLE
! RATE TABLE
For information on the NLISO option, see Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the RATE option, see Rate-Dependent Viscoplastic Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.7: Viscoplasticity in this chapter.
! BISO TABLE
For information on the BISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.5.1: Implicit Creep Procedure in this chapter.
! MISO TABLE
For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
837
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis For information on the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.5.1: Implicit Creep Procedure in this chapter.
! NLISO TABLE
For information on the NLISO option, see Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.5.1: Implicit Creep Procedure in this chapter.
! BKIN TABLE
! CREEP TABLE
For information on the BKIN option, see Bilinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.5.1: Implicit Creep Procedure in this chapter.
TB,HILL,1,2 ! HILL TABLE TBTEMP,100 TBDATA,1,1,1.0402,1.24897,1.07895,1,1 TBTEMP,200 TBDATA,1,0.9,0.94,1.124,0.97,0.9,0.9 TB,BISO,1,2 TBTEMP,100 TBDATA,1,461.0,374.586 TBTEMP,200 TBDATA,1,400.0,325.0 ! BISO TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
838
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 8.3: Modeling Material Nonlinearities For information on the BISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! MISO TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! NLISO TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the NLISO option, see Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! BKIN TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
839
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis For information on the BKIN option, see Bilinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
TB,MKIN,1,5,5 ! MKIN TABLE TBTEMP,,strain TBDATA,1,0.0015,0.006,0.04,0.08,0.1 TBTEMP,20 TBDATA,1,45000,60000,90000,115000,120000 TBTEMP,400 TBDATA,1,41040,54720,82080,104880,109440 TBTEMP,650 TBDATA,1,37800,50400,75600,96600,100800 TBTEMP,800 TBDATA,1,34665,46220,69330,88588,92440 TBTEMP,950 TBDATA,1,31140,41520,62280,79580,83040
TB,HILL,1,5 ! HILL TABLE TBTEMP,20.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,400.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,650.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,800.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00 TBTEMP,950.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the MKIN option, see Multilinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! KINH TABLE
840
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the KINH option, see Multilinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! CHABOCHE TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the CHAB option, see Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! CHABOCHE TABLE
! BISO TABLE
! HILL TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the BISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the CHAB option, see Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
841
! CHABOCHE TABLE
! MISO TABLE
! HILL TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the CHAB option, see Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! NLISO TABLE
! CHABOCHE TABLE
842
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
TB,HILL,1,5 TBTEMP,750.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,800.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,850.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,900.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00 TBTEMP,950.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
! HILL TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the NLISO option, see Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the CHAB option, see Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
TB,BISO,1, TBDATA,1,45000,760000
! BISO TABLE
! RATE TABLE
TB,HILL,1,5 ! HILL TABLE TBTEMP,750.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,800.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,850.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,900.0
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
843
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the RATE option, see Rate-Dependent Viscoplastic Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.7: Viscoplasticity in this chapter. For information on the BISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! MISO TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the RATE option, see Rate-Dependent Viscoplastic Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.7: Viscoplasticity in this chapter. For information on the MISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! NLISO TABLE
844
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 8.3: Modeling Material Nonlinearities For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the RATE option, see Rate-Dependent Viscoplastic Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.7: Viscoplasticity in this chapter. For information on the NLISO option, see Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
TB,CREEP,1,,,2 TBDATA,1,5.911E-34,6.25,-0.25
! CREEP TABLE
TB,HILL,1,5 TBTEMP,750.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,800.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,850.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,900.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00 TBTEMP,950.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
! HILL TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.5.1: Implicit Creep Procedure in this chapter.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
845
TB,BISO,1 TBDATA,1,180,200
! BISO TABLE
TB,CREEP,1,,,2 TBDATA,1,5.911E-34,6.25,-0.25
! CREEP TABLE
TB,HILL,1,5 TBTEMP,750.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,800.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,850.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,900.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00 TBTEMP,950.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
! HILL TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.5.1: Implicit Creep Procedure in this chapter. For information on the BISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
846
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
! MISO TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.5.1: Implicit Creep Procedure in this chapter. For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! NLISO TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.5.1: Implicit Creep Procedure in this chapter. For information on the NLISO option, see Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
847
! BKIN TABLE
! CREEP TABLES
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.5.1: Implicit Creep Procedure in this chapter. For information on the BKIN option, see Bilinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on hyperelasticity, see Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.4: Hyperelasticity in this chapter. For information on the viscoelasticity, see Viscoelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.8: Viscoelasticity in this chapter.
These commands and the settings they control are discussed in later sections. You can also refer to the individual command descriptions in the ANSYS Commands Reference. 848
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 8.5: Performing a Nonlinear Static Analysis If you do choose to override the ANSYS-specified settings, or if you wish to use an input list from a previous release of ANSYS, issue SOLCONTROL,OFF in the /SOLU phase. See the SOLCONTROL command description for more details. ANSYS' automatic solution control is active for the following analyses: Single-field nonlinear or transient structural and solid mechanics analysis where the solution DOFs are combinations of UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, and ROTZ. Single-field nonlinear or transient thermal analysis where the solution DOF is TEMP. Note The Solution Controls dialog box, which is described later in this chapter, cannot be used to set solution controls for a thermal analysis. Instead, you must use the standard set of ANSYS solution commands and the standard corresponding menu paths.
849
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis Section 2.3.2.3: The Transient Tab Section 2.3.2.4: Using the Sol'n Options Tab Section 2.3.2.5: Using the Nonlinear Tab Section 2.3.2.6: Using the Advanced NL Tab
8.5.2.2. Advanced Analysis Options You Can Set on the Solution Controls Dialog Box
The following sections provide more detail about some of the advanced analysis options that you can set on the Solution Controls dialog box.
Section 8.5: Performing a Nonlinear Static Analysis MSAVE,ON can result in a memory savings of up to 70% for the part of the model that meets the criteria, although the solution time may increase depending on the manufacturer of your computer and the speed of your processor, as well as the chosen element options (for example, 2 x 2 x 2 integration for SOLID95). The sparse direct solver, in sharp contrast to the iterative solvers included in ANSYS, is a robust solver. Although the PCG solver can solve indefinite matrix equations, when the PCG solver encounters an ill-conditioned matrix, the solver will iterate to the specified number of iterations and stop if it fails to converge. When this happens, it triggers bisection. After completing the bisection, the solver continues the solution if the resulting matrix is wellconditioned. Eventually, the entire nonlinear load step can be solved. Use the following guidelines for selecting either the sparse or the PCG solver for nonlinear structural analysis: If it is a beam/shell or beam/shell and solid structure, choose the sparse direct solver. If it is a 3-D solid structure and the number of DOF is relatively large (that is, 200,000 or more DOF), choose the PCG solver. If the problem is ill-conditioned (triggered by poor element shapes), or has a big difference in material properties in different regions of the model, or has insufficient displacement boundary constraints, choose the sparse direct solver.
8.5.2.3. Advanced Load Step Options You Can Set on the Solution Controls Dialog Box
The following sections provide more detail about some of the advanced load step options that you can set on the Solution Controls dialog box.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
851
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis By default, the program will check for force (and, when rotational degrees of freedom are active, moment) convergence by comparing the square root sum of the squares (SRSS) of the force imbalances against the product of VALUE*TOLER. The default value of VALUE is the SRSS of the applied loads (or, for applied displacements, of the Newton-Raphson restoring forces), or MINREF (which defaults to 0.01), whichever is greater. The default value of TOLER is 0.005. If SOLCONTROL,OFF, TOLER defaults to 0.001 and MINREF defaults to 1.0 for force convergence. You should almost always use force convergence checking. You can also add displacement (and, when applicable, rotation) convergence checking. For displacements, the program bases convergence checking on the change in deflections (u) between the current (i) and the previous (i-1) iterations: u=ui-ui-1. Note If you explicitly define any custom convergence criteria [CNVTOL], the entire default criteria will be overwritten. Thus, if you define displacement convergence checking, you will have to redefine force convergence checking. (Use multiple CNVTOL commands to define multiple convergence criteria.) Using tighter convergence criteria will improve the accuracy of your results, but at the cost of more equilibrium iterations. If you want to tighten (or loosen, which is not recommended) your criteria, you should change TOLER by one or two orders of magnitude. In general, you should continue to use the default value of VALUE; that is, change the convergence criteria by adjusting TOLER, not VALUE. You should make certain that the default value of MINREF = 0.001 makes sense in the context of your analysis. If your analysis uses certain sets of units or has very low load levels, you might want to specify a smaller value for MINREF. Also, we do not recommend putting two or more disjointed structures into one model for a nonlinear analysis because the convergence check tries to relate these disjointed structures, often producing some unwanted residual force. Checking Convergence in a Single and Multi-DOF System To check convergence in a single degree of freedom (DOF) system, you compute the force (and moment) imbalance for the one DOF, and compare this value against the established convergence criteria (VALUE*TOLER). (You can also perform a similar check for displacement (and rotation) convergence for your single DOF.) However, in a multi-DOF system, you might want to use a different method of comparison. The ANSYS program provides three different vector norms to use for convergence checking: The infinite norm repeats the single-DOF check at each DOF in your model. The L1 norm compares the convergence criterion against the sum of the absolute values of force (and moment) imbalance for all DOFs. The L2 norm performs the convergence check using the square root sum of the squares of the force (and moment) imbalances for all DOFs. (Of course, additional L1 or L2 checking can be performed for a displacement convergence check.)
Example For the following example, the substep will be considered to be converged if the out-of-balance force (checked at each DOF separately) is less than or equal to 5000*0.0005 (that is, 2.5), and if the change in displacements (checked as the square root sum of the squares) is less than or equal to 10*0.001 (that is, 0.01).
CNVTOL,F,5000,0.0005,0 CNVTOL,U,10,0.001,2
852
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
853
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis changed. ANSYS menu paths are provided in this section to help you access these options for those cases in which you choose to override the ANSYS-assigned defaults.
8.5.3.1. Advanced Analysis Options You Cannot Set on the Solution Controls Dialog Box
The following sections describe some advanced analysis options that you can set for your analysis. As noted above in Section 8.5.3: Set Additional Solution Options, you cannot use the Solution Controls dialog box to set the options described below. Instead, you must set them using the standard set of ANSYS solution commands and the standard corresponding menu paths.
854
Section 8.5: Performing a Nonlinear Static Analysis Full with unsymmetric matrix (NROPT,UNSYM): The program uses the full Newton-Raphson procedure, in which the stiffness matrix is updated at every equilibrium iteration. In addition, it generates and uses unsymmetric matrices that you can use for any of the following: If you are running a pressure-driven collapse analysis, an unsymmetric pressure load stiffness might be helpful in obtaining convergence. You can include pressure load stiffness using SOLCONTROL,INCP. If you are defining an unsymmetric material model using TB,USER, you would need NROPT,UNSYM to fully use the property you defined. If you are running a contact analysis, an unsymmetric contact stiffness matrix would fully couple the sliding and the normal stiffnesses. See Section 3.8.4: Determining Contact Stiffness and Allowable Penetration in the ANSYS Contact Technology Guide for details.
You should first try NROPT,FULL; then try NROPT,UNSYM if you experience convergence difficulties. Note that using an unsymmetric solver requires more computer time to obtain a solution, than if you use a symmetric solver. If a multistatus element is in the model, however, it would be updated at the iteration in which it changes status, irrespective of the Newton-Raphson option.
8.5.3.2. Advanced Load Step Options You Cannot Set on the Solution Controls Dialog Box
The following sections describe some advanced load step options that you can set for your analysis. As noted above in Section 8.5.3: Set Additional Solution Options, you cannot use the Solution Controls dialog box to set the options described below. Instead, you must set them using the standard set of ANSYS solution commands and the standard corresponding menu paths.
longer.
855
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis corresponding menu paths instead.) This option's primary use is in unsteady state thermal analysis where the final temperature stage reaches a steady state. In such cases, the time step can be opened quickly. The default is that if the TEMP increment is smaller than 0.1 in three (NUMSTEP = 3) contiguous substeps, the time step size can be "opened-up" (value = 0.1 by default). The time step size can then be opened continuously for greater solution efficiency. Command(s): OPNCONTROL GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Nonlinear> Open Control
Section 8.5: Performing a Nonlinear Static Analysis Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Integration Pt Printed output [OUTPR] includes any results data on the output file (Jobname.OUT). Extrapolation of results [ERESX] copies an element's integration point stress and elastic strain results to the nodes instead of extrapolating them, if nonlinear strains (plasticity, creep, swelling) are present in the element. The integration point nonlinear strains are always copied to the nodes. See Chapter 2, Loading in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for more information on these options.
Enter POST1. If your model is not currently in the database, issue RESUME. Command(s): /POST1 GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
857
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis 3. Read in results for the desired load step and substep, which can be identified by load step and substep numbers or by time. (Note, however, that arc-length results should not be identified by time.) Command(s): SET GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> load step You can also use the SUBSET or APPEND commands to read in or merge results data for selected portions of the model only. The LIST argument on any of these commands lists the available solutions on the results file. You can also limit the amount of data written from the results file to the database through the INRES command. Additionally, you can use the ETABLE command to store result items for selected elements. See the individual command descriptions in the ANSYS Commands Reference for more information. Caution: If you specify a TIME value for which no results are available, the ANSYS program will perform a linear interpolation to calculate the results at that value of TIME. Realize that this interpolation will usually cause some loss of accuracy in a nonlinear analysis (see Figure 8.23: Linear Interpolation of Nonlinear Results Can Introduce Some Error). Thus, for a nonlinear analysis, you should usually postprocess at a TIME that corresponds exactly to the desired substep.
Figure 8.23 Linear Interpolation of Nonlinear Results Can Introduce Some Error
4.
Display the results using any of the following options: Option: Display Deformed Shape Command(s): PLDISP GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape In a large deformation analysis, you might prefer to use a true scale display [/DSCALE,,1]. Option: Contour Displays Command(s): PLNSOL or PLESOL GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu or Element Solu Use these options to display contours of stresses, strains, or any other applicable item. If you have adjacent elements with different material behavior (such as can occur with plastic or multilinear elastic material properties, with different material types, or with adjacent deactivated and activated elements), you
858
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 8.5: Performing a Nonlinear Static Analysis should take care to avoid nodal stress averaging errors in your results. Selecting logic (described in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide) provides a means of avoiding such errors. The KUND field on PLNSOL and PLESOL gives you the option of overlaying the undeformed shape on the display. You can also contour element table data and line element data: Command(s): PLETAB, PLLS GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Element Table> Plot Element Table Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Line Elem Res Use PLETAB to contour element table data and PLLS to contour line element data. Option: Tabular Listings Command(s): PRNSOL (nodal results) PRESOL (element-by-element results) PRRSOL (reaction data) PRETAB PRITER (substep summary data), and so on. NSORT ESORT GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Nodal Solution Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Element Solution Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Reaction Solution Use the NSORT and ESORT commands to sort the data before listing them. Other Capabilities Many other postprocessing functions - mapping results onto a path, report quality listings, and so on are available in POST1. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details. Load case combinations usually are not valid for nonlinear analyses.
3.
4.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
859
Other Capabilities
Many other postprocessing functions are available in POST26. See Chapter 6, The Time-History Postprocessor (POST26) in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details. See the NLGEOM, SSTIF, NROPT, TIME, NSUBST, AUTOTS, KBC, CNVTOL, NEQIT, NCNV, PRED, OUTRES, and SOLU command descriptions for more information.
Apply loads and specify load step options in the same manner as you would for a linear full transient dynamic analysis. A transient load history usually requires multiple load steps, with the first load step typically used to establish initial conditions (see the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide). The general, nonlinear, birth and death, and output control options available for a nonlinear static analysis are also available for a nonlinear transient analysis. In a nonlinear transient analysis, time must be greater than zero. See Chapter 5, Transient Dynamic Analysis for procedures for defining nonzero initial conditions.
860
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 8.6: Performing a Nonlinear Transient Analysis For a nonlinear transient analysis, you must specify whether you want stepped or ramped loads [KBC]. See the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for further discussion about ramped vs. stepped loads. You can also specify dynamics options: alpha and beta damping, time integration effects, and transient integration parameters. Command(s): ALPHAD, BETAD, TIMINT, TINTP GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( : Transient Tab) Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Damping Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time Integration An explanation of the dynamics options follows. Damping Rayleigh damping constants are defined using the constant mass [ALPHAD] and stiffness [BETAD] matrix multipliers. In a nonlinear analysis the stiffness may change drastically - do not use BETAD, except with care. See Section 5.10.3: Damping for details about damping. Time Integration Effects [TIMINT] Time integration effects are ON by default in a transient analysis. For creep, viscoelasticity, viscoplasticity, or swelling, you should turn the time integration effects off (that is, use a static analysis). These time-dependent effects are usually not included in dynamic analyses because the transient dynamic time step sizes are often too short for any significant amount of long-term deformation to occur. Except in kinematic (rigid-body motion) analyses, you will rarely need to adjust the transient integration parameters [TINTP], which provide numerical damping to the Newmark and HHT methods. (See your ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for more information about these parameters.) ANSYS' automatic solution control sets the defaults to a new time integration scheme for use by first order transient equations. This is typically used for unsteady state thermal problems where = 1.0 (set by SOLCONTROL, ON); this is the backward Euler scheme. It is unconditionally stable and more robust for highly nonlinear thermal problems such as phase changes. The oscillation limit tolerance defaults to 0.0, so that the response first order eigenvalues can be used to more precisely determine a new time step value. Note If you are using the Solution Controls dialog box to set solution controls, you can access all of these options [ALPHAD, BETAD, KBC, TIMINT, TINTP, TRNOPT] on the Transient tab. 3. Write load data for each load step to a load step file. Command(s): LSWRITE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Write LS File Save a backup copy of the database to a named file. Command(s): SAVE GUI: Utility Menu> File> Save As Start solution calculations. Other methods for multiple load steps are described in Chapter 1, Getting Started with ANSYS in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide. Command(s): LSSOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> From LS Files After you have solved all load steps, leave SOLUTION. Command(s): FINISH
4.
5.
6.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
861
862
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
! General Postprocessor ! Read results from desired time step ! Postprocess as desired
See the ANTYPE, TRNOPT, LSWRITE, NLGEOM, SSTIF, NROPT, TIME, DELTIM, AUTOTS, KBC, ALPHAD, TIMINT, CNVTOL, NEQIT, NCNV, PRED, OUTRES, LSSOLVE, and SOLU command descriptions for more information.
8.8. Restarts
Restart procedures for a transient analysis are essentially the same as for a static analysis; see Section 3.10: Restarting an Analysis in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
863
864
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 8.10: Tips and Guidelines for Nonlinear Analysis Use a mesh density adequate to characterize the highest mode shape of interest. The number of elements needed depends on the elements' assumed displacement shape functions, as well as on the mode shape itself. Use a mesh density adequate to resolve any transient dynamic wave propagation through your structure. If wave propagation is important, then provide at least 20 elements to resolve one wavelength.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
865
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis Identify Regions of High Residual Forces Issue the NLDIAG,NRRE command to write the Newton-Raphson residuals from equilibrium iterations to a file (Jobname.nrxxx). You can then contour plot the residual forces via the PLNSOL,NRRE command, which will help to identify regions of high residual forces. Such a capability can be useful when you experience convergence difficulties in the middle of a load step, where the model has a large number of contact surfaces and other nonlinearities. You can restart the analysis and issue an NLDIAG,NRRE command to write out the residuals. By tracking the way the residuals change over several equilibrium iterations you can identify a portion of your model where large residuals persist. You can then focus on the nonlinearities in that area (for example, a contact pair's properties) instead of having to deal with the entire model. Identify Problem Elements Too large a distortion Elements contain nodes that have near zero pivots (nonlinear analyses) Too large a plastic or creep strain increment Elements where mixed u-P constraints are not satisfied (mixed U-P option of 18x solid elements only) Typically, nonlinear analyses fail to converge for the following reasons:
ANSYS has default limits which, when exceeded, determine when convergence criteria have been violated. Some limits are user-controlled; for example, the CUTCONTROL command sets the maximum plastic/creep strain increments allowed in an iteration. Other limits are fixed. The NLDIAG,EFLG command identifies elements that violate the above criteria and records them in a file (Jobname.ndxxx). Note Convergence problems may occur when material algorithms fail (e.g. local element level NewtonRaphson convergence failure, or extreme element distortion). The Ansys error message identifies the corresponding element number and/or the material ID for these cases. Be sure to read any error messages generated during solution. Process the Tracked Results Issue the NLDPOST command to process the .ndxxx nonlinear diagnostics files. The command creates components of elements that violate a certain criterion for a particular equilibrium iteration (or iterations). Identify contact pairs causing convergence difficulties Issue the NLDIAG,CONT command to write various contact information for all defined contact pairs to a single Jobname.cnd text file. The file is written during solution at a user-specified frequency (each iteration, substep, or load step). Information stored in this file will help identify when and how contact occurs, determine the regions where contact is unstable, and identify the corresponding contact parameters. You can then focus on the specific settings for those particular contact pairs that need attention. Monitor the Diagnostics Results in Real Time The NLHIST command allows you to monitor results of interest in real time during solution. Before starting the solution, you can request nodal data such as displacements or reaction forces at specific nodes. You can also request element nodal data such as stresses and strains at specific elements to be graphed. Pair-based contact data are also available. The result data are written to a file named Jobname.nlh. For example, a reaction force-deflection curve could indicate when possible buckling behavior occurs. Nodal results and contact results are monitored at every converged substep while element nodal data are written as specified via the OUTRES setting.
866
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 8.10: Tips and Guidelines for Nonlinear Analysis You can also track results during batch runs. Either access the ANSYS Launcher and select File Tracking from the Tools menu, or type nlhist81 at the command line. Use the supplied file browser to navigate to your Jobname.nlh file, and click on it to invoke the tracking utilty. You can use this utilty to read the file at any time, even after the solution is complete (the data in the file must be formatted correctly).
Figure 8.24 Convergence Norms Displayed By the Graphical Solution Tracking (GST) Feature
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
867
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis Problems that have only localized dynamic behavior (for example, turbine blade and hub assemblies) in which the low-frequency energy content of the system could dominate the high-frequency areas. Problems with short ramp times on some of their loads. If the time step size is allowed to become too large, ramped portions of the load history may be inaccurately characterized. Problems that include structures that are continuously excited over a range of frequencies (for example, seismic problems).
Take care when modeling kinematic structures (systems with rigid-body motions). These guidelines can usually help you obtain a good solution: Incorporate significant numerical damping (0.05 < < 0.1 on the TINTP command) into the solution to filter out the high frequency noise, especially if a coarse time step is used. Do not use -damping (mass matrix multiplier, ALPHAD command) in a dynamic kinematic analysis, as it will dampen the rigid body motion (zero frequency mode) of the system. Avoid imposed displacement history specifications, because imposed displacement input has (theoretically) infinite jumps in acceleration, which causes stability problems for the Newmark time-integration algorithm.
where NSBSTP is the number of substeps specified in the NSUBST command. When choosing the number of substeps, consider that more substeps will result in a longer solution time. Ideally, you want to choose the minimum number of substeps required to produce an optimally efficient solution. You might have to take an "educated guess" of the desired number of substeps, and adjust and re-analyze as needed. Do not use line search [LNSRCH], the predictor [PRED], adaptive descent [NROPT,,,ON], automatic time stepping [AUTOTS, TIME, DELTIM], or time-integration effects [TIMINT] when the arc-length method is active.
868
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 8.10: Tips and Guidelines for Nonlinear Analysis Do not attempt to base convergence on displacement [CNVTOL,U]. Use the force criteria [CNVTOL,F] instead. To help minimize solution time with the arc-length method, the maximum number of equilibrium iterations in a single substep [NEQIT] should be less than or equal to 15. If an arc-length solution fails to converge within the prescribed maximum number of iterations [NEQIT], the program will automatically bisect and continue the analysis. Bisection will continue either until a converged solution is obtained, or until the minimum arc-length radius is used (the minimum radius is defined by NSBSTP [NSUBST] and MINARC [ARCLEN]). In general, you cannot use this method to obtain a solution at a specified load or displacement value because the value changes (along the spherical arc) as equilibrium is achieved. Note in Figure 8.4: Traditional Fa Newton-Raphson Method vs. Arc-Length Method how the specified load 1 is only used as a starting point. The actual load at convergence is somewhat less. Similarly, it can be difficult to determine a value of limiting load or deflection within some known tolerance when using the arc-length method in a nonlinear buckling analysis. You generally have to adjust the reference arc-length radius (using NSUBST) by trial-and-error to obtain a solution at the limit point. It might be more convenient to use standard Newton-Raphson iterations with bisection [AUTOTS] to determine values of nonlinear buckling loads. You should usually avoid using the JCG solver [EQSLV] in conjunction with the arc-length method, because the arc-length procedure might result in a negative definite stiffness matrix (negative pivot), which can cause a solution failure with this solver. You can freely switch from the Newton-Raphson iteration method to the arc-length method at the start of any load step. However, to switch from arc-length to Newton-Raphson iterations, you must terminate the analysis and restart, deactivating the arc-length method in the first load step of the restart [ARCLEN,OFF]. An arc-length solution terminates under these conditions: When limits defined by the ARCTRM or NCNV commands are reached When the solution converges at the applied load When you use an abort file (Jobname.ABT)
See the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for a discussion of termination and restart procedures. Use the load-deflection curve as a guide for evaluating and adjusting your analysis to help you achieve the desired results. It is usually good practice to graph your load-deflection curve (using POST26 commands) with every analysis. Often, an unsuccessful arc-length analysis can be traced to an arc-length radius that is either too large or too small. "Drifting back," in which the analysis retraces its steps back along the load-deflection curve, is one typical difficulty that is caused by using too large or too small an arc-length radius. Study the loaddeflection curve to understand this problem. You can then use the NSUBST and ARCLEN commands to adjust the arc-length radius size and range, as appropriate. The total arc-length load factor (item ALLF on the SOLU command) can be either positive or negative. Similarly, TIME, which in an arc-length analysis is related to the total arc-length load factor, can also be either positive or negative. Negative values of ALLF or TIME indicate that the arc-length feature is applying load in the reverse direction, in order to maintain stability in the structure. Negative ALLF or TIME values can be commonly encountered in various snap-through analyses. When reading arc-length results into the database for POST1 postprocessing [SET], you should always reference the desired results data set by its load step and substep number (LSTEP and SBSTEP) or by its
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
869
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis data set number (NSET). Do not reference results by a TIME value, because TIME in an arc-length analysis is not always monotonically increasing. (A single value of TIME might reference more than one solution.) Additionally, the program cannot correctly interpret negative TIME values (which might be encountered in a snap-through analysis). If TIME becomes negative, remember to define an appropriate variable range [/XRANGE or /YRANGE] before creating any POST26 graphs.
870
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
*** NOTE *** CP= 13.891 TIME= 11:09:22 Nonlinear analysis, NROPT set to 1 (full Newton-Raphson solution procedure) for all DOFs. L O A D S T E P O P T I O N S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . 200.00 . ON . 100 . 10000 . 10 . 15 . NO .YES (EXIT) .USE DEFAULTS .NO PRINTOUT
LOAD STEP NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . TIME AT END OF THE LOAD STEP. . . . . . . AUTOMATIC TIME STEPPING . . . . . . . . . INITIAL NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . . MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . . MINIMUM NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . . MAXIMUM NUMBER OF EQUILIBRIUM ITERATIONS. STEP CHANGE BOUNDARY CONDITIONS . . . . . TERMINATE ANALYSIS IF NOT CONVERGED . . . CONVERGENCE CONTROLS. . . . . . . . . . . PRINT OUTPUT CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . DATABASE OUTPUT CONTROLS ITEM FREQUENCY COMPONENT BASI -10
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.2006E+06 CRITERION= 1125. EQUIL ITER 1 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= 0.1272E-01 LINE SEARCH PARAMETER = 1.000 SCALED MAX DOF INC = 0.1272E-01 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 4267. CRITERION= 480.2 EQUIL ITER 2 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= -0.9019E-03 LINE SEARCH PARAMETER = 1.000 SCALED MAX DOF INC = -0.9019E-03 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 1751. CRITERION= 488.2 EQUIL ITER 3 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= 0.1746E-03 LINE SEARCH PARAMETER = 1.000 SCALED MAX DOF INC = 0.1746E-03 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 778.5 CRITERION= 497.7 EQUIL ITER 4 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= 0.6943E-04 LINE SEARCH PARAMETER = 1.000 SCALED MAX DOF INC = 0.6943E-04 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 347.4 CRITERION= 507.7 <<< CONVERGED >>> SOLUTION CONVERGED AFTER EQUILIBRIUM ITERATION 4 *** LOAD STEP 2 SUBSTEP 1 COMPLETED. CUM ITER = 7 *** TIME = 101.000 TIME INC = 1.00000
Load step 2 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.6674E+05 CRITERION= 594.3 EQUIL ITER 1 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= 0.4318E-02 substep 2 LINE SEARCH PARAMETER = 1.000 SCALED MAX DOF INC = 0.4318E-02
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 626.2 CRITERION= 502.9 EQUIL ITER 2 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= 0.8570E-04 LINE SEARCH PARAMETER = 1.000 SCALED MAX DOF INC = 0.8570E-04 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 77.87 CRITERION= 512.9 <<< CONVERGED >>> SOLUTION CONVERGED AFTER EQUILIBRIUM ITERATION 2 *** LOAD STEP 2 SUBSTEP 2 COMPLETED. CUM ITER = 9 *** TIME = 102.000 TIME INC = 1.00000
Load step 2 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.1333E+05 CRITERION= 575.4 EQUIL ITER 1 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= -0.5329E-02 substep 3 LINE SEARCH PARAMETER = 1.000 SCALED MAX DOF INC = -0.5329E-02 Equilbrium FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 8237. CRITERION= 534.2 EQUIL ITER 2 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= 0.3628E-02 iteration LINE SEARCH PARAMETER = 1.000 SCALED MAX DOF INC = 0.3628E-02 summaries
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 3905. CRITERION= 532.9 EQUIL ITER 3 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= 0.1451E-02 LINE SEARCH PARAMETER = 1.000 SCALED MAX DOF INC = 0.1451E-02 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 1135. CRITERION= 540.3 EQUIL ITER 4 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= 0.1034E-03 LINE SEARCH PARAMETER = 0.9578 SCALED MAX DOF INC = 0.9905E-04 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 41.95 CRITERION= 551.4 <<< CONVERGED >>> SOLUTION CONVERGED AFTER EQUILIBRIUM ITERATION 4
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
871
872
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
The plate has a dead load acting as a uniform pressure of 0.125N/m2. The history of the cyclic point load is shown here:
873
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis 2. 3. 4. 5. Type the text "Cyclic loading of a fixed circular plate." Click on OK. Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Change Jobname. The Change Jobname dialog box appears. Type the text axplate in the entry box and click OK.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Section 8.11: Sample Nonlinear Analysis (GUI Method) 3. 4. 5. 6. Enter True Stress for the Y-axis label and click OK. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models. The Define Material Model Behavior dialog box appears. In the Material Models Defined window, double-click in Material Model Number 1, and Multilinear Kinematic (General). The dialog box appears that includes the Strain/Stress data pairs that you entered. Click on the Graph button. A graph of the data table values appears in the Graphics window. If necessary, revise the stress/strain values and click on the Graph button again. Repeat revisions and graphing as needed until you are satisfied with the graphed results. Click on OK. Choose menu path Material> Exit to remove the Define Material Model Behavior dialog box. Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
7. 8.
3. 4.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
875
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis 3. 4. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> DB/Results File. The Controls for Database and Results File Writing dialog box appears. Verify that All items are selected, and choose Every substep for the File write frequency. Click OK.
7. 8. 9.
10. Enter "0.0" as the Displacement value. Click OK. 11. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities. The Select Entities dialog box appears. Verify that Nodes and By Location are selected. 12. Click on Y coordinates and enter "thick" in the Min, Max field. Click OK. 876
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 8.11: Sample Nonlinear Analysis (GUI Method) 13. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Pressure> On Nodes. The Apply PRES on Nodes picking menu appears. 14. Click on Pick All. The Apply PRES on nodes dialog box appears. 15. Enter "0.125" in the Load PRES value field and click OK. 16. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Everything. 17. Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
10. Click on Close on the Information dialog box when the solution is done. 11. Repeat Steps 5-10, entering "f" in the Force/moment value field at Step 7. 12. Repeat Steps 5-11 two more times, for a total of three cycles (six substeps). 13. Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
877
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
10. Verify that the reference number of the variable is 2. 11. Choose Stress in the selection list on the left. Choose Y-direction SY in the selection list on the right. Click OK. The Defined Time-History Variables dialog box reappears, with a second variable listed (ESOL). The dialog box should show element number 281, node number 50, item S, component Y, and name SY. 12. Click on Add. Repeat steps 7-10, with variable reference number 3. 13. In the Define Element Results Variable dialog box, choose Strain-elastic in the selection list on the left. Choose Y-dir'n EPEL Y in the selection list on the right. Click OK.
878
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 8.12: Sample Nonlinear Analysis (Command or Batch Method) 14. Click on Add. Repeat steps 7-10, with variable reference number 4. 15. In the Define Element Results Variable dialog box, choose Strain-plastic in the selection list on the left. Choose Y-dir'n EPPL Y in the selection list on the right. Click OK. 16. Click on Close on the Defined Time-History Variables dialog box. 17. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Math Operations> Add. The Add Time-History Variables dialog box appears. 18. Enter 5 for the reference number for result, enter 3 as the 1st variable, and enter 4 as the 2nd variable. Click OK. This adds the elastic and plastic strains that you stored as variables 3 and 4. Their sum is the total strain, and it is stored as variable 5.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
879
! Define a rectangle which is the axisymmetric cross section of the plate. ! The rectangle has a length equal to the radius of the plate and a height equal ! to the thickness of the plate rect,,radius,,thick ! Select the left and right bounding lines of the created rectangle and set ! the line division to 8 (8 elements through the thickness of the plate) FLST,5,2,4,ORDE,2 FITEM,5,2 FITEM,5,4 CM,_Y,LINE LSEL, , , ,P51X !* CM,_Y1,LINE CMSEL,,_Y LESIZE,_Y1, , ,8,1, CMDEL,_Y CMDEL,_Y1 !* ! Select the top and bottom bounding lines of the created rectangle and set ! the line division to 40 (40 elements through the radius of the plate) FLST,5,2,4,ORDE,2 FITEM,5,1 FITEM,5,3 CM,_Y,LINE LSEL, , , ,P51X !* CM,_Y1,LINE CMSEL,,_Y LESIZE,_Y1, , ,40,1, CMDEL,_Y CMDEL,_Y1 !* CM,_Y,AREA ASEL, , , , 1 CM,_Y1,AREA CHKMSH,'AREA' CMSEL,S,_Y amesh,all CMDEL,_Y CMDEL,_Y1 CMDEL,_Y2 fini /solve nlgeom,on! Turn on geometric nonlinearity ! Get the node numbers for the nodes located at the top ! of the axis of symmetry and at bottom right of the model ntop = node(0,thick,0) nright = node(radius,0,0) ! Activate the monitoring of the displacement and reaction force histories ! during the analysis. This will be written out to the monitor file ratch.mntr monitor,1,ntop,uy
880
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
! Select the nodes located at right end and constrain their radial (x) and ! axial (y) direction displacement to be zero. nsel,s,loc,x,radius d,all,all ! Select the nodes located at left end and constrain their radial (x) direction ! displacement to be zero. nsel,s,loc,x,0.0 d,all,ux,0.0 ! Define the load for Load Step 1. ! Select the nodes located at top surface of plate and apply a uniform pressure ! of 0.125 N/m^2 as dead load on the plate. nsel,s,loc,y,thick sf,all,pres,0.125 alls! Select all nodes ! Define the number of substeps (10). Also define maximum number of ! substeps (50), and the minimum number of substeps (5) for the automatic ! time stepping algorithm. nsub,10,50,5 solve f = 0.01
! Solve load step 1 ! Define the parameter, f, used to apply ! the cyclic point load.
! Over six load steps apply a cyclic point load of magnitude f = 0.01 units ! applied at the center of the plate over three cycles ! Start Cycle 1 ! ---------------nsel,s,node,,ntop f,all,fy,-f nsel,all nsubst,4,25,2 solve nsel,s,node,,ntop f,all,fy,f nsel,all nsubst,4,25,2 solve ! Start Cycle 2 ! ---------------nsel,s,node,,ntop f,all,fy,-f nsel,all nsubst,4,25,2 solve nsel,s,node,,ntop f,all,fy,f nsel,all nsubst,4,25,2 solve
! Define load for load step 2 ! Set the number of substeps, max and min number ! of substeps ! Solve load step 2
! Define load for load step 3 ! Set the number of substeps, max and min number ! of substeps ! Solve load step 3
! Define load for load step 4 ! Set the number of substeps, max and min number ! of substeps ! Solve load step 4
! Define load for load step 5 ! Set the number of substeps, max and min number ! of substeps ! Solve load step 5
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
881
! Define load for load step 6 ! Set the number of substeps, max and min number ! of substeps ! Solve load step 6 ! Define load for load step 7 ! Set the number of substeps, max and min number ! of substeps. ! Solve load step 7
! Read in the results from the last substep of ! the last step. ! ! ! ! Plot the deformed mesh with the undeformed edge only Plot the total accumulated equivalent plastic strains
! ! ! ! !
Plot the mesh Select the node where the point load is attached Select the element attached to this node Get the number of this element Select back everything in the model
! Define variable 2 to be Y component of stress at the node where the point ! load is applied ESOL,2,elem,ntop,S,Y,
! Define variable 3 to be Y component of elastic strain at the node where the ! point load is applied ESOL,3,elem,ntop,EPEL,Y, ! Define variable 4 to be Y component of plastic strain at the node where the ! point load is applied ESOL,4,elem,ntop,EPPL,Y, ! Add the elastic and plastic strains in variables 3 and 4 and store the total ! strain in variable 5. ADD,5,3,4, , , , ,1,1,0, xvar,5 ! Set the axes for subsequent x-y plot to be variable 5
! Define the x and y axes labels for subsequent x-y plot /axlab,x,Total Y-Strain /axlab,y,Y-Stress plvar,2 fini /eof /exit,nosav ! Plot the Y-stress stored in variable 2
882
Section 8.13: Where to Find Other Examples The ANSYS Verification Manual consists of test case analyses demonstrating the analysis capabilities of the ANSYS program. While these test cases demonstrate solutions to realistic analysis problems, the ANSYS Verification Manual does not present them as step-by-step examples with lengthy data input instructions and printouts. However, most ANSYS users who have at least limited finite element experience should be able to fill in the missing details by reviewing each test case's finite element model and input data with accompanying comments. The ANSYS Verification Manual includes a variety of nonlinear analysis test cases: VM7 - Plastic Compression of a Pipe Assembly VM11 - Residual Stress Problem VM24 - Plastic Hinge in a Rectangular Beam VM38 - Plastic Loading of a Thick-Walled Cylinder Under Pressure VM56 - Hyperelastic Thick Cylinder Under Internal Pressure VM78 - Transverse Shear Stresses in a Cantilever Beam VM80 - Plastic Response to a Suddenly Applied Constant Force VM104 - Liquid-Solid Phase Change VM124 - Discharge of Water from a Reservoir VM126 - Heat Transferred to a Flowing Fluid VM132 - Stress Relaxation of a Bolt Due to Creep VM133 - Motion of a Rod Due to Irradiation Induced Creep VM134 - Plastic Bending of a Clamped I-Beam VM146 - Bending of a Reinforced Concrete Beam VM185 - Current Carrying Ferromagnetic Conductor VM198 - Large Strain In-Plane Torsion Test VM199 - Viscoplastic Analysis of a Body Undergoing Shear Deformation VM200 - Viscoelastic Sandwich Seal Analysis VM218 - Hyperelastic Circular Plate VM220 - Eddy Current Loss in Thick Steel Plate
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
883
884
2 Section 9.2.1.2: Input the Data into AN- The experimental data can be read into ANSYS by browsing to the file SYS location (GUI) or by specifying the filename and path (batch) on the command line.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
The types of data required for each of these cases is defined in the tables below.
Table 9.1 Experimental Details for Case 1 and 2 Models and Blatz-Ko
Experimental Type Uniaxial Test Biaxial Test Shear Test Volumetric Test Column 1 Engineering Strain Engineering Strain Engineering Strain Volumetric Strain(J) Column 2 Engineering Stress Engineering Stress Engineering Stress True Stress
92
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 9.2: Hyperelastic Material Curve Fitting Note J is the ratio of current volume to the original volume. All stresses output by ANSYS in POST1/POST26 are true stresses and logarithmic strains.
For temperature dependent curve fitting, specify your temperature values at the top of the experimental data using the
/temp,value
line. This header format specifies the attribute (temp) and its value (100). An example of a typical data input using these attributes follows:
/temp,100 0.9703 60.00 0.9412 118.2 0.9127 175.2 0.8847 231.1
Adding this header introduces a temperature attribute of 100 degrees. You can add additional data sets at other temperatures, in additional files. One file can have data at only one temperature.
9.2.1.2.1. Batch
TBFT,EADD,ID,Option1,Option2,Option3,Option4
Option1 = UNIA, BIAX, SHEA, or VOLU Option2 = name of file containing experimental data Option3 = file name extension Option4 = file directory
9.2.1.2.2. GUI
The Material Properties GUI provides an input field where you can type in the filename of your data file, and also include the appropriate path. You can also browse to a file in a specified location. Separate input is performed for each Option1 value (UNIA, BIAX, SHEA, etc.).
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
93
1. 2.
The number of coefficients is usually the sum of the number of deviatoric coefficients and the number of volumetric coefficients. The number of coefficients for a polynomial will be dependent on the polynomial order N.
Number of Coefficients =
i =1 N
(1 + i) + N
Blatz-Ko and Ogden hyper-foam are compressible models. For Ogden hyper-foam, the experimental data you supply will require additional fields. More information on the hyperelastic models ANSYS supplies for curve fitting can be found in Section 2.5.2: Hyperelastic Material Constants.
9.2.1.3.1. Batch
TBFT,FADD,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3
Option2 = model name, as specified in Table 9.3: Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types (above) Option3 = order or number of coefficients, where applicable. Table 9.3: Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model
Types (above) specifies the number and type of coefficient(s) necessary for each hyperelastic model type.
9.2.1.3.2. GUI
A pull-down selection menu in the material GUI allows you to pick the applicable material model option. The options displayed will be dependent on the format of your experimental data file.
Section 9.2: Hyperelastic Material Curve Fitting For temperature dependent experimental data, you turn temperature dependency on and specify a reference temperature before you solve for the coefficients. You can set the reference temperature only to values specified using the /temp,value header line in the experimental data. You can also specify tref = all and initiate multiple solves to evaluate coefficients at all available discrete temperature values. In this case, for data at three temperatures (t1, t2, and t3), a single TBFT, SOLVE entry will initiate three different solve operations at those three discrete temperatures. With temperature dependency on and the reference temperature set to a particular value, a TBFT, SOLVE command solves for coefficients only at that temperature. To solve for coefficients at other temperatures, you set the reference temperature to each desired discrete temperature value and solve again. You can initialize the coefficients before or after turning temperature dependency on. If the coefficients are initialized before turning temperature dependency on, the specified coefficients will become the initial coefficients for all future solves for that particular model. These coefficients are, however, overridden when temperature dependency is turned on and another set of initial values are specified at discrete temperature values. The curve fitting tool looks for the initial coefficients at a particular temperature. If no coefficients are specified at a discrete temperature, the initial coefficients set before temperature dependency was turned on are used.
9.2.1.4.1. Batch
TBFT,SET,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = model name (see Table 9.3: Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types (above) for the available
models)
Option3 = order, if applicable Option4 = index of coefficient Option5 = value of the coefficient
Option2 = model name. See Table 9.3: Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types (above) for the available
models.
Option3 = order, if applicable Option4 = tdep or tref Option5 = If Option4 = tdep, Option5 = 1 turns on temperature dependency, and Option5 = 0 turns it off. If Option4 = tref, Option5 will be either all, or the reference temperature.
TBFT,FIX,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = model name See Table 9.3: Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types (above) for the available
models.
Option3 = not applicable Option4 = index of coefficient Option5 = 1 for fixed and 0 to vary
9.2.1.4.2. GUI
The GUI automatically updates your coefficient tables depending on the model you pick. You can modify individual coefficients to initialize them at values you believe are more appropriate.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
95
The solution stops when both the residual tolerance and the coefficient change tolerance of your error norm are met, or if the number of iterations criteria is met. When you use nonlinear regression, you must initialize your coefficients.
9.2.1.5.1. Batch
TBFT,SOLVE,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3,Option4, ..., Option7
Option2 = model name. See Table 9.3: Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types (above) for the models
available.
Option3 = order or number of your coefficients. See Table 9.3: Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types
Other solution parameters are available. See the TBFT command for details.
9.2.1.5.2. GUI
The GUI lets you specify all of your control parameters (error norm, solution control parameters, and the solver options) interactively. You select the appropriate options from the provided menus, and solve to generate the coefficients. You can change the parameters and repeat the solution as necessary to ensure an accurate result. The unused options are disabled whenever necessary.
9.2.1.6.1. Batch
TBFT,PLOT,ID,Option1,HYPER,Option3,Option4
96
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
available.
Option4 = order or number of your coefficients. See Table 9.3: Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types
(above) for possible values. You use the /WINDOW command to configure the graphs for each of the resultant curves for the individual stress types.
9.2.1.6.2. GUI
Use the GRAPH button to plot the data. Your plots will show columns 2 and above as separate curves, plotted as a function of column 1. The data in column 1 is always the X-axis. By default, all the experiments are plotted in the GUI window. To view specific data and its corresponding fitting result, you can click the right mouse button (RMB) on the specific data set, and pick a desired option to view the results. Other RMB plotting utilities can be found for different data fields in the curve fitting GUI window. Use RMB functions to Zoom, Fit, Save Plot to File, View/Hide Legend and View/Hide Grid. Two or more fitted functions can also be compared in the same plot. For example, you can view Mooney2 Uniaxial and Mooney9 Uniaxial plots directly on top of each other, provided you have already solved for both of these functions. RMB also allows you to set the number of points used to generate the plot, and also change the minimum X value and the maximum X value in a plot. You can also hide a particular curve within a graph, turn the legend and/or axis displays on and off, and switch the scales between log scale and regular scale. Use the middle-mouse button to eliminate a specific curve and clarify or refine the remaining curve.
9.2.1.6.3. Review/Verify
The two factors you consider in determining results acceptability are visual fit and the error norm/residual values. When you plot the curve, the error norm/residual values are printed in the curve fitting GUI window. Error norm values help you determine the quality of curve fitting and whether to accept the results, but are not always the best indicator of a valid curve fit. Plotting the curves and visually assessing the result is usually the best indication. If the results are unacceptable, you may want to go back to step 3 and solve again, either by picking a different model, increasing the order, or redefining your initial values of the coefficients or other control parameters. You can continue to use your original experimental data, repeating step 3 through step 7 until you get an acceptable solution.
9.2.1.7.1. Batch
TBFT,FSET,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3
Option2 = model name. See Table 9.3: Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types (above) for the models
available.
Option3 = order or number of your coefficients. See Table 9.3: Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
97
9.2.1.7.2. GUI
Once you complete the process and update your material data properties with the representative curve data, you are returned to the material properties dialog. The curve data can now be accessed for the full range of material behavior.
5 Section 9.3.1.5: Specify Control Parameters You choose the error norm to be used for an acceptable curve fit. and Solve 6 Section 9.3.1.6: Plot the Experimental Data You review and verify the results by comparing them with the exand Analyze perimental data and the regression errors. If they are not acceptable, repeat steps 3 to 5 to obtain a new curve fitting solution. 7 Section 9.3.1.7: Write Data to TB Command Write curve fitting results in the TB command format to the ANSYS database.
98
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
The header format to define each column's data-type is /n, abbr, where n is the index of the data column in the file, and abbr is the abbreviation for the type of data in the column, as described in Table 9.4: Creep Data Types and Abbreviations. A typical data input is shown below:
/1,seqv ! indicates first column is stress /2,creq ! indicates second column is creep strain /3,temp ! indicates third column is temperature /4,dcreq ! indicates fourth column is creep strain rate 4000 0.00215869 100 0.000203055 4000 0.00406109 100 0.000181314 4000 0.00664691 100 0.000165303 4000 0.0102068 100 0.000152217 4000 0.0151416 100 0.000140946
When a particular column is unchanged over the loading history, you can define it as an attribute. For instance, in the above example, the stress and temperature are constant throughout the range. You define this data as an attribute. The header format to define a data attribute is /attr, value, where attr is the data-type abbreviation, and value is the value of the attribute. The constant stress and temperature values above can be written into the file header, as follows:
/seqv,4000 ! indicate this creep has a constant stress of 4000 /temp,100 ! indicate this creep data is at a constant temperature of 100 /1,creq ! indicate first column is creep strain /2,dcreq ! indicate second column is creep strain rate 0.00215869 0.000203055 0.00406109 0.000181314 0.00664691 0.000165303 0.0102068 0.000152217 0.0151416 0.000140946 0.0220102 0.000130945
ANSYS provides thirteen model types for creep curve fitting. The model you choose will determine the experimental data required for the curve fitting process. The following table describes the creep data required to perform curve fitting for each model type. Note that for strain hardening and modified strain hardening, you need to input both creep strain and creep strain rate in the experimental data.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
99
9.3.1.2.1. Batch
The EADD argument of the TBFT command is used to identify and specify the location of your data files. The command syntax is:
TBFT,EADD,ID,Option1,Option2,Option3,Option4
Option1 = creep Option2 = name of file containing experimental data Option3 = file name extension Option4 = file directory
9.3.1.2.2. GUI
In interactive mode, you can input experimental data by typing the filename (with the appropriate path if the file is not in the default directory) into the appropriate area. You can also browse to a file in a particular location. Use the Add Data Set button to add additional data sets for creep curve fitting. There is no restriction on the number of data sets you can add.
9.3.1.3.1. Batch
TBFT,FADD,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3
Option2 = creep model abbreviation. See Table 9.6: Creep Models and Abbreviations.
910
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
The following table describes the creep models available and their abbreviated names for Option2 (above).
Note The experimental data must be consistent with the creep model you choose. See Table 9.5: Creep Model and Data/Type Attribute for the data types required for each creep model.
9.3.1.3.2. GUI
You can pick the appropriate model option from a menu in the data entry area. All of the options and constraints listed for batch input apply.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
911
Chapter 9: Material Curve Fitting For temperature dependent experimental data, you turn temperature dependency on and specify a reference temperature before you solve for the coefficients. You can set the reference temperature only to values specified using the /temp,value header line in the experimental data. You can also specify tref = all and initiate multiple solves to evaluate coefficients at all available discrete temperature values. In this case, for data at three temperatures (t1, t2, and t3), a single TBFT, SOLVE entry will initiate three different solve operations at those three discrete temperatures. With temperature dependency on and the reference temperature set to a particular value, a TBFT, SOLVE command solves for coefficients only at that temperature. To solve for coefficients at other temperatures, you set the reference temperature to each of the desired discrete temperature values and solve again. You can initialize the coefficients before or after turning temperature dependency on. If the coefficients are initialized before turning temperature dependency on, the specified coefficients will become the initial coefficients for all future solves for that particular model. These coefficients are, however, overridden when temperature dependency is turned on and another set of initial values is specified at discrete temperatures. The curve fitting tool looks for the initial coefficients at a particular temperature. If no coefficients are specified at discrete temperatures, the initial coefficients set before temperature dependency was turned on are used.
9.3.1.4.1. Batch
You define your coefficient values and temperature dependency using the SET option of the TBFT command, as follows:
TBFT,SET,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = creep model name Option3 = order, if applicable Option4 = index of coefficient Option5 = value of coefficient
Then you can modify the coefficients with the FIX option of the TBFT command.
TBFT,FIX,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = creep model name Option3 = order, if applicable Option4 = index of coefficient Option5 = 0 variable, 1 fixed
TBFT,SET,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = creep model name Option3 = order, if applicable Option4 = tdep or tref Option5 = For Option4 = tdep, 1 to turn on, 0 to turn off. For Option4 = tdep, a specific temp value, or all.
9.3.1.4.2. GUI
The models listed in Table 9.6: Creep Models and Abbreviations are available directly from the GUI. When you pick a model from the choices, ANSYS automatically configures the coefficients for the model. You can then make modifications, including initializing and/or fixing certain coefficients.
Section 9.3: Creep Material Curve Fitting option is normalized curve fitting. It usually yields better results than unnormalized curve fitting, since normalized fitting gives equal weight to all data points when minimizing the error norms. Other available solve criteria are number of iterations, residual tolerance, and coefficient change tolerance. The solution stops when both residual tolerance and coefficient change tolerance is met or if the number of iterations criteria is met. The coefficients are updated after every iteration during the solve process.
9.3.1.5.1. Batch
The batch command is:
TBFT,SOLVE,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3,Option4, ..., Option7
Option2 = creep function name (See Table 9.6: Creep Models and Abbreviations) Option3 = not applicable for creep models Option4 = error norm: 0 = unnormalized, 1 = normalized (default) Option5 = maximum number of iterations Option6 = tolerance of residual changes Option7 = tolerance of coefficient changes
Other solving parameters are available. See the TBFT command for details.
9.3.1.5.2. GUI
After you fill in the last set of coefficient values, the analysis moves automatically to the solution phase. Each of the options specified in the command line description is presented as a pull down menu or fill in box, and each option must be specified before Solve will begin. The coefficients are updated in the GUI after the solution is complete.
9.3.1.6.1. Batch
TBFT,PLOT,ID,Option1,Option2,Option3,Option4
913
9.3.1.6.2. GUI
You can simultaneously display many data sets for each function plotted. Each window of your display can be used to display each one of the data sets you are plotting against column one.
9.3.1.7.1. Batch
TBFT,FSET,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3
9.3.1.7.2. GUI
When you complete the process, click the Write to Database button to write the fitted coefficients of your creep model as a creep data table in ANSYS material database. You are then returned to the material properties dialog. The curve data can now be accessed for the full range of material behavior.
2 Time Hardening
914
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
4 Generalized Graham
5 Generalized Blackburn
9 Exponential Form
12 Prim+Sec Rational Polynomial Rational polynomial is a very complex model for curve fitting, with 10 coefficients. If you find it hard to fit this data, it is advisable that you split the experimental data into primary creep data and secondary creep data. Primary creep data is the initial part of the curve that covers the nonlinearity in the strain rate. Fit only the secondary data by fixing C1 to 1 and then set all other coefficients except C2, C3 and C4 to zero. Use a low value of C3 to keep 10C3 within floatingpoint range. Coefficients C5 to C10 in curve fitting refers to coefficients C7 to C12 in the implicit creep equation. Then add the primary creep data, release all coefficients, and solve. 13 Generalized Time Hardening Generalized time hardening has 6 coefficients. Set C6 to zero if you have temperature independent data. When initializing coefficients set C5 close to 1 to avoid floating-point overflows.
915
Chapter 9: Material Curve Fitting Curve fitting is performed either interactively or via batch commands. You input the experimental data, define the order of Prony series expansion, perform nonlinear regression, view the curve fitting results graphically, compare the experimental data, and write the fitted coefficients to the database as ANSYS nonlinear data table commands for the subsequent finite elements analyses. Current tools allow you to fit shear modulus and/or bulk modulus and/or shift functions, along with discrete temperature dependencies for multiple data sets.
9.4.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine the Coefficients of Viscoelastic Material Model
The steps for Viscoelastic Curve Fitting are defined as follows:
1 Section 9.4.1.1: Prepare Experimental Data The experimental data must be a plain text file delimited by a space or a comma.
2 Section 9.4.1.2: Input the Data into AN- The experimental data can be read into ANSYS from the GUI or via SYS batch commands, as a plain text file. 3 Section 9.4.1.3: Select a Material Model This includes Prony series expansion of shear and/or bulk moduli as Option well as shift function. The supported shift functions include WLF and TN. 4 Section 9.4.1.4: Initialize the Coefficients Viscoelastic curve fitting is a nonlinear regression; the initial value of your coefficients is very important for a successful solution. 5 Section 9.4.1.5: Specify Control Paramet- Specify the error norm to be used, the solution control parameters, ers and Solve and perform the nonlinear regression. 6 Section 9.4.1.6: Plot the Experimental Data and Analyze Graphically view the curve fitting results. Review and verify the results by comparing them with the experimental data and the regression errors. If any factor is not acceptable, repeat steps 3 to 7 to obtain a new curve fitting solution.
7 Section 9.4.1.7: Write Data to TB Com- Write your curve fitting results in TB command format to the ANSYS mand database.
916
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 9.4: Viscoelastic Material Curve Fitting The headers are used to describe the data types that characterize the test data columns or attributes of the data. The following listing contains the appropriate headers, followed by the delimited data:
/temp,100 ! define temperature attribute 0.01 2992.53 1 2978.514207 2 2965.45541 4 2942.293214 6 2922.530649 8 2905.612202 10 2891.073456 20 2842.506984 40 2798.142793 60 2772.383729 80 2750.631843 100 2730.398114 200 2643.125432 400 2517.475394 600 2431.262053 800 2366.580897 1000 2313.955396 2000 2117.922594 4000 1833.734397 6000 1627.199197 8000 1470.6806 10000 1347.264527 20000 964.0141125 40000 586.1405449 60000 392.186777 80000 277.2706253 100000 202.0025278 200000 46.87056342 400000 2.669209118 600000 0.156653269 800000 0.0137224 1000000 0.005591539
9.4.1.2.1. Batch
TBFT,EADD,ID,Option1,Option2,Option3,Option4
ID = index corresponding to the ANSYS material number Option1 = experimental data type, either sdec or bdec Option2 = name of file containing experimental data Option3 = file name extension Option4 = file directory
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
917
Chapter 9: Material Curve Fitting Note sdec refers to the shear modulus as a function of time and bdec refers to the bulk modulus as a function of time.
9.4.1.2.2. GUI
Click on the Add Dataset button and type the filename into the area provided. You can also browse to a file in a specified location. Separate input is performed for each data type (Option1 = sdec, or bdec)
9.4.1.3.1. Batch
You define a viscoelastic material with the Prony series expansion by creating a case and setting the order of shear modulus, bulk modulus, and shift options. You create the case with the TBFT, FCASE command. The first line will include FCASE, ID, NEW. Then you specify the number of shear terms, bulk terms, and the shift function. The case is actually created only after the option is issued. The following syntax examples and argument descriptions illustrate the relationship of these activities.
TBFT,FCASE,ID,NEW,Option2,Option3
CATEGORY = VISCO Option2 = pshear or pbulk or shift Option3 = dependent on Option2 as follows:
Option2 = pshear or bulk, Option3 = NONE, or 1 to N Option2 = shift, Option3 = NONE or TN or WLF
TBFT,FCASE,ID,FINI
9.4.1.3.2. GUI
You can use the GUI to interactively navigate the tree structure of the curve fitting window. Each of the shear, bulk and shift options can be selected, and you can fill in the appropriate casename in a text box field. As you choose the options, the coefficient table is automatically created.
918
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
9.4.1.4.1. Batch
TBFT,SET,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
919
For example:
TBFT,SET,1, myvisco1,,1,1.2 TBFT,SET,1, myvisco1,,2,1.5 ! Initialize the first coefficient to 1.2 ! Initialize the second coefficient to 1.5
Use the TBFT,FIX command to fix a coefficient to a value set by the TBFT, SET command or to release a previously fixed coefficient. By default, coefficients are not fixed.
TBFT,FIX,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = casename Option3 = not applicable Option4 = index of coefficient Option5 = 1 to fix, 0 to vary
For example:
TBFT,FIX,1, myvisco1,,1,1. TBFT,FIX,1, myvisco1,,2,1 ! Fix the first coefficient to a value set via TBFT,SET ! Fix the second coefficient to a value set via TBFT,SET
Temperature dependency uses Option4, and references data files you entered with the appropriate temp header.
TBFT,SET,ID,VISCO,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = model name. See Table 9.7: Viscoelastic Data Types and Abbreviations (above) for the models
available.
Option3 = not applicable Option4 = tdep or tref Option5 = If Option 4 = tdep, then 1 turns temperature dependency on and 0 turns it off. IfOption 4 =
9.4.1.4.2. GUI
The coefficients table is automatically updated in the viscoelastic curve fitting GUI window when the order of shear modulus and/or bulk modulus and/or shift function are defined. Specify values for your coefficients in the coefficients table in the curve fitting GUI window, and check the appropriate boxes to fix them or allow them to vary.
Section 9.4: Viscoelastic Material Curve Fitting amine the curve fitting results and the solution history before proceeding any further. You can then adjust parameters and resolve the problem whenever it is necessary.
921
Chapter 9: Material Curve Fitting 3. Solve the bulk coefficients (if there are any): Set the partial solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PBULK. Set the reference temperature at which your partial solution will be performed using TBFT, SET,,,,,TREF, TX. Only data at temperature TX will be used to estimate the shear coefficients. Initialize the coefficients. TBFT,SOLVE Repeat the above steps for all temperatures. Alternatively, you can solve for both shear and bulk data at the same time. 1. 2. Turn the temperature dependency flag on using the command TBFT, SET,,,,,TDEP,1. Solve for ALL coefficients. Set the partial solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PVHE. Set the reference temperature at which your partial solution will be performed using TBFT, SET,,,,,TREF, TX. Only data at temperature TX will be used to estimate shear and bulk coefficients Initialize the coefficients. TBFT,SOLVE Repeat the above steps for all of the desired temperatures.
9.4.1.5.3. Batch
Solution option command is:
TBFT,SET,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = casename Option3 = not applicable Option4 = comp Option5 = pshea (for Shear only) or pbulk (for bulk only)
The SOLVE option allows you to specify procedure types, tolerances, and number of iterations.
TBFT,SOLVE,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4, ..., Option7
Option2 = visco function name (See Table 9.7: Viscoelastic Data Types and Abbreviations.) Option3 = not applicable Option4 = curve fitting procedure: 0 = unnormalized least squares, 1 = normalized least squares (default) Option5 = maximum number of iterations Option6 = tolerance of residual changes Option7 = tolerance of coefficient changes
Other solving parameters are available. See the TBFT command for details.
922
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
9.4.1.5.4. GUI
The GUI provides access for you to choose your error norm, solution control parameters, and solver options. Once you complete these specifications and SOLVE, you can go back and modify your parameters as necessary to obtain a good curve fit.
9.4.1.6.1. Batch
You enter the plotting parameters from the command line as follows:
TBFT,PLOT,ID,ExpIndex,CASE,Option3
Option3 = casename
9.4.1.6.2. GUI
The Graph button provides direct means to plot the data.
9.4.1.7.1. Batch
TBFT,FSET,ID,Option2,Option3
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
923
9.4.1.7.2. GUI
Click the Write to Database button and the fitted coefficients are automatically written to the ANSYS material database according Prony data table. Please note that the coefficients you see in the curve fitting module are different from those in the TB tables. The values remain the same, but the values are different. The values shown in ANSYS are the square of the values derived during curve fitting. They are also normalized to make at time 0 = 1.
924
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
2.
3.
4.
5.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Chapter 10: Gasket Joints Simulation elements. See Section 10.7: Solution Procedure and Result Output in this chapter for more details on this topic. 6. Review Results. You can print or plot any of four gasket output items: stresses (also pressure), total closure, total inelastic closure, and thermal closure, using the PRESOL, PRNSOL, PLESOL, PLNSOL, or ESOL commands. You can also use these items with the *GET command in POST1. See Section 10.8: Reviewing the Results in this chapter for more details on this topic.
102
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
The 2-D elements, INTER192 and INTER193, use a KEYOPT to define various stress state options.
Proper element type is chosen based on the stress states of interest and structural element types used. Element selection is done by the element type command, ET, for example,
ET,1,195
10.4.2. Applications
In general, linear and quadratic elements are chosen for the following reasons: Fewer nodes produce a smaller model that runs faster with less computer resources. Quadratic elements are necessary if stress gradients are present in surrounding bodies. If elements are to follow a curved boundary closely, quadratic elements are ideal because their edges are arcs. With a free mesh (tetrahedral elements) the mid-node (quadratic) is required for an accurate solution.
When a surrounding structure can be considered as a 2-D structure, for example, plane stress / strain / axisymmetric, 2-D elements are the ideal choice. A good example of the use of 2-D element INTER192 or INTER193 is the gasket between the "flanged" ends of pipe line. In this case the gasket properties do not vary significantly with geometric location.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
103
Chapter 10: Gasket Joints Simulation For a 3-D structure such as an internal combustion engine, 3-D element INTER194 or INTER195 is a good choice for simulating the gasket between the cylinder head and block. In this case there is no "nice" geometry because the gasket must fill in between two complicated surfaces, in between cylinders, and around other holes and passages. Also the gasket properties can vary in different zones. For example in a cylinder head, there is usually a much stiffer zone immediately around the cylinder to contain combustion pressure (called the "fire ring"). The remainder of the gasket is much softer.
104
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
You input the general parameters using the TBDATA command, then input the compression and unloading data using the TBPT command. Presented in the following sections are examples of inputs for the various types of gasket data.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
105
Refer to Gasket Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference for further details on these parameters.
where: xi, yi are pairs of closure and pressure values. The following input listing is an example defining a compressive pressure vs. closure behavior of a gasket joint material with 10 data points.
TB,GASKET,1, ,10,COMP TBPT,, 0.20000E-04, 0.54000E+08 TBPT,, 0.40000E-04, 0.15150E+09 TBPT,, 0.60000E-04, 0.24900E+09 TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, 0.30000E+09 TBPT,, 0.12000E-03, 0.37200E+09 TBPT,, 0.19000E-03, 0.47400E+09 TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, 0.58500E+09 TBPT,, 0.35800E-03, 0.67350E+09 TBPT,, 0.43200E-03, 0.78000E+09 TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, 0.89550E+09 ! define compression data
where: NPTS is the number of unloading points; xi is the closure where unloading started, and yi is unloading slope. The following input listing is an example showing the linear unloading behavior of a gasket joint material with 3 unloading points
TB,GASKET,1, ,3,LUNL ! define linear unloading data TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, 0.25100E+12
106
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
A sample plot representing linear unloading curves is shown in Figure 10.3: Gasket Material Input: Linear Unloading Curves.
where: xi, yi are pairs of closure and pressure values. Several unloading curves can be defined. An example showing the nonlinear unloading behavior of a gasket joint material with 3 unloading points is as follows:
TB,GASKET,1, ,5,NUNL ! define first nonlinear unloading data TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, 0.30000E+09 TBPT,, 0.66900E-04, 0.24750E+08 TBPT,, 0.63100E-04, 0.82500E+07 TBPT,, 0.54100E-04, 0.15000E+07 TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, 0.00000E+00 TB,GASKET,1, ,5,NUNL ! define second nonlinear unloading data
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
107
TB,GASKET,1, ,5,NUNL TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, 0.89550E+09 TBPT,, 0.47800E-03, 0.33900E+08 TBPT,, 0.47500E-03, 0.13500E+08 TBPT,, 0.46800E-03, 0.15000E+07 TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, 0.00000E+00
A sample plot representing nonlinear unloading curves is shown in Figure 10.4: Gasket Material Input: Nonlinear Unloading Curves.
ANSYS will automatically interpolate the temperature data to the material points using linear interpolation. When the temperature is out of the specified range, the closest temperature point is used.
108
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 10.5: Material Definition The following is an example input listing defining a compressive pressure vs. closure behavior of a gasket joint material with 5 temperature points and up to 10 data points for each temperature point, and 3 nonlinear unloading curves with each curve having 5 temperatures and 5 data points.
TB,GASKET,1, 5,10,COMP ! define compression data with 5 temperatures TBTEMP, 100.000 TBPT,, 0.20000E-04, 0.54000E+08 TBPT,, 0.40000E-04, 0.15150E+09 TBPT,, 0.60000E-04, 0.24900E+09 TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, 0.30000E+09 TBPT,, 0.12000E-03, 0.37200E+09 TBPT,, 0.19000E-03, 0.47400E+09 TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, 0.58500E+09 TBPT,, 0.35800E-03, 0.67350E+09 TBPT,, 0.43200E-03, 0.78000E+09 TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, 0.89550E+09 TBTEMP, 200.000 TBPT,, 0.20000E-04, TBPT,, 0.40000E-04, TBPT,, 0.60000E-04, TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, TBPT,, 0.12000E-03, TBPT,, 0.19000E-03, TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, TBPT,, 0.35800E-03, TBPT,, 0.43200E-03, TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, TBTEMP, 300.000 TBPT,, 0.20000E-04, TBPT,, 0.40000E-04, TBPT,, 0.60000E-04, TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, TBPT,, 0.12000E-03, TBPT,, 0.19000E-03, TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, TBPT,, 0.35800E-03, TBPT,, 0.43200E-03, TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, TBTEMP, 400.000 TBPT,, 0.20000E-04, TBPT,, 0.40000E-04, TBPT,, 0.60000E-04, TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, TBPT,, 0.12000E-03, TBPT,, 0.19000E-03, TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, TBPT,, 0.35800E-03, TBPT,, 0.43200E-03, TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, TBTEMP, 500.000 TBPT,, 0.20000E-04, TBPT,, 0.40000E-04, TBPT,, 0.60000E-04, TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, TBPT,, 0.12000E-03, TBPT,, 0.19000E-03, TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, TBPT,, 0.35800E-03, TBPT,, 0.43200E-03, TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
0.18000E+08 0.50500E+08 0.83000E+08 0.10000E+09 0.12400E+09 0.15800E+09 0.19500E+09 0.22450E+09 0.26000E+09 0.29850E+09
0.90000E+07 0.25250E+08 0.41500E+08 0.50000E+08 0.62000E+08 0.79000E+08 0.97500E+08 0.11225E+09 0.13000E+09 0.14925E+09
0.36000E+07 0.10100E+08 0.16600E+08 0.20000E+08 0.24800E+08 0.31600E+08 0.39000E+08 0.44900E+08 0.52000E+08 0.59700E+08
0.18000E+07 0.50500E+07 0.83000E+07 0.10000E+08 0.12400E+08 0.15800E+08 0.19500E+08 0.22450E+08 0.26000E+08 0.29850E+08
TB,GASKET,1, 5,5,NUNL ! define first nonlinear unloading data with 5 temperatures TBTEMP, 100.000 TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, 0.30000E+09 TBPT,, 0.66900E-04, 0.24750E+08 TBPT,, 0.63100E-04, 0.82500E+07 TBPT,, 0.54100E-04, 0.15000E+07
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
109
TB,GASKET,1, 5,5,NUNL ! define second nonlinear unloading data with 5 temperatures TBTEMP, 100.000 TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, 0.58500E+09 TBPT,, 0.26400E-03, 0.22350E+08 TBPT,, 0.26100E-03, 0.90000E+07 TBPT,, 0.25600E-03, 0.15000E+07 TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, 0.00000E+00 TBTEMP, 200.000 TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, TBPT,, 0.26400E-03, TBPT,, 0.26100E-03, TBPT,, 0.25600E-03, TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, TBTEMP, 300.000 TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, TBPT,, 0.26400E-03, TBPT,, 0.26100E-03, TBPT,, 0.25600E-03, TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, TBTEMP, 400.000 TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, TBPT,, 0.26400E-03, TBPT,, 0.26100E-03, TBPT,, 0.25600E-03, TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, TBTEMP, 500.000 TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, TBPT,, 0.26400E-03, TBPT,, 0.26100E-03, TBPT,, 0.25600E-03, TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
TB,GASKET,1, 5,5,NUNL ! define third nonlinear unloading data with 5 temperatures TBTEMP, 100.000 TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, 0.89550E+09 TBPT,, 0.47800E-03, 0.33900E+08 TBPT,, 0.47500E-03, 0.13500E+08 TBPT,, 0.46800E-03, 0.15000E+07
1010
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Sample plots of compression and unloading curves for gasket data to two temperatures is shown in Figure 10.5: Gasket Compression and Unloading Curves at Two Temperatures.
'%526' 2 2 ( $ " 3 1 0 )
Chapter 10: Gasket Joints Simulation TBPLOT,GASKET,MAT,TBOPT,TEMP,SEGN where TBOPT specifies the gasket material option to be plotted, TEMP specifies plotting either all of the temperature dependent data curves, or a curve at a specified temperature, and SEGN specifies whether or not to add the segment numbers to the curves.
There are special requirements for meshing interface elements. See Section 7.5.6: Generating an Interface Mesh for Gasket Simulations in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for further details on this type of meshing. The following example input listing shows the use of the IMESH command.
/batch,list /title, Test to demonstrate the use of IMESH command /com, ************************************************************ /com, * * /com, * This is a simple test to demonstrate the use of IMESH * /com, * command to generate gasket elements. The model consists * /com, * of two blocks with gasket elements (INTER194) defined * /com, * between them. * /com, * * /com, ************************************************************ /prep7 !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Define Element Types !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ et,1,187 ! Solid tetrahedral element et,2,194 ! Interface layer element !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Define Parameters !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ EH=1.0 IH=0.1 DX=0 DY=0 DZ=IH Z1=EH Z2=Z1+IH Z3=Z2+EH !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Generate Keypoints !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ k,1,0,0 k,2,1,0 k,3,1,1 k,4,0,1 k,5,0,0,z1 k,6,1,0,z1 k,7,1,1,z1 k,8,0,1,z1 k,9,0,0,z2 k,10,1,0,z2 k,11,1,1,z2 k,12,0,1,z2
1012
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Figure 10.6: Gasket Finite Element Model Geometry shows the geometry of the finite element model, a thin interface layer between two block volumes. Figure 10.7: Whole Model Mesh with Brick Element shows the mesh with solid brick element, SOLID185, in top and bottom of block volumes, and Figure 10.8: Interface Layer Mesh shows the mesh of interface element, INTER195, in the interface layer between the two blocks. Figure 10.9: Whole Model Tetrahedral Mesh shows the mesh with solid tetrahedral element, SOLID187, in top and bottom of block volumes, and Figure 10.10: Interface Layer Mesh with Degenerated Wedge Elements shows the mesh of interface element (degenerated wedge), INTER194, in the interface layer between the two blocks.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
1013
1014
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
1015
Like any other type of nonlinear analysis, the ANSYS program performs a series of linear approximations with corrections. A convergence failure can indicate a physical instability in the structure, or it can merely be the result of some numerical problem in the finite element model. The program printout gives you continuous feedback on the progress of these approximations and corrections. (The printout either appears directly on your screen, is captured on Jobname.OUT, or is written to some other file [/OUTPUT].) You can examine some of this same information in POST1, using the PRITER command, or in POST26, using the SOLU and PRVAR commands. You should make sure that you understand the iteration history of your analysis before you accept the results. In 1016
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 10.7: Solution Procedure and Result Output particular, do not dismiss any program error or warning statements without fully understanding their meaning. A typical output listing with gasket nonlinearity only is shown in Section 10.7.1: Typical Gasket Solution Output Listing. When other types of nonlinearity such as contact or materials are included, additional information will be printed out.
*** NOTE *** CP= 0.000 TIME= 00:00:00 Present time 0 is less than or equal to the previous time. Time will default to 1. *** NOTE *** CP= 0.000 TIME= 00:00:00
Nonlinear analysis, NROPT set to the FULL Newton-Raphson solution procedure for ALL DOFs. *** NOTE *** CP= 0.000 TIME= 00:00:00
The conditions for direct assembly have been met. files will be produced. L O A D S T E P
No .emat or .erot
O P T I O N S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOAD STEP NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . TIME AT END OF THE LOAD STEP. . . . . . . AUTOMATIC TIME STEPPING . . . . . . . . . INITIAL NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . . MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . . MINIMUM NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . . MAXIMUM NUMBER OF EQUILIBRIUM ITERATIONS. STEP CHANGE BOUNDARY CONDITIONS . . . . . TERMINATE ANALYSIS IF NOT CONVERGED . . . CONVERGENCE CONTROLS. . . . . . . . . . . COPY INTEGRATION POINT VALUES TO NODE . .
. 1 . 1.0000 . ON . 200 . 20000 . 20 . 15 . NO .YES (EXIT) .USE DEFAULTS .YES, FOR ELEMENTS WITH ACTIVE MAT. NONLINEARITIES PRINT OUTPUT CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . .NO PRINTOUT DATABASE OUTPUT CONTROLS ITEM FREQUENCY COMPONENT ALL ALL SVAR ALL Range of element maximum matrix coefficients in global coordinates Maximum= 4.326388889E+11 at element 0. Minimum= 388758681 at element 0. *** ELEMENT MATRIX FORMULATION TIMES TYPE NUMBER ENAME TOTAL CP AVE CP 1 2 SOLID185 0.000 0.000000 2 1 INTER195 0.000 0.000000 Time at end of element matrix formulation CP= 0. ALL CURRENT ANSYS DATA WRITTEN TO FILE NAME= FOR POSSIBLE RESUME FROM THIS POINT FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.4200E+07 CRITERION= 0.2143E+05 SPARSE MATRIX DIRECT SOLVER. Number of equations = 24, Memory available (MB) = 0.0 DISP CONVERGENCE VALUE EQUIL ITER 1 COMPLETED.
0 =
0.0
= 0.1130E-04 CRITERION= 0.2000E-06 NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= -0.4000E-05
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
1017
*** NODAL LOAD CALCULATION TIMES TYPE NUMBER ENAME TOTAL CP 1 2 2 1 SOLID185 INTER195 0.000 0.000
*** LOAD STEP 1 SUBSTEP 1 COMPLETED. CUM ITER = *** TIME = 0.500000E-02 TIME INC = 0.500000E-02 *** AUTO STEP TIME: NEXT TIME INC = 0.50000E-02 UNCHANGED
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.7716E-09 CRITERION= 100.6 DISP CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.1951E-20 CRITERION= 0.2000E-06 <<< CONVERGED EQUIL ITER 1 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= 0.1642E-20 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.4624E-09 CRITERION= 102.7 <<< CONVERGED >>> SOLUTION CONVERGED AFTER EQUILIBRIUM ITERATION 1 *** LOAD STEP 1 SUBSTEP 2 COMPLETED. CUM ITER = 3 *** TIME = 0.100000E-01 TIME INC = 0.500000E-02 *** AUTO TIME STEP: NEXT TIME INC = 0.75000E-02 INCREASED (FACTOR = 1.5000) FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.1964E-08 CRITERION= 176.1 DISP CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.3748E-20 CRITERION= 0.3000E-06 <<< CONVERGED EQUIL ITER 1 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= -0.2744E-20 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.8307E-09 CRITERION= 179.7 <<< CONVERGED >>> SOLUTION CONVERGED AFTER EQUILIBRIUM ITERATION 1 *** LOAD STEP 1 SUBSTEP 3 COMPLETED. CUM ITER = 4 *** TIME = 0.175000E-01 TIME INC = 0.750000E-02 *** AUTO TIME STEP: NEXT TIME INC = 0.11250E-01 INCREASED (FACTOR = 1.5000) FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.3713E-08 CRITERION= 289.4 DISP CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.7198E-20 CRITERION= 0.4500E-06 <<< CONVERGED EQUIL ITER 1 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= -0.4503E-20 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.1468E-08 CRITERION= 295.3 <<< CONVERGED >>> SOLUTION CONVERGED AFTER EQUILIBRIUM ITERATION 1 *** LOAD STEP 1 SUBSTEP 4 COMPLETED. CUM ITER = 5 *** TIME = 0.287500E-01 TIME INC = 0.112500E-01 *** AUTO TIME STEP: NEXT TIME INC = 0.16875E-01 INCREASED (FACTOR = 1.5000) FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.1833E-07 CRITERION= 459.2 DISP CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.3753E-19 CRITERION= 0.6750E-06 <<< CONVERGED EQUIL ITER 1 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= 0.1800E-19 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.3550E-08 CRITERION= 468.6 <<< CONVERGED >>> SOLUTION CONVERGED AFTER EQUILIBRIUM ITERATION 1 *** LOAD STEP 1 SUBSTEP 5 COMPLETED. CUM ITER = 6 *** TIME = 0.456250E-01 TIME INC = 0.168750E-01 *** AUTO TIME STEP: NEXT TIME INC = 0.25313E-01 INCREASED (FACTOR = 1.5000) FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.2322E-07 CRITERION= 714.0 DISP CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.4656E-19 CRITERION= 0.1013E-05 <<< CONVERGED EQUIL ITER 1 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= -0.2664E-19 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.6406E-08 CRITERION= 728.5 <<< CONVERGED >>> SOLUTION CONVERGED AFTER EQUILIBRIUM ITERATION 1 *** LOAD STEP 1 SUBSTEP 6 COMPLETED. CUM ITER = 7 *** TIME = 0.709375E-01 TIME INC = 0.253125E-01 *** AUTO TIME STEP: NEXT TIME INC = 0.37969E-01 INCREASED (FACTOR = 1.5000)
1018
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Enter POST1. If your model is not currently in the database, issue RESUME. Command(s): /POST1 GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc Read in results for the desired load step and substep, which can be identified by load step and substep numbers or by time. Command(s): SET GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> load step Display the results using any of the following options. Note that gasket results, such as pressure and closure, are always displayed and listed in the local coordinate system. Option: Display Deformed Shape Command(s): PLDISP GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape Option: Contour Displays Command(s): PLNSOL or PLESOL GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu or Element Solu Use these options to display contours of stresses, strains, or any other applicable item. When displaying the gasket pressure distribution, if other structural mating components are not included, ANSYS will plot the geometry of those components in gray. To have a better visualization of a gasket pressure plot, it is better for you to select gasket elements only.
3.
4.
1019
Chapter 10: Gasket Joints Simulation Command(s): PRNSOL (nodal results) PRESOL (element-by-element results) PRRSOL (reaction data) PRITER (substep summary data), etc. GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Nodal Solution Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Element Solution Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Reaction Solution Option: Animation You can also animate gasket results over time: Command(s): ANTIME GUI: Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Animate> Over Time Other Capabilities Many other postprocessing functions are available in POST1. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details. Load case combinations usually are not valid for nonlinear analyses.
1020
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 10.9: Sample Gasket Element Verification Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
/com, ************************************************************** /prep7 !*+++++++++++++++++++++ !* Define Element Types !*+++++++++++++++++++++ et,1,185 et,2,195 !*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Define Linear Elastic Material Type 1 !*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ mp,ex,1,2.1E12 mp,nuxy,1,0.0 !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Define Initial Gap, Stable Stiffness, Stress Cap !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ delta0 = 0.00e-3 stiff0 = 0.0e7 scap = 1.0e-5 tb,gasket,2,,,para tbdata, 1,delta0,stiff0,scap !*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Define Gasket Compression Curve !*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ tb,gask,2,1,13,comp tbpt,,0.460800E-03, 0.161226E+07 tbpt,,0.511600E-03, 0.520884E+07 tbpt,,0.562400E-03, 0.113134E+08 tbpt,,0.613200E-03, 0.200499E+08 tbpt,,0.664000E-03, 0.259960E+08 tbpt,,0.714800E-03, 0.290345E+08 tbpt,,0.765600E-03, 0.357453E+08 tbpt,,0.816400E-03, 0.440064E+08 tbpt,,0.867200E-03, 0.563189E+08 tbpt,,0.918000E-03, 0.748254E+08 tbpt,,0.968800E-03, 0.967287E+08 tbpt,,0.101960E-02, 0.129001E+09 tbpt,,0.109326E-02, 0.157147E+09 !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Define Gasket Linear Unloading Curve !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ tb,gask,2,1,5,lunl tbpt,,0.460800E-03, 2.430000E+11 tbpt,,0.714800E-03, 3.565000E+11 tbpt,,0.816400E-03, 5.92300E+11 tbpt,,0.968800E-03, 1.088000e+12 tbpt,,0.109326E-02, 1.490000E+12 !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* List Gasket Material Model !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++ tblist,gask,all !*++++++++++++++++++ !* Define Parameters !*++++++++++++++++++ n1 = 20 n2 = n1*100 n3 = n1 dis1 = -0.0008 dis2 = -0.000001 pres = 1.0e7 pres2 = 10 pres3 = 1.4E8 dp = -2.0e7 elb = 1.0 elg = 0.1
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
1021
1022
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 10.9: Sample Gasket Element Verification Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
/post1 set,last pres,s pres,epto pres,epel prns,epel finish !*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Post26, Print and Plot Gasket Element Results !*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ /post26 esol,2,3, ,s,x,press esol,3,3, ,epel,x,delta add,4,2, , ,press,,,-1, ! change sign for plotting add,5,3,,,delta,,,-1, ! change sign for plotting prvar,2,3,4,5 xvar,5 plvar,4 finish /exit,nosave
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
1023
1024
See Chapter 2, Structural Static Analysis for details about the general static analysis procedure. Also see Chapter 8, Nonlinear Structural Analysis for a discussion of structural nonlinearities.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
In linear elastic problems, it has been shown that the displacements near the crack tip (or crack front) vary as r , where r is the distance from the crack tip. The stresses and strains are singular at the crack tip, varying as
r . To pick up the singularity in the strain, the crack faces should be coincident, and the elements around the 1/ crack tip (or crack front) should be quadratic, with the midside nodes placed at the quarter points. Such elements are called singular elements. Figure 11.2: Examples of Singular Elements shows examples of singular elements for 2-D and 3-D models.
112
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
113
Chapter 11: Fracture Mechanics the radius of the first row of elements, number of elements in the circumferential direction, etc. Figure 11.3: A Fracture Specimen and 2-D FE Model shows a fracture model generated with the help of KSCON.
Other modeling guidelines for 2-D models are as follows: Take advantage of symmetry where possible. In many cases, you need to model only one half of the crack region, with symmetry or antisymmetry boundary conditions, as shown below.
For reasonable results, the first row of elements around the crack tip should have a radius of approximately a/8 or smaller, where a is the crack length. In the circumferential direction, roughly one element every 30 or 40 is recommended. The crack tip elements should not be distorted, and should take the shape of isosceles triangles.
114
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 11.2: Solving Fracture Mechanics Problems Generating a 3-D fracture model is considerably more involved than a 2-D model. The KSCON command is not available, and you need to make sure that the crack front is along edge KO of the elements. Other meshing guidelines for 3-D models are as follows: Element size recommendations are the same as for 2-D models. In addition, aspect ratios should not exceed approximately 4 to 1 in all directions. For curved crack fronts, the element size along the crack front will depend on the amount of local curvature. As a rough guide, you should have at least one element every 15 to 30 along a circular crack front. All element edges should be straight, including the edge on the crack front.
(a) 2-D Models and (b) 3-D Models 2. Define a path along the crack face. The first node on the path should be the crack-tip node. For a halfcrack model, two additional nodes are required, both along the crack face. For a full-crack model, where
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
115
Chapter 11: Fracture Mechanics both crack faces are included, four additional nodes are required: two along one crack face and two along the other. The following figure illustrates the two cases for a 2-D model. Command(s): PATH, PPATH GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Path Operations> Define Path
(a) a half-crack model and (b) a full-crack model 3. Calculate KI, KII, and KIII. The KPLAN field on the KCALC command specifies whether the model is planestrain or plane stress. Except for the analysis of thin plates, the asymptotic or near-crack-tip behavior of stress is usually thought to be that of plane strain. The KCSYM field specifies whether the model is a halfcrack model with symmetry boundary conditions, a half-crack model with antisymmetry boundary conditions, or a full-crack model. Command(s): KCALC GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Nodal Calcs> Stress Int Factr
11.2.2.2. J-Integral
In its simplest form, the J-integral can be defined as a path-independent line integral that measures the strength of the singular stresses and strains near a crack tip. The following equation shows an expression for J in its 2-D form is shown below. It assumes that the crack lies in the global Cartesian X-Y plane, with X parallel to the crack (see Figure 11.7: J-Integral Contour Path Surrounding a Crack-Tip). uy u J = r Wdy r t x x + t y ds x x where: = any path surrounding the crack tip W = strain energy density (that is, strain energy per unit volume) tx = traction vector along x axis = xnx + xy ny ty = traction vector along y axis = yny + xy nx = component stress n = unit outer normal vector to path u = displacement vector s = distance along the path
116
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Follow these steps to calculate J for a 2-D model: 1. Read in the desired set of results. Command(s): SET GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> First Set Store the volume and strain energy per element. Command(s): ETABLE GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Element Table> Define Table Calculate the strain energy density per element. Command(s): SEXP GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Element Table> Exponentiate Define a path for the line integral. Figure 11.8: Examples of Paths for J-integral Calculation shows examples of such paths. Command(s): PATH, PPATH GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Path Operations> Define Path
2.
3.
4.
5.
Map the strain energy density, which was stored in the element table in step 1, onto the path.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
117
Chapter 11: Fracture Mechanics Command(s): PDEF GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Path Operations> Map Onto Path 6. Integrate it with respect to global Y. Command(s): PCALC GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Path Operations> Integrate Assign the final value of the integral to a parameter. This gives us the first term of equation 10.1. Command(s): *GET,Name,PATH,,LAST GUI: Utility Menu> Parameters> Get Scalar Data Map the component stresses SX, SY, and SXY onto the path. Command(s): PDEF GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Path Operations> Map Onto Path Define the path unit normal vector. Command(s): PVECT GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Path Operations> Unit Vector
7.
8.
9.
10. Calculate TX and TY using the expressions shown with equation 10.1. Command(s): PCALC GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Path Operations> operation 11. Shift the path a small distance in the positive and negative X directions to calculate the derivatives of the displacement vector (ux/x and uy/y). The following steps are involved (see Figure 19.13: The Three Basic Modes of Fracture in the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference): Calculate the distance by which the path is to be shifted, say DX. A rule of thumb is to use one percent of the total length of the path. You can obtain the total path length as a parameter using *GET,Name,PATH,,LAST,S. Shift the path a distance of DX/2 in the negative X direction [PCALC,ADD,XG,XG,,,,-DX/2] and map the displacements UX and UY onto the path [PDEF], giving them labels UX1 and UY1, for example. Shift the path a distance of DX in the positive X direction (that is, +DX/2 from its original position) and map UX and UY onto the path, giving them labels UX2 and UY2, for example. Shift the path back to its original location (a distance of -DX/2) and calculate the quantities (UX2UX1)/DX and (UY2-UY1)/DX using PCALC. These quantities represent ux/x and uy/y, respectively.
See the ANSYS Coupled-Field Analysis Guide for a discussion of the *GET, PCALC and PDEF commands. 12. Using the quantities calculated in steps 10 and 11, calculate the integrand in the second term of J [PCALC] and integrate it with respect to the path distance S [PCALC]. This gives the second term of equation 10.1. 13. Calculate J according to equation 10.1, using the quantities calculated in steps 5-7 and 12. You can simplify the J-integral calculations by writing a macro that performs the above operations. (Macros are described in the ANSYS APDL Programmer's Guide.)
Section 11.2: Solving Fracture Mechanics Problems Ua U G = a +a Ba where B is the thickness of the fracture model. Extend the crack length by a for the second analysis by selecting all nodes in the vicinity of the crack and scaling them in the X direction [NSCALE] (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Operate> Scale) by the factor a. Note If you used solid modeling, you will first need to detach the solid model from the finite element model [MODMSH,DETACH] (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Checking Ctrls) before scaling the nodes. The "vicinity of the crack" is usually taken to mean all nodes within a radius of a/2 from the crack tip. Also, the factor a for node scaling is usually in the range of 1/2 to 2 percent of the crack length.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
119
1110
Chapter 12: Composites SHELL181 is a 4-node 3-D shell element with 6 degrees of freedom at each node. The element has full nonlinear capabilities including large strain and allows 255 layers. The layer information is input using the section commands rather than real constants. Failure criteria is available using the FC commands. SOLID46 - 3-D Layered Structural Solid Element SOLID46 is a layered version of the 8-node, 3-D solid element, SOLID45, with three degrees of freedom per node (UX, UY, UZ). It is designed to model thick layered shells or layered solids and allows up to 250 uniform-thickness layers per element. Alternately, the element allows 125 layers with thicknesses that may vary bilinearly over the area of the layer. An advantage with this element type is that you can stack several elements to model more than 250 layers to allow through-the-thickness deformation slope discontinuities. The user-input constitutive matrix option is also available. SOLID46 adjusts the material properties in the transverse direction permitting constant stresses in the transverse direction. In comparison to the 8-node shells, SOLID46 is a lower order element and finer meshes may be required for shell applications to provide the same accuracy as SHELL91 or SHELL99 . SOLID191 - Layered Structural Solid Element SOLID191 is a layered version of the 20-node 3-D solid element SOLID95, with three degrees of freedom per node (UX, UY, UZ). It is designed to model thick layered shells or layered solids and allows up to 100 layers per element. As with SOLID46, SOLID191 can be stacked to model through-the-thickness discontinuities. SOLID191 has an option to adjust the material properties in the transverse direction permitting constant stresses in the transverse direction. In spite of its name, the element does not support nonlinear materials or large deflections. In addition to the layered elements mentioned above, other composite element capabilities exist in ANSYS, but will not be considered further in the chapter: SOLID95, the 20-node structural solid element, with KEYOPT(1) = 1 functions similarly to a single layered SOLID191 including the use of an orientation angle and failure criterion. It allows nonlinear materials and large deflections. SHELL63, the 4-node shell element, can be used for rough, approximate studies of sandwich shell models. A typical application would be a polymer between two metal plates, where the bending stiffness of the polymer would be small relative to the bending stiffness of the metal plates. The bending stiffness can be adjusted by the real constant RMI to represent the bending stiffness due to the metal plates, and distances from the middle surface to extreme fibers (real constants CTOP, CBOT) can be used to obtain output stress estimates on the outer surfaces of the sandwich shell. It is not used as frequently as SHELL91, SHELL99, or SHELL181, and will not be considered for anything other than sandwich structures in this section. SOLID65, the 3D Reinforced Concrete Solid Element, models an isotropic medium with optional reinforcing in 3 different user-defined orientations. BEAM188 and BEAM189, the 3D finite strain beam elements, can have their sections built up with multiple materials.
122
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 12.2: Modeling Composites By defining constitutive matrices that relate generalized forces and moments to generalized strains and curvatures (available only for SOLID46 and SHELL99 )
For each layer, the following properties are specified in the element real constant table [R, RMORE, RMODIF] (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Real Constants) (accessed with REAL attributes). Material properties (via a material reference number MAT) Layer orientation angle commands (THETA) Layer thickness (TK)
Layered sections may also be defined through the Section Tool (Prep>Sections>Shell Add/edit). For each layer, the following are specified in the section definition through the section commands; or through the Section Tool (SECTYPE, SECDATA) (accessed with the SECNUM attributes). Material properties (via a material reference number MAT) Layer orientation angle commands (THETA) Layer thickness (TK) Number of integration points per layer (NUMPT)
Material Properties - As with any other element, the MP command (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models> Structural> Linear> Elastic> Isotropic or Orthotropic) is used to define the linear material properties, and the TB command is used to define the nonlinear material data tables (plasticity is only available for elements SOLID191 and SHELL91). The only difference is that the material attribute number for each layer of an element is specified in the element's real constant table. For the layered elements, the MAT command (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> Default Attribs) attribute is only used for the DAMP and REFT arguments of the MP command. The linear material properties for each layer may be either isotropic or orthotropic (see Linear Material Properties in the ANSYS Elements Reference). Typical fiber-reinforced composites contain orthotropic materials and these properties are most often supplied in the major Poisson's ratio form (see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference). Material property directions are parallel to the layer coordinate system, which is defined by the element coordinate system and the layer orientation angle (described below). Layer Orientation Angle- This defines the orientation of the layer coordinate system with respect to the element coordinate system. It is the angle (in degrees) between X-axes of the two systems. By default, the layer coordinate system is parallel to the element coordinate system. All elements have a default coordinate system which you
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
123
Chapter 12: Composites can change using the ESYS element attribute [ESYS] (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> Default Attribs). You may also write your own subroutines to define the element and layer coordinate systems (USERAN and USANLY); see the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for details. Layer Thickness- If the layer thickness is constant, you only need to specify TK(I), the thickness at node I. Otherwise, the thicknesses at the four corner nodes must be input. Dropped layers may be represented with zero thickness. Number of integration points per layer- This allows you to determine in how much detail the program should compute the results. For very thin layers, when used with many other layers, one point would be appropriate. But for laminates with few layers, more would be needed. The default is 3 points. This feature applies only to sections defined through the section commands. Note Currently, the GUI only allows layer real constant input of up to 100 layers. If more layers are needed for SHELL99 or SOLID46, the R and RMORE commands must be used.
The terms of the matrices are defined as real constants. Mass effects are incorporated by specifying an average density (real constants AVDENS) for the element. If the matrix approach is used, detailed results in each layer cannot be obtained since individual layer information is not input.
You can model sandwich structures with SHELL63, SHELL91, or SHELL181. SHELL63 has one layer but permits sandwich modeling through the use of real constants. You can modify the effective bending moment of inertia and the distance from the middle surface to the extreme fibers to account for the weak core. KEYOPT(9) = 1 of SHELL91 specifies the sandwich option. The core is assumed to carry all of the transverse shear; the faceplates carry none. Conversely, the faceplates are assumed to carry all (or almost all) of the bending load. Only SHELL91 has this sandwich option.
124
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 12.2: Modeling Composites SHELL181 models the transverse shear deflection using as energy equivalence method that makes the need for a sandwich option unnecessary
The failure strains, stresses, and coupling coefficients may be temperature-dependent. See the ANSYS Elements Reference for details about the data required for each criterion. To specify a failure criterion, use either the family of TB commands or the family of FC commands. The TB commands areTB, TBTEMP, and TBDATA. (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Failure Criteria). A typical sequence of commands to specify a failure criterion using these commands is shown below.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
125
The FC commands are FC, FCDELE, and FCLIST commands (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models> Structural> Nonlinear> Inelastic> Non-Metal Plasticity> Failure Criteria) and (Main Menu> General Postproc> Failure Criteria). A typical sequence of commands to specify a failure criterion using these commands is shown below.
FC,1,TEMP,, 100, FC,1,S,XTEN, 1500, FC,1,S,YTEN, 400, FC,1,S,ZTEN,10000, FC,1,S,XY , 200, FC,1,S,YZ ,10000, FC,1,S,XZ ,10000, FCLIST, ,100 FCLIST, ,150 FCLIST, ,200 PRNSOL,S,FAIL 200 1200 500 8000 200 8000 8000 ! Temperatures ! Maximum stress components
! ! ! !
of Failure Criteria at 100.0 degrees of Failure Criteria at 150.0 degrees of Failure Criteria at 200.0 degrees Criteria
Note The TB commands (TB, TBTEMP, and TBDATA) can be used only for SHELL91, SHELL99, SOLID46, or SOLID191, but the FC and FCLIST commands can be used for any 2-D or 3-D structural solid element or any 3-D structural shell element. See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the TB, TBTEMP, TBDATA, TBLIST, FC, FCDELE, and FCLIST commands. Some notes about specifying failure criteria: The criteria are orthotropic, so you must input the failure stress or failure strain values for all directions. (The exception is that compressive values default to tensile values.) If you don't want the failure stress or strain to be checked in a particular direction, specify a large number in that direction (as shown in the previous example).
User-written failure criteria may be specified via user subroutines USRFC1 through USRFC6. These subroutines should be linked with the ANSYS program beforehand; see the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide for a brief description of user-programmable features.
2.
126
Section 12.2: Modeling Composites material layer does not necessarily improve the accuracy of interlaminar shear stresses. With elements SOLID46, SOLID95, and SOLID191, however, stacking elements in the thickness direction should result in more accurate interlaminar stresses through the thickness. Interlaminar transverse shear stresses in shell elements are based on the assumption that no shear is carried at the top and bottom surfaces of the element. These interlaminar shear stresses are only computed in the interior and are not valid along the shell element boundaries. Use of shell-to-solid submodeling is recommended to accurately compute all of the free edge interlaminar stresses. 3. Because a large amount of input data is required for composites, you should verify the data before proceeding with the solution. Several commands are available for this purpose: ELIST (Utility Menu> List> Elements) lists the nodes and attributes of all selected elements. EPLOT (Utility Menu> Plot> Elements) displays all selected elements. Using the /ESHAPE,1 command (Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Size and Shape) before EPLOT causes shell elements to be displayed as solids with the layer thicknesses obtained from real constants or section definition (see Figure 12.5: Example of an Element Display. This example uses element SHELL99 with /ESHAPE turned on). It also causes SOLID46 elements to be displayed with layers. /PSYMB,LAYR,n (Utility Menu> PlotCrls> Symbols) followed by EPLOT displays layer number n for all selected layered elements. This can be used to display and verify each individual layer across the entire model. /PSYMB,ESYS,1 followed by EPLOT displays the element coordinate system triad for those elements whose default coordinate system has been changed.
LAYLIST (Utility Menu> List> Elements> Layered Elements) lists the layer stacking sequence from real constants and any two material properties for SHELL99, SHELL91, SOLID46, and SOLID191 elements. You can specify a range of layer numbers for the listing.
LIST LAYERS 1 TO 4 IN REAL SET TOTAL LAYERS = 4 LSYM = 1 LP1 = NO. ANGLE THICKNESS MAT --- ----- ---------- --1 45.0 0.250 1 2 -45.0 0.250 2 3 -45.0 0.250 2 4 45.0 0.250 1 -----------------------SUM OF THK 1.00 1 FOR ELEMENT TYPE 1 0 LP2 = 0 EFS = .000E+00
LAYPLOT (Utility Menu> Plot> Layered Elements) displays the layer stacking sequence from real constants in the form of a sheared deck of cards (see Figure 12.6: Sample LAYPLOT Display for [45/ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
127
Chapter 12: Composites 45/ - 45/45] Sequence). The layers are crosshatched and color coded for clarity. The hatch lines indicate the layer angle (real constant THETA) and the color indicates layer material number (MAT). You can specify a range of layer numbers for the display. SECPLOT (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Shell> Plot Section) displays the section stacking sequence from sections in the form of a sheared deck of cards (see Figure 12.6: Sample LAYPLOT Display for [45/-45/ - 45/45] Sequence). The sections are crosshatched and color coded for clarity. The hatch lines indicate the layer angle (THETA) and the color indicates layer material number (MAT) defined by the SECDATA command. You can specify a range of layer numbers for the display.
4.
By default, only data for the bottom of the first (bottom) layer, top of the last (top) layer, and the layer with the maximum failure criterion value are written to the results file. If you are interested in data for all layers, set KEYOPT(8) = 1. Be aware, though, that this may result in a large results file.
5.
Use the ESEL,S,LAYER command to select elements that have a certain layer number. If an element has a zero thickness for the requested layer, the element is not selected. Note For energy output, the results are applicable only to the entire element; you cannot get output results for individual layers.
6.
Use the LAYER command (Main Menu> General Postproc> Options for Outp) in POST1 (or LAYERP26 (Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Define Variables) in POST26) to specify the layer number for which results are to be processed. The SHELL command (Main Menu> General Postproc> Options for Outp or Main Menu> TimeHist Prostpro> Define Variables) specifies a TOP, MID, or BOT location within the layer. The default in POST1 is to store results for the bottom of the bottom layer, and the top of the top layer, and the layer with the maximum failure criterion value. In POST26, the default is layer 1. If KEYOPT(8) = 1 (that is, data stored for all layers), the LAYER and LAYERP26 commands store the TOP and BOT results for the specified layer number. MID values are then calculated by average TOP and BOT values. If KEYOPT (8) = 2 is set for SHELL181 during SOLUTION, then LAYER and LAYERP26 commands store the TOP,
128
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 12.2: Modeling Composites BOTTOM, and MID results for the specified layer number. In this case, MID values are directly retrieved from the results file. For transverse shear stresses with KEYOPT(8) = 0, therefore, POST1 can only show a linear variation, whereas the element solution printout or KEYOPT(8) = 2 can show a parabolic variation. 7. By default, POST1 displays all results in the global Cartesian coordinate system. Use the RSYS command (Main Menu> General Postproc> Options for Outp) to transform the results to a different coordinate system. In particular, RSYS,SOLU allows you to display results in the layer coordinate system if LAYER is issued with a nonzero layer number.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
129
1210
A formal fatigue evaluation accounts for each of these factors as it calculates how "used up" a certain component will become during its anticipated life cycle.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
2.
132
Section 13.2: Doing a Fatigue Evaluation curve to account for mean-stress effects, if necessary. If you do not input an S-N curve, alternating stress intensities will be listed in decreasing order for all possible combinations of stress conditions, but no usage factors will be calculated. Command(s): FP GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Property Table> S-N Table The Sm-T curve, a curve of design stress-intensity value versus temperature. This curve is needed if you want the program to detect whether or not the nominal stress range has gone plastic. Command(s): FP GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Property Table> Sm_T Table Elastic-plastic material parameters M and N (strain hardening exponents). These parameters are required only if you desire simplified elastic-plastic code calculations. These parameters' values can be obtained from the ASME Code. Command(s): FP GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Property Table> Elas-plas Par The following example illustrates the use of the FP command to input material fatigue properties:
! Define the S-N table: FP,1,10,30,100,300,1000,10000 FP,7,100000,1000000 FP,21,650,390,240,161,109,59 FP,27,37,26 ! Define the Sm-T table: FP,41,100,200,300,400,500,600 FP,47,650,700,750,800 FP,51,20,20,20,18.7,17.4,16.4 FP,57,16.1,15.9.15.5,15.1 ! Allowable Cycles, N ! " ! Alternating Stress! Intensity Range, S, ksi
! Temperature,F ! " ! "Design Stress-Intensity ! Value", Sm (=2/3*Sy or ! 1/3 *Su), ksi ! Define the elastic-plastic material parameters: FP,61,1.7,.3 ! M and N
3.
Define stress locations and stress concentration factors. The following option allows you to explicitly define a nodal location of interest to your fatigue evaluation, define stress concentration factors (SCFs) for that location, and assign a short (20 character) title to that location. Command(s): FL GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Stress Locations
Note Not all fatigue analyses will require the FL command. Locations are automatically defined for nodes when FS, FSNODE, or FSSECT are issued (see below). If your model contains sufficient grid detail, your stresses could be accurate enough that you would not need to apply calculated SCFs. (Supplemental SCFs for surface, size, or corrosion effects might still be required, however.) Where only one location is being examined, you could omit a title. If explicit definition of locations, SCFs, or titles are not required, you could forgo the FL command entirely. Here is an example of some FL commands for a cylinder with a global Y axis, having two wall thicknesses of interest, where SCFs are to be applied (to the axial linearized stresses) at the outside wall.
FL,1,281,,,,Line 1 at inside FL,2,285,,1.85,,Line 1 at outside FL,3,311,,,,Line 2 at inside FL,4,315,,2.11,,Line 2 at outside
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
133
13.2.3. Store Stresses and Assign Event Repetitions and Scale Factors
13.2.3.1. Storing Stresses
In order to perform a fatigue evaluation, the program must know the stresses at different events and loadings for each location, as well as the number of repetitions of each event. You can store stresses for each combination of location, event, and loading, using the following options: Manually stored stresses Nodal stresses from Jobname.RST Stresses at a cross-section Caution: The program never assumes that a "zero" stress condition exists. If zero stress is one of the conditions to be considered, it must be explicitly input for each event in which it may occur. The following command sequences schematically illustrate how to store stresses. In some situations, you might prefer to use LCASE instead of SET.
Manually stored stresses: Nodal stresses retrieved from Jobname.RST: Stresses at a cross-section: FS SET, FSNODE PATH, PPATH, SET, FSSECT
You can use more than one method of storing stresses in an event. Each of these methods is explained in detail below.
134
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 13.2: Doing a Fatigue Evaluation In this example, only the total stresses (items 1-6) and the temperature (item 7) are input. If the linearized stresses were also to be input, they would follow the temperatures as items 8 through 13. Note In the special case of a beam element having only axial stress, you would input only one stress component (SX), leaving the rest of the stress fields blank.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
135
Chapter 13: Fatigue FSSECT must also be preceded by a SET command. Stress components stored with an FSSECT command can be modified with a subsequent FS command. Command(s): FSSECT GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Store Stresses> At Cross Sect Input by means of FSSECT is demonstrated in the following example. If node locations are not assigned with an FL command, the FSSECT commands in this example will automatically assign location numbers to the two path nodes, 391 and 395. (See Figure 13.3: Surface Nodes are Identified by PPATH Prior to Executing FSSECT.)
PATH,Name,2 PPATH,1,391 PPATH,2,395 SET,1 FSSECT,,1,1 ! Define the path using the two surface nodes
Figure 13.3 Surface Nodes are Identified by PPATH Prior to Executing FSSECT
136
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 13.2: Doing a Fatigue Evaluation An example of this command usage is given below:
FE,1,-1 FE,2,100,1.2 *REPEAT,3,1 FE,5,500 ! Erase all parameters and fatigue stresses formerly ! used for event 1. ! Assign 100 occurrences to events 2, 3 and 4, ! and scale by 1.2. ! Assign 500 occurrences to event 5.
Consider a load history made up of two slightly different cycles: Load Cycle 1: 500 repetitions of Sx = +50.0 to -50.1 ksi Load Cycle 2: 1000 repetitions of Sx = +50.1 to -50.0 ksi These load cycles will obviously sum to 1500 repetitions having an alternating stress intensity of about 50 ksi. However, carelessly grouping these loadings into only two events will result in an inaccurate range count. Let's see how this would happen:
Event 1, Event 2, loading 1: Sx = 50.0 loading 2: Sx = -50.1 loading 1: Sx = 50.1 loading 2: Sx = -50.0 500 repetitions 1000 repetitions
137
Thus, only 1000 repetitions of about 50 ksi range would be counted, instead of the known 1500 cycles. This error results solely from improper assembly of events. If the loadings had each been described as separate events (such that E1,L1 E1; E1,L2 E2; E2,L1 E3; and E2,L2 E4), then the following range counts would be obtained:
d. a. f. c. b. e. 500 cycles of E2 to E3 0 cycles of E1 to E2 500 cycles of E3 to E4 500 cycles of E1 to E4 0 cycles of E1 to E3 0 cycles of E2 to E4 - this uses up 500 cycles of E2 and E3 - E2 is all used up - uses up 500 more cycles of E3, and 500 of E4 - uses up 500 more cycles of E4 - E3 is all used up - E2 and E4 are both all used up
Cumulative fatigue damage in this case would properly be calculated for 1500 repetitions of about 50 ksi range. Conversely, using separate events for each maximum and each minimum stress condition could sometimes become too conservative. In such cases, carefully choose those loadings that should be counted together, and group them into the same events. The following example illustrates how some events can appropriately contain multiple extreme stress conditions:
Consider a load history made up of these two load cycles: Load Cycle 1: 500 repetitions of Sx = +100.1 to +100.0 ksi Load Cycle 2: 1000 repetitions of Sx = +50.1 to +50.0 ksi
138
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 13.2: Doing a Fatigue Evaluation It is readily apparent that the worst possible combination of these cycles would yield 500 repetitions having alternating stress intensity of about 25 ksi range. Proceeding as in the above example, grouping these loadings into two events would produce an accurate count of 500 repetitions of about 25 ksi range. Treating each loading as a separate event would yield an over-conservative count of 1000 repetitions of about 25 ksi range.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
139
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the FTSIZE, FP, FL, FS, FSNODE, PPATH, FSSECT, FE, and FTCALC commands.
1310
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Chapter 14: p-Method Structural Static Analysis Activating p-method through the GUI: Command(s): /PMETH GUI: Main Menu> Preferences> p-method Defining a p-element: The p-method solution procedure can also be activated by defining a p-element. If you are working outside of the GUI, the definition of a p-element lets the program know that a p-method solution is to be done; no other commands are necessary to initiate p-method. From within the GUI, you can also issue the ET command in the "Input Window" to activate the p-method procedure. (Remember, the ET command must be entered in the "Input Window," since, by default, only h-elements are displayed in the GUI unless p-method is active.) Command(s): ET GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type> Add/Edit/Delete
The above steps are common to most analyses. The ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide explains those steps in detail. In this section we will explain the techniques that are unique to a p-analysis.
142
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 14.3: Using the p-Method For example, if you set a global p-level range between 3 and 8 with PPRANGE, then define a local p-level range of 4 to 6 for PLANE145 elements (ET,1,145,4,6), the p-level for the PLANE145 elements may only vary between 4 and 6, while the rest of the model may vary between 3 and 8. At the (default) starting p-level of 2, convergence checking is performed to determine those elements which are converged and may have their p-level fixed at 2. That is, these elements will remain at a p-level of 2, and will be eliminated from any further convergence checking. Additional checking is performed at each iteration to fix the p-levels of the elements which are converged. Note Convergence checking for SHELL150 begins at a p-level of 3 instead of a p-level of 2. Use local p-range control to eliminate regions of little importance from high p-escalation. Use global p-range control for overall control of the p-level. These range controls are not necessary, but p-escalations to high plevels increase CPU time. Therefore, it is advantageous to have such controls available. Defining a local p-level range: Command(s): ET GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type> Add/Edit/Delete Defining a global p-level range: Command(s): PPRANGE GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Load Step Opts> p-Method> Set p-range
See the ANSYS Elements Reference for complete descriptions of each of the above element types.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
143
144
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 14.3: Using the p-Method Note Since p-method prefers a coarser mesh, the default element size values for a p-method analysis are different than those used for h-elements. See the SMRTSIZE and DESIZE commands for details. For fracture or fatigue assessments, you may still need to specify meshing controls because the mesh must be fine enough to obtain the desired accuracy near the areas of interest. In certain cases, such as when there are severe geometric transition regions, you may also need to specify mesh controls to avoid a meshing failure. You may also want to specify meshing controls for curved geometries, where successful meshes are more difficult to achieve with the default size settings. Under default conditions, badly shaped elements may be produced because of the difficulty of filling a curved domain with as few elements as possible. User-defined meshing controls can make the task less difficult.
145
Chapter 14: p-Method Structural Static Analysis for p-element plots. PowerGraphics is the default graphics display method used for p-method plots. This method will display the plot at a much faster speed than the Full Model method. See Chapter 10, PowerGraphics in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for more information on PowerGraphics. For more information on /EFACET, see the discussion on the p-Element Subgrid later in this section. Command(s): /EFACET GUI: Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Size and Shape
14.3.3.2. Coupling
You may couple degrees of freedom (DOFs) between nodes on p-elements to control nodal solution behavior. All coupled nodes are forced to assume the same displacement values in the specified nodal coordinate direction. The amount of this displacement is unknown until the analysis has been completed. Command(s): CP GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Coupling/Ceqn> Couple DOFs The first degree of freedom defined on the coupled set is the "prime" degree of freedom. All other degrees of freedom in the coupled set are eliminated from the solution matrices as a result of their relationship to the prime degree of freedom. Note For p-elements, only the corner nodes may be defined as prime degrees of freedom if midside nodes are also part of the same coupled set. For a p-method analysis, only the nodal combinations described below are permitted when coupling, and any deviation from these combinations will most likely result in singularities.
2.
146
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
2.
All nodes in the coupled set are midside nodes. In this case, a midside node must be defined as the prime degree of freedom, but this is only valid as long as there are no corner nodes defined as part of the same coupled set.
Note If you have coupled faces or edges on a p-element (that is, all edges of the element's face or all nodes of the element's edge are coupled), the p-level of that edge or face will be held to 2. In addition, constraint equations (used to represent relatively rigid parts) are not available in a p-method analysis.
2.
147
Chapter 14: p-Method Structural Static Analysis GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( : Sol'n Options Tab) Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options We generally recommend that you use the PCG solver for a p-element analysis. For most 3-D solid models and for very large 2-D models (usually greater than 40,000 DOF), the PCG solver is usually faster than the JCG and frontal solvers: The PCG solver is about 5 to 10 times faster than the frontal solver for p-elements. The PCG solver is significantly faster than JCG for p-elements. Computer-time savings will be greater with the PCG solver when p-levels of 4 and higher are active.
In certain cases, such as when your model contains elements with high aspect ratios or material type discontinuities, a greater number of iterations may be required to achieve convergence for the PCG solver. You may increase the maximum number of iterations by using the MULT option on the EQSLV command. This option is only valid when solving with the PCG solver. See the EQSLV command description in the ANSYS Commands Reference for more information on this capability. The PCG solver is not available for p-element shells. For more information on the general use of the PCG solver, refer to Chapter 3, Solution in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide. 3. Apply the loads to the solid model (keypoints, lines, areas, etc.) or to the finite element model (nodes and elements), except for inertia loads (gravity, rotational velocity, etc.), which are independent of the model. For a general discussion of solid model loads versus finite element loads, see Chapter 2, Loading in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide. Internal Degrees of Freedom and Nodal Coordinate Systems In order to correctly apply boundary conditions, you need to understand nodal coordinate systems, and how degrees of freedom (DOFs) which are not attached to a node are handled. DOFs are the allowed motions or deformations of the elements. Those DOFs which are not attached to a node are referred to as internal degrees of freedom. Internal DOFs allow the elements to form a better approximation to the real solution. As the p-level is increased for each loop, more DOFs are added to the elements. Some of these DOFs act on the element boundary (edges and interior faces) resulting in deformations that vary from a polynomial order of 2 to 8. In many cases, the higher the p-level, the more complex the deformation, and the better the approximation to the real solution. Nodal coordinate systems orient the degree of freedom directions at each node. Each node has its own nodal coordinate system, which, by default, is parallel to the global Cartesian system (regardless of the coordinate system in which the node was defined). Nodes may be rotated into a nodal coordinate system [NROTAT] (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Move/Modify> Rotate Node CS> To Active CS). The constraints and forces are then applied to the nodes in the nodal coordinate systems. See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for more details about nodal coordinate systems.
The program aligns the internal DOFs with the nodal coordinate systems as defined by the nodes on the element face or edge. Displacement constraints applied to nodes with rotated nodal coordinate systems are applied to the internal DOFs on an element edge or face only if ALL the nodes defining that edge or face are also rotated into that same coordinate system (see Figure 14.6: Constraints on Rotated Nodes). Therefore any symmetry/antisymmetry displacement boundary conditions applied to the nodes on adjoining surfaces
148
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 14.3: Using the p-Method should reference the same coordinate system. If you apply the symmetry/antisymmetry displacement boundary conditions to areas or lines, you should verify that the constraints all "point" in the same direction on each surface. If they do not, apply the boundary conditions to the individual nodes. Caution: If all of the DOFs of the nodes on an edge (or face) are not fully constrained (are only partially constrained, e.g. only UX is constrained) and the nodal rotations of these nodes are not the same, the stress results at these nodes may be inaccurate if the p-level of the attached elements exceeds 3. Nodal coordinate systems which are not necessarily parallel to the global Cartesian system are formed when you invoke symmetry or antisymmetry displacement constraints on model surfaces.
Loads Applicable to a p-Method Analysis Table 2.5: Loads Applicable in a Static Analysis of this manual describes the loads applicable to a static analysis. The following is a brief discussion of each type of loading. Displacements (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ) are DOF constraints usually specified at model boundaries to define rigid support points. They are also used to indicate symmetry boundary conditions and points of known motion. The directions implied by the labels are in the nodal coordinate system. Displacement boundary conditions that are applied to all nodes on an element edge or face will also constrain the higher-order deformations along that edge or face. Conversely, if all of the nodes are not constrained in that direction, then those lower-order deformations will be constrained but not the higher-order ones. Never apply a displacement only at a midside node on an edge. (You may, however, apply a single constraint at a corner node.) Imposed motions may only vary linearly over an element edge or face. The program will ignore an imposed quadratic variation. Forces (FX, FY, FZ) are concentrated loads usually specified on the model exterior. The directions implied by the labels are in the nodal coordinate system. Moments (MX, MY, MZ) are concentrated loads usually specified on the model exterior. The directions implied by the labels are in the nodal coordinate system.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
149
Chapter 14: p-Method Structural Static Analysis Caution: Observe the following cautions: You should avoid applying single-point loads or constraints, since they cause stress singularities. If these loads or constraints are applied, exclude the elements attached to these nodes from the convergence computations. See the "Accounting for Stress Singularities" section later in this chapter. Do not apply forces and moments to the midside nodes. You may only apply these loads at the corner nodes. In addition, out-of-plane (element ROTZ) moments may not be applied to SHELL150.
Pressures (PRES) are surface loads, also usually applied on the model exterior. Positive values of pressure act towards the element face (resulting in a compressive effect). Temperatures (TEMP) are applied to study the effects of thermal expansion or contraction (that is, thermal stresses). The coefficient of thermal expansion must be defined if thermal strains are to be calculated. You can read in temperatures from a thermal analysis, or you can specify temperatures directly on the nodes or the solid model keypoints. To obtain temperatures from a thermal analysis: Mesh the p-element model. Convert the p-element types to the following thermal element types: PLANE145 to PLANE77, PLANE146 to PLANE35, SOLID147 to SOLID90, and SOLID148 to SOLID87. There is no thermal equivalent for SHELL150. Run the thermal analysis. Change the element types back to the p-element types in order to perform the p-method structural analysis. For the remainder of the analysis, continue with the same procedure as defined for h-elements (see the ANSYS Thermal Analysis Guide).
Gravity, spinning, etc. are inertia loads that affect the entire structure. Density must be defined if inertia effects are to be included. 4. Specify load step options. The following solution options are available to aid in solving a p-Method analysis: Convergence criteria specifications Specifications for controlling p-levels Accounting for stress singularities
As mentioned earlier in this section, a p-method analysis works with a series of iterations, or loops, checking for convergence each time. The PPRANGE command is used to specify the overall range where the p-level may vary (somewhere between 2 and 8). For analyses beginning at p=2, each element will have its solution checked for convergence against established criteria [PCONV]. If the solution is within the requested tolerance [PMOPTS], that element will have its p-level held to 2. Those elements that did not converge within the specified criteria (that is, not fixed at p=2 for the first iteration), will have their p-level increased, and another solution (iteration) will then be performed. At each iteration the convergence criteria (strain energy, displacement, stress, etc.) is checked, and if converged, the solution stops. Also, those elements whose individual solutions are considered to be converged will have their p-level held at the current p-level. This process is continued until all specified convergence criteria are met, or the maximum p-range has been reached.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
1410
Section 14.3: Using the p-Method Convergence Criteria Specifications Convergence criteria may be global (for strain energy) or local. If you are specifically interested in the results at certain points in the model, then you should use local convergence criteria. Use this option to specify which areas of your model you would like to monitor for analysis convergence, as well as the type of criteria you would like to use to control convergence. Typically, you should select a few points of interest (nodes), at which to specify the convergence criteria (deflection, stress, strain, etc.). In most cases, the default convergence tolerance (5%) is sufficient for generally good results. You may want to lower this tolerance if you require a more accurate solution, such as for a fatigue evaluation. For a design study or optimization analysis, a higher tolerance will cut down on run times. Command(s): PCONV GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Load Step Opts> p-Method> Convergence Crit For SHELL150, you also have the option to choose a layer (TOP, MID, or BOT) for stress or strain convergence criteria. If you are working with intersecting shells, it is recommended that you choose MID as the layer for convergence checking. Caution: Do not specify stress or strain criteria at nodes where there are singularities or at nodes along material interfaces. These locations will not converge due to the singularity. When choosing locations for specifying convergence criteria, you should concentrate your monitoring in the areas of high stress or at the point of maximum displacement rather than where stresses, strains, or displacements are relatively insignificant. Specifications for Controlling p-levels You may specify the starting (defaults to 2) and maximum (defaults to 8) p-levels that you wish to allow for your analysis [PPRANGE]. You may wish to start at a higher p-level if you have already completed an analysis and you want to perform a re-analysis (for a design change, for instance) and you know the final p-level where convergence will occur for most elements. You may also want to restrict the maximum plevel to less than 8 if conserving disk space or run time. Adjust the starting and maximum p-level in portions of your model using element KEYOPT selections. Accounting for Stress Singularities If the model contains any re-entrant (internal or concave) corners that are not modeled with a fillet radius, or contains point loads or any other areas of stress singularities, you should consider excluding these areas from the convergence computations. All elements that have a node at the singularity should be excluded. One exception applies to fracture mechanics. In that situation, you should not exclude elements at or near the crack tip. Command(s): PEXCLUDE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> p-Method> Strain Energy> Exclude Elems You can reassign, or re-include, elements for convergence checking. You may determine which elements have been included or excluded by listing [PINCLUDE,STAT; PEXCLUDE,STAT; or *GET] or plotting elements [EPLOT]. Excluded elements will appear `whited-out' in the plot. You may also select included or excluded elements by issuing the ESEL command directly [ESEL,,PEXC or ESEL,,PINC] (no GUI equivalent). This facilitates using these elements as a component [CM]. Command(s): PINCLUDE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> p-Method> Strain Energy> Include Elems 5. Save a backup copy of the database. Command(s): SAVE
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
1411
Chapter 14: p-Method Structural Static Analysis GUI: Utility Menu> File> Save As 6. Start the p-level iterations and solution process. The output will provide a summary of each loop, indicating the current p-level, the convergence statistics, and the status of how many elements have converged. Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS
The convergence criterion was specified at a singularity (infinite stress Do not monitor a singularity point. or strain value, such as under a point load) or the elements near the singularity were not excluded. The mesh is too coarse, especially in the area where the stress is high. Refine the mesh. The maximum p-level was restricted lower than that required for convergence. Allow the maximum p-level to go higher.
The convergence criterion is at a location where the angle made by Refine the mesh in that region. adjacent element edges is greater than 55 on a curved boundary.
The results from a p-method analysis are written to the results file, Jobname.RST. They consist of the following data:
1412
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 14.3: Using the p-Method Primary data Nodal displacements (UX, UY, ROTX, etc.) Derived data Nodal and element stresses, nodal and element strains, element forces Note You must read the results data from the results file (Jobname.RST) into the database [SET] before displacements may be reviewed during postprocessing. Thermal strains are not available on the results file. The tools used for time-history postprocessing [/POST26] are also applicable to p-method analyses, but have limited functionality, since p-element technology is restricted to linear static analyses. In this section we will explain those procedures that deviate from standard postprocessing, such as some plotting and printing operations, etc. Before reading this section, it would be a good idea to review the chapters on postprocessing in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for more details on postprocessing, in general.
As a general rule, for a model with a very coarse mesh or any model in which the p-levels are high (p>3) you should consider using NUM = 4 to view your field quantities. Since results are available at each subgrid location, more information will be available at NUM = 4.
1413
Chapter 14: p-Method Structural Static Analysis You may query stresses, strains, and displacements at all subgrid locations that have previously been activated by the /EFACET command.
1414
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
1415
Chapter 14: p-Method Structural Static Analysis 5. 6. 7. In the scroll box for Analysis type, scroll down to "Plane Stress+TK" to select it. Click on OK. Click on Close in the Element Types dialog box.
10. Click once on the circle to select it. 11. Click on OK in the picking menu. A semicircle is removed from the lower left-hand corner of the plate.
Section 14.4: Sample p-Method Analysis (GUI Method) 3. 4. 5. 6. In the Mesh section of the MeshTool, choose Areas and Free. Then click the MESH button. The Mesh Areas picking menu appears. Click on Pick All. A mesh for the plate is created. Click Close to close the MeshTool. Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
10. Click OK. The displacement symbols appear along the bottom of the drawing.
1417
Chapter 14: p-Method Structural Static Analysis 2. 3. 4. Carefully review the information in the status window, and then close it. Click on OK in the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to begin the solution. Click on Close when the Solution is done window appears.
1418
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Cross sections and user section meshes may be saved and stored in cross section library files. You may assign beam cross sections as attributes of a line using the LATT command. These section definitions will be incorporated into the generated beam elements when the line is meshed with BEAM44, BEAM188, or BEAM189.
ANSYS supplies the following commands for creating, viewing, and listing cross sections, and for managing cross section libraries:
152
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
For complete documentation of the cross section commands, see the ANSYS Commands Reference.
15.3.2. Defining Cross Section Geometry and Setting the Section Attribute Pointer
Use the SECDATA command to define the geometry of a cross section. Continuing with the example SECTYPE command shown above, note that the CSOLID subtype has two dimensions: the radius and the number of cells along its circumference. Thus, the SECDATA command shown below specifies 5 as the radius of the circular solid beam, and 8 as the number of cells along its circumference. The SECNUM command sets the element section attribute pointer to 2. Command(s): SECDATA, 5, 8 and SECNUM, 2 GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Common Sectns Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh> Attributes> Default Attribs
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
153
Chapter 15: Beam Analysis and Cross Sections The thin wall sections have a minimum of two integration points through thickness, so results produced using thin wall sections should be acceptable for materially nonlinear analysis. However, when doing a plasticity analysis, the cell defaults may need to be changed for the solid sections. Here are examples of ANSYS-generated solid section cell meshes and the type of analysis you may wish to use them with.
Issue the LATT command to associate these attributes with the selected, unmeshed line: Command(s): LATT, MAT, , TYPE, , KB, KE, SECNUM GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> Picked Lines See the LATT command description for the meaning of MAT and TYPE. The following arguments are described here in terms of their applicability to beams.
KB
Corresponds to any keypoint number in the model. All beam elements generated will have their beam section oriented such that the beam z-axis will lie in the plane defined by two line end keypoints and this keypoint number.
154
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Corresponds to any keypoint number in the model (optional). This keypoint determines the beam orientation at the end of the line as described above. If KE is given, KB determines the beam orientation at the beginning of the line. This is useful for creating twisted beams.
SECNUM
Corresponds to the beam section defined by the SECTYPE command with the section ID number as given by the SECNUM.
Common sections are described by a standard geometry and a single material. Custom sections are defined by an arbitrary geometry and may consist of several isotropic materials. In addition, you can use defined sections to create tapered beams (for BEAM188 and BEAM189 only). See Section 15.4.5: Defining a Tapered Beam for more information.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
155
The top part of the BeamTool relates a section ID number to a subtype (and, optionally, a section name) [SECTYPE]. The middle of the BeamTool defines the section offset information, if needed [SECOFFSET]. The bottom contains the fields for section geometry information [SECDATA]. The dimensions defined by the SECDATA command are determined by the subtype selected. For documentation about a particular variant of the BeamTool, select the subtype that you want information about, and then click on the Help button on the BeamTool. The subtype dimensions are also documented in the SECDATA command description.
3.
156
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 15.4: Creating Cross Sections 4. 5. 6. Set the number of line divisions for all lines (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Size Cntrls> ManualSize> Lines> Picked Lines or use the MeshTool). Select Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Write From Areas. A picker appears. Pick the area(s) of the cells. ANSYS creates cells on the areas. ANSYS may display bad shape messages during the mesh - these messages can be ignored. However, you may see an "Unable to mesh area ...." message. If you do, clear the elements from all areas (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Clear> Areas) and repeat steps 4 and 5. Write the .SECT file out to a unique name in the Write Section Library File dialog box and click on OK. Read in the user mesh file (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Read Sect Mesh) to calculate the section properties. Material properties must be defined to calculate the cross section shear correction factors, material-weighted centroids and the shear centers.
7. 8.
Note Even if you have already set LESIZE, you will see the following message: Line element sizes may need to be specified for desired cross-section mesh. Please refer to the LESIZE command. If you have already set the line element size, click on the Close button to continue. If you have not already set it, issue LESIZE with the appropriate information. When creating cells on the area using the GUI, you do not need to define a plane element type. On the other hand, a plane element type must be defined if the user issues the SECWRITE command explicitly. MESH200 with KEYOPT(1) = 7 and PLANE82 are the only valid plane element types.
15.4.3. Creating Custom Cross Sections with Mesh Refinement and Multiple Materials
When doing a plasticity analysis, you may need to refine the cross section mesh. A cross section consisting of more than one material may be defined to represent layers, reinforcements or sensors. When defining a multiplematerial cross section, you will need to specify the material that each cross section cell is made of. You may take a previously-created cross section and modify it. To create a custom cross section with a refined mesh and/or multiple materials, perform the following tasks: 1. Either read a common section (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Edit/Built-up> Edit Common) from the ANSYS database or read a custom section from a .SECT file. (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Edit/Built-up> Edit Custom) ANSYS displays a MESH200 plot in the Graphics Window. Refine the section mesh. (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Edit/Builtup> Refine Mesh) Modify the cell materials. (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Edit/Builtup> Modify Material) If you want to create a multiple-material section, define the materials. This is necessary to calculate the shear correction factors and material-weighted centroids. Save the section to a .SECT file using SECWRITE (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Edit/Built-up> Save). To calculate the section properties and use a custom section in the analysis, read in the user mesh file (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Read Sect Mesh).
2. 3. 4.
5. 6.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
157
Chapter 15: Beam Analysis and Cross Sections Note If you redefine a material after creating the section, you must reissue the SECTYPE and SECREAD commands to recompute the cross section. When a cross section has multiple materials, and /ESHAPE is used to produce contour plots of stresses (and other quantities), the element averages the stresses across material boundaries. To limit this behavior, use small cross section cells around the material boundaries. When a cross section has multiple materials, the multiple materials will not be displayed in an element plot with /ESHAPE,1. The multiple materials can be verified by viewing the cross section in the Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Edit/Built-up> Edit Custom submenu. When using the SECWRITE command explicitly, a section with multiple materials can be created by assigning material attributes to the areas. During meshing, the elements inherit the material attribute from the area and this attribute is written to the .SECT file.
Continuing with this example, you can then use 3 as the taper section ID when assigning mesh attributes with the SECNUM or LATT command. The resulting beam cross section is (0.0001*0.5) at end 1, and linearly tapers to (3*0.5) at end 2. The following assumptions apply to tapered beams defined with this method: 158 The end sections must be defined prior to defining the taper. Sections defined at the end points must be topologically identical.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 15.5: Using Nonlinear General Beam Sections A section cannot taper to a point (or zero area) at either end. The arbitrary beam section type (ASEC on the SECTYPE command) is not supported for tapered beams.
The program performs a number of checks (although not completely comprehensive) to ensure topological equality. The following items are compared: number of section nodes number of section elements section type
If both end stations refer to custom cross sections with multiple materials, you must ensure that material IDs for the cells are the same for both ends. At a Gauss point of integration, the BEAM188 and BEAM189 elements will find the closest point on the line defined by station-1 and station-2. Using this information, a linear interpolation is performed for the cross section mesh. Therefore, it is very important that the Gauss point be located within the end points. ANSYS will produce error messages when this is not the case. The tapered section treatment is significantly more expensive than a constant cross section (since recomputation is necessary). If this is a concern, use KEYOPT(12) of the beam element to specify the tapered section treatment. KEYOPT(12) = 0 - Linear tapered section analysis (more accurate, but expensive) KEYOPT(12) = 1 - Average cross section analysis (an approximation of the order of the mesh size, but faster)
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
159
= Torque
S1 = Transverse shear force in plane XZ S2 = Transverse shear force in plane XY
= Axial strain 1 = Curvature in plane XZ 2 = Curvature in plane XY = Twist of the cross section 1 = Transverse shear strain in plane XZ 2 = Transverse shear strain in plane XY AE(,T) = Axial stiffness as a function of axial strain and temperature
I1 (1,T) = Flexural rigidity as a function of curvature and temperature in plane XZ I2 (2,T) = Flexural rigidity as a function of curvature and temperature in plane XY JG(,T) = Torsional rigidity, as a function of torsion and temperature A1 (1,T) = Transverse shear stiffness as a function of shear strain and temperature in plane XZ A2 (2,T) = Transverse shear stiffness as a function of shear strain and temperature in plane XY T is the current temperature
G G E E
Thermal expansion coefficients and mass density for the section as a function of temperature complete the definition of a generalized cross section.
Table 15.2 ANSYS Commands for Specifying Nonlinear General Beam Section Data
Command BSAX [1] BSM1 [1] BSM2 [1] BSTQ [1] BSS1 [1] BSS2 [1] BSMD [2] Quantity Defined and Data Specified Axial force and strain N, , T Bending moment and curvature in plane XZ M1, 1, T Bending moment and curvature in plane XY M2, 2, T Cross section torque and twist , , T Transverse shear force and strain in plane XZ S1, 1, T Transverse shear force and strain in plane XY S2, 2, T Mass density of the beam section (assuming a unit thickness) DENS, T
1510
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
1. 2.
Repeatable for six independent temperatures, and up to 20 strain values. Repeatable for six different temperatures.
Temperature dependencies (T) You can define each of the generalized section data components as temperature-dependent. It is possible to specify up to six temperatures (T) by reissuing any command as necessary. If you issue a command for a temperature specified earlier, the most recent data supersedes the previous value.
ANSYS conventions for defining a uniaxial elasto-plastic response apply. The range of strain values must cover the anticipated maximum deformation of the structure. For all nonlinear beam section specifications, the stiffness disappears if the structural response is beyond the maximum strain value of the section data. You can define a maximum of 20 generalized stress-strain points at each temperature value. For a plastic nonlinear beam section subtype (SECTYPE,,GENB,PLASTIC), you must define all section components with two or more stress-strain points. However, you can define a linear behavior for any section component by specifying a larger maximum strain value. Following is an example where axial behavior is nonlinear, but bending response is linear:
sectype,1,genb,plastic bsax,0.0008,200 bsax,0.001 ,240 bsax,0.0014,300 ! bending bsm1,0.1,10000 bsm1,1,100000 ! Elasto-plastic response
For an elastic nonlinear beam section subtype (SECTYPE,,GENB,ELASTIC), a single stress-strain point is adequate for defining linear behavior.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
1511
Chapter 15: Beam Analysis and Cross Sections The section data defined by each command listed in Table 15.2: ANSYS Commands for Specifying Nonlinear General Beam Section Data is associated with the section most recently defined via the SECTYPE command. Beam stresses are not available for output; however, the stress resultants are available as ETABLE quantities. Initial stress specification (ISTRESS, ISFILE, ISWRITE) is not feasible. Section offsetting (SECOFFSET) is not available. Only the temperature of the beam axis is relevant.
1512
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Lateral-Torsional Buckling of a Cantilever I-Beam, Modeled With 60 BEAM188 Elements (Displayed Using /ESHAPE) Chapter 7, Buckling Analysis in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide documents buckling analysis in detail. This sample problem shows what happens when a cantilever beam is subjected to a concentrated end load, which causes lateral-torsional buckling.
1513
Chapter 15: Beam Analysis and Cross Sections The following geometric properties are used for this problem: L = 100 in H = 5 in B = .2 in Loading for this problem is: P = 1 lb.
1514
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
4.
Create a straight line through keypoints 1 and 2. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Lines> Lines> Straight Line. The Create Straight Line picker appears. Select keypoints 1 and 2 in the Graphics window and click on OK in the Create Straight Line picker. Save the model. Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Save As. Enter buckle.db in the Save Database to box and click on OK.
5.
8.
9.
1515
Chapter 15: Beam Analysis and Cross Sections 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. In the Material Models Available window on the right, double-click on the following: Structural, Linear, Elastic, Isotropic. A dialog box appears. Enter 1E4 for EX (Young's modulus). Enter 0.0 for PRXY (Poisson's ratio), and click on OK. Material Model Number 1 appears in the Material Models Defined window on the left. Choose menu path Material> Exit to close the Define Material Model Behavior dialog box. Replot the line by choosing menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Lines. Select the line and define the orientation node of the line as an attribute. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> Picked Lines. The Line Attributes picker appears. Select the line in the Graphics window and click on Apply in the Line Attributes picker. The Line Attributes dialog box appears. ANSYS includes the material attribute pointer to the material set 1, the element type attribute pointer to the local element type 1, and the section attribute pointer to the section ID 1 by default. Click on the radio button beside the Pick Orientation Keypoint(s) label to change it to Yes and click on OK. The Line Attributes picker reappears. Type 3 in the picker, press the Enter key, and click on OK.
8.
9.
10. Save the model. Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Save As. If the buckle.db file is not already selected, select it. Select OK, and when ANSYS prompts you if you want to overwrite the existing file, click on OK.
2.
3. 4.
Section 15.7: Sample Lateral Torsional Buckling Analysis (GUI Method) 7. 8. Enter 1 for the Force/moment value in the Apply F/M on KPs dialog box, and click on OK. The force symbol appears in the ANSYS Graphics window at keypoint 2. Save the model. Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Save As. If the buckle.db file is not already selected, select it. Click on OK and when ANSYS prompts you if you want to overwrite the existing file, click on OK again.
4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
10. Set the element calculation key for the MXPAND command. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Single Expand> Expand Modes. 11. In the Expand Modes dialog box, enter 4 in the No. of modes to expand box, change the No to Yes beside the Calculate elem results label, and click on OK. 12. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. Review the summary information in the /STAT command window, then select Close from its menu bar. Click on OK in the Solve Current Load Step window to begin the solution. 13. When the Solution is Done! window appears, click on Close to close it. 14. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Size and Shape. Be sure the radio button beside the label Display of element shapes ... (/ESHAPE) is set to On and click on OK. 15. Display the results summary. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Results Summary. After you have reviewed the results, click on Close to close the window. 16. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> First Set. 17. Plot the first mode shape of the beam. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape. The Plot Deformed Shape dialog box appears. Select Def + undef edge and click on OK. 18. Choose menu path Main Menu> Finish.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
1517
2. 3. 4.
5. 6.
7.
8.
9.
6. 7.
1518
Section 15.8: Sample Problem with Cantilever Beams, Command Method 8. 9. The Define Reaction Force picker appears. Pick the end node on the left side of the beam and click on OK. The Define Reaction Force Variable dialog box appears. Be sure the Ref number of variable is set to 3 and Node number is set to 1. Select Struct Force FY from the menu and click on OK. Click on Close to close the Defined Time-History Variables dialog box.
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Math Operations> Multiply. In the Multiply TimeHistory Variables dialog box, enter 4 in the Reference number for result box, -1.0 in the 1st Factor box, and 3 in the 1st Variable box. Click on OK. 11. Display the X variable. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings> Graph. Choose the single variable button, enter 2 in the Single variable no. box, and click on OK. 12. Plot the load versus deflection curve to confirm the critical load calculated by the eigenvalue method. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist PostPro> Graph Variables. Enter 4 in the 1st variable to graph box. Click on OK. 13. List the variables versus time. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist PostPro> List Variables. Enter 2 in the 1st variable to list box and 4 in the 2nd variable box and click on OK. 14. Check the values in the PRVAR Command window to see how they compare against the values generated by the eigenvalue buckling analysis. Expected results are: Critical buckling load, Pcr = 0.01892. Close the PRVAR Command window. 15. Choose menu path Main Menu> Finish. 16. In the ANSYS Toolbar, click on Quit. 17. Choose a save option and click on OK.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
1519
1520
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS supplies the following commands for creating, viewing, and listing cross sections, and for managing cross section libraries:
SECCONTROLS Overrides program calculated properties. SECFUNCTION Specifies shell section thickness as a tabular function. SECNUM SECOFFSET SECPLOT Identifies the SECID (section number) to be assigned to an element Defines section offset for shell cross sections Plots geometry of a shell section to scale
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
For complete documentation of the cross section commands, see the ANSYS Commands Reference. Figure 16.1: Plot of a Shell Section shows the layer stacking of a shell section. The layer order, along with material and orientation of each layer, is represented here:
Section 16.3: How to Create Cross Sections are moved 5 percent toward their nearest layer surface to agree with the locations selected with real constant input. The default for each layer is 3. If a shell section has only one layer, and the number of section integration points is equal to one, then the shell does not have any bending stiffness. This may result in solver difficulties, and may affect convergence adversely. Command(s): SECDATA, 0.5, 1, 45, 3 SECDATA, 0.5, 2, -45, 3 SECDATA, 0.5, 1, 45, 3 GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Shell> Add/Edit
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
163
The top part of the Layup page of the ShellTool relates a section ID number to a Shell section type (and, optionally, a section name) [SECTYPE]. The middle part of the page of the ShellTool defines each layer in the positive Z direction of the element [SECDATA]. Note that the order of the rows in the spreadsheet ascends up the page, resembling that stacking of the layers. (Integration point data for each layer is ignored by thermal shell elements.) The bottom contains the fields for section offset information, if needed [SECOFFSET]. You can define tapered shells by specifying a section function relating thickness to global coordinates [SECFUNCTION].
The transverse shear stiffness, hourglass coefficients and drill stiffness of the sections are calculated from the section geometry and material properties. The default added mass per unit area of the section is always zero. On the Section Controls page, you can override the program calculated quantities [SECCONTROLS]. (The Section Controls page does not apply to thermal shell elements.)
164
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
MT B (T - TI ) D BT
165
(Subscripts 1 and 2 denote shell surface coordinates as employed by the shell element.) The preintegrated form of input allows you to import homogenous section-stiffness constants evaluated in other analyses or by third-party, special-purpose software tools. For example, defining preintegrated section stiffnesses [A], [B], and [D] is common in analyses of layered composites, corrugated shells, or other complex section construction.
Table 16.2 ANSYS Commands for Specifying Preintegrated Shell Section Data
Command SSPA SSPB [1] SSPD [1] SSPE [1] SSMT Quantity Defined and Data Specified Membrane stiffness -- Symmetric part of submatrix [A] A11, A21, A31,A22,A32,A33, T Coupling stiffness -- Symmetric part of submatrix [B] B11, B21, B31,B22,B32,B33, T Bending stiffness -- Symmetric part of submatrix [D] D11, D21, D31,D22,D32,D33, T Transverse shear stiffness -- Symmetric part of submatrix [E] E11, E21, E22, T Membrane thermal effects -- {MT} T T T M 11, M 22, M 12, T Bending thermal effects -- {BT} T T T B 11, B 22, B 12, T Mass density of the shell section (assuming a unit thickness)
DENS, T
SSBT [1]
SSPM
1.
If you are using the SHELL181 element's Membrane option (KEYOPT(1) = 1), it is not necessary to issue the SSPB, SSPD, SSPE, and SSBT commands. In this case, the only relevant quantities are membrane stiffness (SSPA), membrane thermal effects (SSMT), and density (SSPM).
Temperature dependencies (T) You can define each of the preintegrated shell section data as temperaturedependent. It is possible to specify up to six temperatures (T) by reissuing any command as necessary. If you issue a command for a temperature specified earlier, the most recent data supersedes the previous value.
166
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Section 16.4: Using Preintegrated General Shell Sections Shell stresses are not available for output; however, the stress resultants are available as ETABLE quantities. Initial stress specification (ISTRESS, ISFILE, ISWRITE) is not feasible. The thickness of the shell is assumed to remain constant even in a large-strain analysis. Section offsetting (SECOFFSET) is not available. The preintegrated stiffness components must yield a positive definite section stiffness at analysis time.
If using preintegrated shell sections in a contact analysis, ANSYS recommends the pure Lagrange multiplier method. For standard layered-shell sections, you can obtain submatrices [A], [B], [D], and [E] via the SLIST command's FULL option.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
167
168
Index
Symbols
2-D fracture models, 113 3-D fracture models, 114
B
Bauschinger effect, 810 beam tool, 155 beams cross sections, 151 nonlinear general sections, 159 Besseling model, 810 beta (stiffness) damping, 410, 536, 63, 618 bilinear isotropic hardening, 810 bilinear kinematic hardening, 810 birth and death, 870, 870 element, 863 bisection, 85 Block Lanczos extraction method, 425 Block Lanczos method, 33, 317 bonlinear structural analysis restarts, 860 buckling analysis, 71, 71 eigenvalue, 73 procedure, 73 expand the solution, 76 expansion pass, 76 methods of solution, 71 nonlinear, 72 procedure, 72 obtain the eigenvalue buckling solution, 75 obtain the static solution, 74
A
adaptive descent, 853 adequate mesh density, 864 alpha (mass) damping, 410, 536, 618 alternating stress intensity, 131 amplitude of harmonic loads, 45 analysis modal analysis options, 34 reduced transient dynamic, 519 analysis options harmonic response analysis, 425 mode superposition method, 425 modal analysis, 32, 44, 420 nonlinear static structural analysis, 850 single-point spectrum analysis, 63 transient dynamic analysis, 514, 520 mode superposition method, 514 reduced method, 520 analysis type buckling, 71 full transient, 57 harmonic response, 41 modal, 31 nonlinear structural, 81 p-method, 141 spectrum, 61 static structural, 21, 22 structural, 11 definition of, 11 transient dynamic, 51 animation gasket results, 1019 anisotropic, 810 applying loads, 32, 44, 420, 857, 860 harmonic response analysis, 45 increments for buckling analysis, 72 modal analysis, 35 nonlinear analysis, 857 p-method, 147 structural static analysis, 28, 28 transient dynamic analysis, 59 using TABLE array parameters, 28 arc-length method, 25, 72, 73, 82, 868 automatic time stepping, 535, 72, 867
C
calculating covariance in POST26, 623 fracture parameters, 115 cast iron plasticity, 810 causes of nonlinear behavior, 81 changing status, 82 geometric nonlinearities, 82 material nonlinearities, 82 cells defining for a section, 153 Chaboche model, 810 changing status, 82 combinations material model, 835 composite cross section, 158 composites, 121 element types for, 121
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index guidelines, 126 how to model, 121 layer properties, 123 concrete, 810, 829, 863 constant damping ratio, 410, 536, 63, 618 constitutive matrices, 124 constraint equations, 147 with QR Damped method, 319 contact, 82 node-to-node, 863 contour displays, 211, 311, 68, 77, 857, 1019 control elements, 870 controlling cutbacks, 24 controlling p-levels, 147 controlling restarts, 24 convergence checking, 851 enhancements, 865 failure, 865 convergence criteria, 851 default value, 851 disjointed structures, 851 displacement checking, 851 force checking, 851 p-method, 147 vector norms, 851 convergence tolerances, 24 coupling, 126, 146 covariance calculating, 623 crack faces, 111 crack front, 111 crack region modeling, 111 crack tip, 111 creating sections, 152, 155, 161 beam tool, 155 creep, 88, 829 automatic time stepping, 831 explicit, 829, 855 explicit creep procedure, 831 implicit, 829, 855 implicit creep procedure, 830 material curve fitting, 98 ratio, 855 creep criteria, 27, 855 creep strain rate, 829 cross sections (see sections) (see Sections) composite, 158 custom convergence criteria, 851 cutback criteria, 24 CUTCONTROL command changes through SOLCONTROL, 853 cyclic hardening/softening, 810
D
damped method modal analysis, 33, 318 damping, 59, 536, 860 harmonic response analysis, 410 spectrum analysis, 618 PSD, 618 table of options, 536 transient dynamic analysis, 57, 59, 514, 522 database output, 22, 38, 410, 421, 57, 514, 524, 76, 850 DDAM (see dynamic design analysis method) deep drawing, 833 deformed shape display, 211, 68, 77, 857 displaying, 1019 deleting sections, 152, 161 deterministic analysis, 62 disjointed structures, 851 display deformed shape, 311, 412 displaying deformed shapes, 857 DOFs master, 35 Drucker-Prager, 810 dynamic analyses harmonic response, 41 spectrum, 61 transient, 51 dynamic design analysis method (DDAM), 62, 625
E
eigenvalue analysis, 31 eigenvalue buckling, 71 eigenvalue buckling solution buckling analysis, 75 eigenvalue calculation shift point, 75 eigenvalue extraction methods, 75 eigenvalues, 31 number to be extracted, 75 eigenvectors, 31 elastomers, 817 element birth and death, 863 element damping, 536 element loads, 425 element types
Index2
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index structural, 12 elements associating sec IDs with, 152, 161 energy release rate, 111, 118 engineering strain, 87 engineering stress, 87 epoxy, 121 equation solvers, 24, 44, 850, 147 equilibrium iterations, 82, 853 number of, 24, 853 error estimation, 211 example problems beam analysis, 1520 buckling analysis, 712 harmonic response analysis, 419 modal analysis, 314 nonlinear analysis, 882 reduced transient dynamic analysis, 540 single-point response spectrum analysis, 617 static analysis, 226 excitation direction, 63 expand single solution, 524 expand the modes single-point response spectrum analysis, 66 expand the solution buckling analysis, 76 reduced harmonic response analysis, 421 expanded modes number to use, 63 expanded solution review results, 525 expanding modes, 38 expansion frequency range, 38 expansion pass, 421 activating, 38, 421, 524 buckling analysis, 76 harmonic response analysis, 421, 427 mode superposition method, 427 reduced method, 421 transient dynamic analysis, 518, 524 mode superposition method, 518 reduced method, 524 expansion pass options harmonic response analysis (reduced), 421 modal analysis, 38 transient dynamic analysis (reduced), 524 explicit creep, 829 explicit creep procedure, 831 extra element shapes, 870 extracting modes, 31 extrapolation of results, 27, 410, 421, 524, 856
F
failure criteria, 125 maximum strain, 125 maximum stress, 125 Tsai-Wu, 125 failures convergence, 865 fatigue alternating stress intensity, 131 design stress-intensity value (Sm), 132 evaluation procedure, 132 event, 131 event repetitions, 136 fatigue data file (Jobname.FATG), 139 guidelines for assembling events, 137 loading, 131 location, 131 manually stored stresses, 134 material properties, 132 overview, 131 S-N curve, 132 sample input, 139 scale factors, 136 Sm-T curve, 132 strain hardening exponents, 132 stress concentration factors, 132 stress locations, 132 stresses at a cross-section, 135 stresses from results file, 135 with p-elements, 144 fatigue assessments, 144 fatigue calculations activating, 139 fiberglass, 121 files Jobname.FATG, 139 .SECT, 156 forced vibrations, 41 forcing frequency range, 410 fracture assessments, 144 fracture mechanics, 111, 111 solving problems, 111 fracture models 2-D, 113 3-D, 114 fracture parameters calculating, 115 free meshing, 144 free-body analysis (see inertia relief) frequency range for expansion, 38, 421 frequency vector, 623 frequency-dependent damping ratio, 618 Index3
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index full harmonic response analysis procedure, 43 full transient dynamic analysis procedure, 53 hyperelasticity, 88, 817 Arruda-Boyce model, 819 automatic time stepping, 821 Blatz-Ko foam model, 820 Gent model, 820 large strain, 817 material curve fitting, 91 Mooney-Rivlin model, 818, 821 neo-Hookean model, 819 Ogden compressible foam model, 820 Ogden model, 818 polynomial form model, 819 stability checks, 821 u-P formulation, 821 user-defined option, 821 Yeoh model, 820
G
gap conditions, 514, 520 and QR Damped method, 514 gasket joints simulation, 101 applications, 103 element topologies, 102 elements, 103 formulation, 102 materials, 104 meshing, 1012 output listing, 1017 overview, 101 plotting data, 1011 procedure, 101 results, 1019 sample problem, 1020 solution, 1016 thickness, 102 gasket results animation, 1019 POST1, 1019 POST26, 1020 reviewing, 1019 tabular listing, 1019 geometric nonlinearities, 82, 86 geometry data for sections, 152, 161 geometry data of a section, 153, 162 glass, 833 guyan reduction, 320
I
implicit creep, 829 implicit creep procedure, 830 inertia relief, 29 calculating, 29 output, 29 partial, 29 initial accelerations, 54 initial conditions transient dynamic analysis, 54, 514, 521 full method, 54 mode superposition method, 514 reduced method, 521 initial displacement, 54 initial velocity, 54 integration point, 856 integration time step, 51, 57, 514, 522 guidelines for, 533 interface material model, 12
H
harmonic forcing frequency, 45 harmonic response, 41 harmonic response analysis, 41 full method, 43, 43 procedure, 43 methods of solution, 42 mode superposition method, 424, 427 procedure, 424 sample input, 427 prestressed, 428 reduced method, 419, 423 sample input, 423 uses for, 41 harmonic solutions number of, 49 Hill anisotropy, 810 Index4
J
J-integral, 111, 116
K
kinematic analysis, 860, 867 KSPIN [OMEGA], 88
L
large deflection and load direction, 86 large deformation effects, 22, 57, 72, 86, 88, 860 large strain analyses, 86, 810 automatic time stepping, 86
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index hyperelasticity, 817 logarithmic strain, 87 true stress, 87 viscoplasticity, 833 layer orientation angle, 123 layer thickness, 123 layered elements, 121 libraries sections, 1512, 165 library paths for cross sections, 152 line element results, 211, 311 line search option, 24, 853, 868 list master DOF, 311 listing section properties, 152, 161 section results, 152 load step options, 38, 421, 524 buckling analysis, 76 eigenvalue buckling, 75 harmonic response analysis, 49, 420, 425 full method, 49 mode superposition method, 425 reduced method, 420 modal analysis, 36 mode superposition transient dynamic analysis, 514 Newton-Raphson, 854 p-method, 147 reduced transient dynamic analysis, 521 spectrum analysis, 63, 618 PSD, 618 single-point, 63 time, 514 transient dynamic analysis, 510, 510, 514, 521 full method, 510 mode superposition method, 514 reduced method, 521 load steps, 82 applying for transient loading, 510 load types, 27, 35 harmonic response analysis, 45 p-method, 147 load vector, 425, 514, 514 load-versus-time curve, 54 loads applying, 28, 32, 35, 48, 420, 514, 72, 857, 860, 147 p-method, 147 applying for transient loading, 59 direction in a large-deflection analysis, 86 harmonic response analysis, 45, 420, 425 mode superposition method, 425 reduced method, 420 modal analysis, 35 nonlinear analysis, 857 structural static analysis, 28, 28 transient dynamic analysis, 59, 59, 514, 521 full method, 59 mode superposition method, 514 reduced method, 521 Loads applying, 44 logarithmic strain, 87, 87
M
macros, 210 mass damping, 536 mass matrix formulation, 26, 34, 44, 59 master degrees of freedom selection of, 320 master DOF (MDOF), 320, 520 master DOFs definition of, 35 material curve fitting, 91 creep, 98 viscoelastic, 915 material model combinations, 835 material model interface, 12 material models shape memory alloy, 831 material nonlinearities, 82, 88 material properties, 143 fatigue, 132 material curve fitting, 91 nonlinear, 88 material-dependent damping, 536 matrix reduction, 319 theory of, 320 maximum strain failure criterion, 125 maximum stress failure criterion, 125 MDOF, 35 memory saving when generating stiffness matrix, 850 meshing a line for a section, 154 p-element, 144 metal forming, 833 midside nodes p-element, 144 MINREF [CNVTOL], 851 modal analysis, 31 applying loads, 35 mode-extraction methods, 33, 316
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index5
Index options for, 34 prestressed, 315 prestressed, large deflection, 315 procedure, 31 modal damping, 536, 63 modal solution obtaining, 513 single-point response spectrum analysis, 63 mode combination methods, 66 mode extraction methods QR Damped, 63 mode numbers, 27 mode superposition harmonic response analysis, 424 mode-extraction methods, 425 transient dynamic analysis, 513 mode superposition method, 43, 52 mode superposition transient dynamic analysis obtain the modal solution, 513 obtain the mode superposition transient solution, 514 mode-extraction methods, 33, 316 Block Lanczos, 33, 317, 425 damped, 33, 318 power dynamics, 33, 318 QR Damped, 33, 319, 425, 425, 513, 514 reduced, 33, 318 subspace, 33, 318 unsymmetric, 33, 318 mode-frequency analysis, 31 model geometry defining, 144 modeling the crack region, 111 modes expanding, 38 number of, 38 number to expand, 34 number to extract, 34 Mohr-Coulomb, 810 MONITOR command changes from SOLCONTROL, 856 Mooney-Rivlin constants, 821 MPRS analysis, 625 multi-point response spectrum, 61 multilinear elastic, 88 multilinear elasticity, 816 multilinear isotropic hardening, 810 multilinear kinematic hardening, 810 Newton-Raphson option, 26 Newton-Raphson options, 854 nodal coordinate systems p-method, 147 nodal forces and moments, 211 nodal solution listing format, 421 nonlinear analysis tips and guidelines, 864 nonlinear behavior causes, 81 nonlinear diagnostics, 865 nonlinear general beam sections, 159 nonlinear isotropic hardening, 810 nonlinear kinematic hardening, 810 nonlinear material properties material curve fitting, 91 nonlinear structural analysis automatic time stepping, 867 buckling, 72 conservative vs. nonconservative, 85 creep, 829 geometric nonlinearities, 86 hyperelasticity, 817 interpolation of results, 857 levels of operation, 82 load directions, 86 material nonlinearities, 88 nonlinear elements, 863 overview, 81 plasticity, 89 sample transient input, 862 swelling, 834 termination, 860 verifying results, 870 viscoelasticity, 833 viscoplasticity, 833 nonlinear transient analysis procedure, 860 number of eigenvalues to be extracted, 75 number of harmonic solutions, 49 number of integration points per layer, 123 number of solutions to expand, 421
O
obtain the modal solution, 425 offsets for sections, 152, 161 OPNCONTROL command changes through SOLCONTROL, 855 output, 870 database and results file, 22, 38, 410, 421, 57, 514, 524, 76, 850
N
natural frequencies, 310 Newton-Raphson, 82
Index6
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index printed, 27, 38, 410, 421, 514, 514, 523, 524, 76, 856 output control, 410, 514, 523, 76 output controls, 37, 38, 524, 75 sections, 152, 161 POST1, 211, 411, 423, 427, 511, 525, 68, 622, 77, 857, 115, 132 using, 412, 512 POST26, 211, 411, 421, 423, 427, 511, 523, 525, 623, 857 using, 411, 511 postprocessing fatigue, 131 for different analysis (see reviewing results) power dynamics method, 33, 318 power spectral density (PSD), 62 predictor, 853 predictor-corrector option, 24, 853 preintegrated general shell sections, 165 PRESOL command with p-elements, 1414 pressure loads in a large-deflection analysis, 86 prestress effects calculation, 26, 34, 74 prestressed analysis harmonic response, 428 mode superposition harmonic response, 429 transient, 532 prestressed full transient dynamic analysis procedure, 532 prestressed harmonic response analysis procedure, 428 prestressed modal analysis, 315 prestressed modal analysis of a large deflection, 315 prestressed mode superposition harmonic response analysis procedure, 429 prestressed mode superposition transient dynamic analysis procedure, 533 prestressed reduced transient dynamic analysis procedure, 533 printed output, 27, 410, 421, 514, 514, 523, 524, 76, 856 printing and plotting node and element results p-method, 1414 PRNSOL command with p-elements, 1414 probabilistic analysis, 62 program-selected masters, 322 proportional limit, 89 PSD analysis, 618 PSD type, 618 PSD-versus-frequency table, 618
P
p-elements meshing, 144 real constants, 143 p-level error-estimation range, 142 error-estimation techniques, 142 p-method, 141 benefits of, 141 guidelines for meshing, 145 internal DOFs, 147 load step options, 147 loads, 147 meshing the model, 144 p-element subgrid, 1412 printing and plotting results, 1414 querying subgrid results, 1412, 1413 reviewing results, 1412 solving common problems, 1412 specialized displays and listings, 1414 status of elements, 147 use of solvers, 147 using, 141 viewing the element model, 145 participation factor calculations, 37, 618 Peirce model, 833 Perzyna model, 833 phase angle for expansion, 421 phase angle of harmonic loads, 45 plastic, 88 plasticity, 89, 868 anisotropic, 810 automatic time stepping, 89 bilinear isotropic hardening, 810 bilinear kinematic hardening, 810 cast iron, 810 Drucker-Prager, 810 Hill anisotropic, 810 multilinear isotropic hardening, 810 multilinear kinematic hardening, 810 nonlinear isotropic hardening, 810 nonlinear kinematic hardening, 810 rate-dependent, 833 plastics, 833 PLNSOL command with p-elements, 1414 plotting
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index7
Index
Q
QR Damped extraction method harmonic analysis, 425 QR Damped method gap conditions, 514 harmonic analysis, 425 modal analysis, 33, 319 spectrum analysis, 63 transient analysis, 513, 514
R
ramped loads, 49, 57, 514, 523, 860 random vibrations, 618 and power spectral density, 62 range counting, 139 ratcheting effect, 810 rate-dependent plasticity , 833 ratio creep, 855 Rayleigh damping constants, 536 reaction forces and moments, 211 reading user-defined mesh, 152 real constants for layered elements, 123 reduced (Householder) method, 33 reduced analysis (see matrix reduction) reduced harmonic response analysis expand the solution, 421 reduced method, 318, 42, 53 reduced transient dynamic analysis expansion pass, 524 load step options, 521 obtain the reduced solution, 519 review results of expanded solution, 525 reference temperature, 27 relative stress distributions buckling analysis, 77 response PSD calculating, 623 response spectrum multi-point, 61 single-point, 61 type, 63 restart control, 24 restarts, 863 results data from a PSD analysis, 622 extrapolation of, 27, 410, 421, 524, 856 results file output, 22, 38, 410, 421, 57, 514, 524, 76, 850 reviewing results Index8
eigenvalue buckling, 77 fatigue, 139 harmonic response analysis, 411, 421, 427 full method, 411 mode superposition method, 427 reduced method, 421 modal analysis, 310 nonlinear static structural, 857 nonlinear transient structural, 862 reduced harmonic analysis, 423 spectrum analysis, 68, 622 PSD, 622 single-point, 68 static structural analysis, 210 transient dynamic analysis, 511, 518, 523 full method, 511 mode superposition method, 518 reduced method, 523 Rice's model, 810 rock, 810 rolling, 833 rubber, 817
S
sample buckling analysis command method, 712 GUI method, 78 sample harmonic response analysis command method, 418 GUI method, 413 sample input fatigue, 139 full transient dynamic analysis, 512 harmonic response analysis, 423, 427 mode superposition method, 427 reduced method, 423 mode superposition transient analysis, 518 nonlinear structural, 862 transient, 862 spectrum analysis, 624 PSD, 624 transient dynamic analysis, 518 mode superposition method, 518 sample modal analysis command method, 313 GUI method, 312 sample nonlinear analysis command method, 879 GUI method, 872 sample p-method analysis command method, 1418 GUI method, 1414
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index sample spectrum analysis command method, 616 GUI method, 610 sample static analysis command method, 224 GUI method, 213 sample transient dynamic analysis command method, 531 GUI method, 526 sandwich structures, 124 scaling the load vector, 425 .SECT file, 156 sections, 151, 161 associating subtypes with IDs, 152, 161 creating, 152, 155, 161 beam tool, 155 defining dimensions, 152, 161 geometry data of, 153, 162 libraries of, 1512, 165 meshing a line for, 154 solid, 153 thin wall, 153 shakedown effect, 810 shape memory alloy, 831 SHELL command with p-elements, 1414 shells, 161 preintegrated general sections, 165 shift point for eigenvalue calculation, 75 significant modes expanding, 66 single solution to expand, 524 single-point response spectrum, 61 acceleration response, 66 CQC mode combination method, 66 displacement response, 66 DSUM mode combination method, 66 expanding significant modes, 66 GRP mode combination method, 66 mode combination methods, 66 NRLSUM mode combination method, 66 procedure, 62 SRSS mode combination method, 66 velocity response, 66 single-point spectrum analysis load step option for, 63 singular elements, 111 slave DOF, 320 small deflection, 86 small strain analyses, 86 S-N curve, 132 soil, 810 solid sections, 153 solution obtain the mode superposition transient solution, 514 solution controls, 848 solution controls dialog box full transient analysis, 56, 56, 56 defining analysis type and options, 56 static analysis, 22 solution listing format, 44 solution method harmonic response, 44 solution methods, 42, 52 full, 42, 52 transient dynamic analysis, 42 mode superposition, 43, 52 reduced, 42, 53 solution termination, 25 solutions to be expanded, 524 solver, memory saving option, 850 solvers equation, 24, 850, 147 sparse direct solver, 44 specifying a p-level range, 142 specifying mesh controls, 144 spectral-value-versus-frequency curve, 63 spectrum, 61 spectrum analysis, 536, 61, 61 DDAM, 625 multi-point, 625 PSD, 618, 624 procedure, 618 sample input, 624 random vibration (PSD), 618 obtain the spectrum solution, 618 single-point, 62 procedure, 62 single-point response, 63, 63, 66 expand the modes, 66 obtain the modal solution, 63 obtain the spectrum solution, 63 spectrum data, 618 spectrum solution random vibration (PSD) analysis, 618 single-point response spectrum analysis, 63 spectrum type single-point response, 63 spin softening, 88 stability analysis, 71 static solution buckling analysis, 74 static structural analysis, 21
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.
Index9
Index loading, 28 procedure, 21 stepped loads, 49, 57, 514, 523, 860 stiffness matrix memory saving option, 850 strain creep, 829 strain energy, 116 strain rate creep, 829 strain rate effect, 24 stress calculations, 38, 421 stress concentration factors, 132 stress intensity factors, 111, 115 stress pass (see expansion pass) stress relaxation, 829 stress singularities accounting for in p-method, 147 PEXCLUDE command, 147 PINCLUDE command, 147 stress stiffening, 87 stress stiffening effects, 25, 532, 854 structural analyses buckling, 71 fatigue, 131 harmonic response, 41 modal, 31 nonlinear, 81 spectrum, 61 static, 21 transient dynamic, 51 structural analysis, 11 element types, 12 nonlinear, 81 structural energy error estimation, 211 STURM number, 37 subgrid results, 1413 subspace method, 33, 318 substeps, 82, 85, 850 swelling, 88, 834 swelling subroutine, 834 time step optimization thermal, 855 time steps, 82, 85, 86, 850 automatic, 22, 57, 535, 72, 851 number of, 22, 57, 867, 868 size of, 22, 57, 867 TOLER [CNVTOL], 851 transient dynamic analysis, 51 full method, 53 procedure, 53 load step options for, 510 methods of solution, 52 mode superposition method, 513 procedure, 513 preparing for, 51 prestressed, 532 reduced method, 519, 519 procedure, 519 reduced solution, 519 transient integration parameters, 57, 514, 522, 860 true strain, 87 true stress, 87, 87 Tsai-Wu failure criterion, 125
U
unsymmetric method, 33, 318 user defined material, 816 user mesh files, 1512 USERSW, 834
V
vector displays, 211, 68 vector norms, 851 vector plots, 412 vibration analysis, 31 virtual crack extension method, 118 viscoelastic material curve fitting, 915 viscoelasticity, 88, 833 element types, 833 viscoplasticity, 88, 833, 833 element types, 833 large strain, 833 Voce hardening law, 810
T
TABLE array parameters, 28 tabular listings, 211, 312, 412, 68, 857 tapered beams, 158 termination solution, 25 thin wall sections, 153 time, 523, 532 arc-length, 868 time integration effects, 57, 532, 860, 860
W
wave propagation effects, 533 writing user mesh, 152
Y
yield point, 89
Index10
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . SAS IP, Inc.